Preface
You have in your hands the three-volume treatise "The Science of Hysteresis". It consists of technical and review contributions written by active researchers in the field with intimate and firsthand knowledge of the subject matter and latest scientific innovations. The list of authors clearly reflects the interdisciplinary nature of hysteresis research as well as its truly international scope. Why should a reader be interested in this treatise? There are three reasons. The first is sheer scientific curiosity driven by the realization that the phenomenon of hysteresis is ubiquitous. It is encountered in many different areas of natural science, engineering and economics. Hysteresis is of considerable practical utility in such areas as magnetic data storage and permanent magnet technologies. On the other hand, hysteresis is detrimental and must be carefully controlled in such fields as the development of accurate positioning devices and the design of power equipment with low energy losses. The description of hysteresis phenomena is of remarkable physical and mathematical complexity that can be traced back to history-induced memory properties of hysteresis nonlinearities. This makes hysteresis research very challenging, yet interesting and attractive. The second reason is the conceptual richness of these three volumes. They expose the remarkable breadth of hysteresis phenomena and hysteresis related research, bring together various mathematical, physical and materials science aspects of hysteresis, reveal their intricate relations, and establish interesting and promising connections between different scientific approaches to the study of hysteresis. The theoretical and experimental sides of hysteresis research are presented in the unbiased and balanced way. The third reason is the sheer scope of this treatise. It consists of three volumes. The first volume contains contributions on mathematical models of hysteresis and differential equations with hysteresis operators. The phenomenological scalar and vector Preisach models of hysteresis are prominently featured in this volume as well. This volume also deals with stochastic aspects of hysteresis, the control theory of systems with hysteresis, binary detection by using hysteresis operators and hysteresis models of unemployment in economics. The second volume covers physical models of magnetic hysteresis and related topics of magnetization dynamics. ix
x
Preface
In this volume, random-field Ising models of hysteresis, Barkhausen effect (noise), thermodynamic, analytical, and numerical aspects of micromagnetics are presented from modern and novel perspectives. The volume is concluded by the discussion of general aspects of Landau- Lifshitz magnetization dynamics, with applications to the analysis of precessional switching, relaxation phenomena, self-oscillations and switching induced by spin-polarized current injection, spin-wave phenomena for large magnetization motions. The third volume deals with hysteresis phenomena in materials. It contains contributions on hysteresis of conventional and nanostructured magnetic materials, hysteresis of type II superconductors with sharp and gradual resistive transitions and hysteresis of piezoelectric and ferroelectric materials. Research contributions on hysteresis of shape-memory alloys, geophysical materials and soil-moisture hysteresis are prominently featured in this volume as well. We maintain that this three-volume treatise will be a valuable reference for both experts and beginners in the field. It will serve as a unique source of ideas, concepts, insights and facts for applied mathematicians, physicists, engineers, materials scientists and economists engaged in the fundamental study of hysteresis and its far-reaching applications. As such, we hope this treatise is destined for distinction and long remembrance. This treatise represents the collective effort of many authors. We are very grateful to all of them, as without their contributions this publication would not have been possible. Giorgio Bertotti and Isaak Mayergoyz, Editors
Contributors
Stavros A. Belbas
Mathematics Department, University of Alabama Tuscaloosa, AL 35487-0350, USA Martin Brokate
Zentrum Mathematik, TU Munich, Germany Rod Cross
Department of Economics, University of Strathclyde, Sir William Duncan Building, 130 Rottenrow, Glasgow G4 0GE, UK Julia Darby
Department of Economics, University of Strathclyde, Sir William Duncan Building, 130 Rottenrow, Glasgow G4 0GE, UK Can E. Korman
Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, The George Washington University, Washington, DC 20052, USA Isaak D. Mayergoyz
Electrical and Computer Engineering Department and UMIACS, University of Maryland, College Park MD 20742, USA Laura Piscitelli
Department of Economics, University of Strathclyde, Sir William Duncan Building, 130 Rottenrow, Glasgow G4 0GE, UK Alexei Pokrovskii
Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland Dmitrii Rachinskii
Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland
xi
xii
CONTRIBUTORS
Oleg Rasskazov Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland Augusto Visintin Dipartimento di Matematica dell'Universita degli Studi di Trento, via Sommarive 14, 38050 Povo di Trento, Italia
Contributors
u
Basso
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Giorgio Bertotti
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Karin A. Dahmen
Physics Department, University of Illinois at Urbana/Champaign, 1110 West Green Street, Urbana, IL 61801-3080, USA Antonio DeSimone
SISSA-International School for Advanced Studies, via Beirut 4, 34014 Trieste, Italy Rok Dittrich
Vienna University of Technology, Solid State Physics, Wiedner Haupstr. 8-10, A-1040 Vienna, Austria Gianfranco Durin
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Josef Filder
Vienna University of Technology, Solid State Physics, Wiedner Haupstr. 8-10, A-1040 Vienna, Austria Hermann Forster
Vienna University of Technology, Solid State Physics, Wiedner Haupstr. 8-10, A-1040 Vienna, Austria Robert V. Kohn
Courant Institute of Mathematical Sciences, New York University, 251 Mercer Street, New York, NY 10023 USA Martino LoBue
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy xi
xii
CONTRIBUTORS
Alessandro Magni
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Stefan Miiller
Max-Planck-Institut f/ir Mathematik in den Naturwissenschaften, Inselstrai~e 24, D-04103 Leipzig, Germany Isaak D. Mayergoyz
Electrical and Computer Engineering Department and UMIACS, University of Maryland, College Park MD 20742, USA Felix Otto
Institut f~irAngewandte Mathematik, Universit/it Bonn, Wegelerstrai~e 10, 53115 Bonn, Germany Olga Perkovi4 URS Corporation, 600 Montgomery Street, 26th floor, San Francisco, CA 94111-2727, USA Werner Scholz
Vienna University of Technology, Solid State Physics, Wiedner Haupstr. 8-10, A-1040 Vienna, Austria Thomas Schrefl
University of Sheffield, Department of Engineering Materials, Mappin Street, Sheffield $1 3JD, UK James P. Sethna
Laboratory of Atomic and Solid State Physics (LASSP), Clark Hall, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY 14853-2501, USA Dieter Suess
Vienna University of Technology, Solid State Physics, Wiedner Haupstr. 8-10, A-1040 Vienna, Austria Claudio Serpico
Dipartimento di Ingegneria Elettrica, Universita degli Studi di Napoli 'Federico II', via Claudio 21, 80125 Napoli, Italy Stefano Zapperi
INFM SMC and UdR Roma 1, Dipartimento di Fisica, Universita 'La Sapienza', Ple A. Moro 2, 00185 Roma, Italy
Contributors
Carlo Appino Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Cinzia Beatrice Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Dragan Damjanovic Ceramics Laboratory, Materials Science and Engineering Institute, School of Engineering, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology- EPFL, 1015 Lausanne, Switzerland Luc Delaey Departement Metaalkunde en Toegepaste Materiaalkunde, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, de Croylaan 2, B-3000 Heverlee, Belgium Fausto Fiorillo Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Denis Flynn Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland Robert A. Guyer Department of Physics and Astronomy, University of Massachusetts, Amherst, MA 01003, USA Isaak D. Mayergoyz Electrical and Computer Engineering Department and UMIACS, University of Maryland, College Park MD 20742, USA Hugh McNamara Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland xi
xii
CONTRIBUTORS
Jordi Ortfn
Departament d'Estructura i Constituents de la Mat6ria, Facultat de Fisica, Universitat de Barcelona, Diagonal, 647, E-08028 Barcelona, Catalonia, Spain Philip O'Kane
Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland Massimo Pasquale
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy Antoni Planes
Departament d'Estructura i Constituents de la Mat6ria, Facultat de Fisica, Universitat de Barcelona, Diagonal, 647, E-08028 Barcelona, Catalonia, Spain Alexei Pokrovskii
Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, Ireland Paola Tiberto
Istituto Elettrotecnico Nazionale Galileo Ferraris, Strada delle Cacce 91, 10135 Torino, Italy
CHAPTER 1
Mathematical Models of Hysteresis Augusto Visintin, Dipartimento di Matematica dell'Universita c/egli Studi di Trento, via Sommarive 14, 38050 Povo di Trento, /ta/ia
Contents 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13
Hysteresis Operators The Duhem Model Rheological Models of Elasto-plasticity Discontinuous Hysteresis Micromagnetism Models of Hysteresis with Internal Variables Genesis of Hysteresis and Coupling with PDEs A Transport Equation with Hysteresis A Quasilinear Parabolic PDE with Hysteresis A Quasilinear Hyperbolic PDE with Hysteresis Hysteresis in Porous-Media Filtration Conclusions Appendix. Elements of Convex Calculus Acknowledgement References
3 13 17 35 45 56 62 69 78 91 98 105 107 114 114
INTRODUCTION This is a survey of past and ongoing research on mathematical modeling of hysteresis phenomena; it aims to illustrate some aspects of the mathematics of hysteresis and of its applications, also in connection with partial differential equations (PDEs). Following Krasnosel'skii [1], first we introduce the concept of hysteresis operator and study some examples, then we establish connections with applications, finally we deal with related differential equations. The Science of Hysteresis Volume I, II and III G. Bertotti and I. Mayergoyz Copyright 9 2005 Elsevier Inc. All rights reserved.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis We concentrate our attention upon three phenomena of relevant physical and engineering interest: hysteresis in continuum mechanics, in ferromagnetism, and in filtration through porous media. The first two topics have been dealt with in some of the monographs on hysteresis that have appeared in the last years [1-9]. These works regard hysteresis as a unifying mathematical concept for a number of phenomena; a large physical and technical literature however does not refer to this (more recent) mathematical approach. We review some general features of elasto-plasticity and micromagnetism, and introduce a mathematical model of hysteresis in filtration through porous media. Apparently the latter topic has received little attention so far; its analysis is still open, and we outline a recent approach. The outcome of most of these models consists of PDEs that include hysteresis nonlinearities. In order to illustrate the main analytic techniques that are known for equations of that type, here we study some parabolic and hyperbolic PDEs that contain hysteresis operators. Here is our plan. In Section 1.1 we define hysteresis as rate-independent memory, introduce the notion of hysteresis operator, illustrate some of its properties, and also define the more general class of hysteresis relations. In Section 1.2 we briefly deal with the classic Duhem model; because of its simplicity, this seems to be a good example to start with, although it exhibits some drawbacks. Section 1.3 is devoted to elasto-plasticity. First we define two basic hysteresis operators, the stop and the play; by means of series and parallel combinations, we then construct the larger class of Prandtl-Ishlinskii models and the corresponding hysteresis operators. This setting is quite peculiar, since a number of results can be derived in the framework of the theory of Convex Analysis, that we review in the Appendix. In Section 1.4 we deal with discontinuous hysteresis; we introduce relay operators, the Preisach model, and their vector extensions. We also provide a weak formulation, which turns out to be especially convenient in the analysis of related problems at the PDEs, cf. Section 1.10. In Section 1.5 we outline the classic theory of ferromagnetism known as micromagnetism, and review the Landau-Lifshitz equation. This model accounts for a relaxation dynamic and thus is rate-dependent, but nevertheless is at the basis of ferromagnetic hysteresis; this apparent contradiction is explained by the shortness of the time-scale of relaxation. By adding a friction term and letting the relaxation time vanish, we derive a purely rate-independent mesoscopic model of ferromagnetism. In Section 1.6 we discuss some general properties of hysteresis models with internal variables, which are represented by a population of hysteretic elements; this class includes the Prandtl-Ishlinskii and Preisach models.
1.1 HYSTERESISOPERATORS In Section 1.7 we illustrate how feedback and nonmonotonicity can generate hysteresis, and discuss how hysteresis may arise in spacedistributed systems. The next three sections introduce the reader to the analysis of PDEs with hysteresis. We begin in Section 1.8 by studying a simple semilinear transport equation with continuous hysteresis. In Section 1.9 we then deal with a quasilinear parabolic equation with continuous hysteresis, and in Section 1.10 with a quasilinear hyperbolic equation of second order with discontinuous hysteresis. The latter is also the weak formulation of a free boundary problem. For each of these equations we prove existence of a solution and, for the two former ones, also its uniqueness. In Section 1.11 we deal with hysteresis in porous-media filtration; we introduce two rate-dependent modifications of a hysteresis model, and discuss a related boundary- and initial-value problem. In Section 1.12 we draw conclusions, and point out the novelties that have been included in this survey, as well as some open problems; we also indicate some very recent advances in the study of hysteresis. In these developments, notions and results of convex calculus and variational inequalities are often used; we review some elements of that theory in the Appendix. These notes are far from having any ambition of completeness, and rather aim to introduce the reader to a research in full development. References to the literature may be found especially in the final parts of Sections 1.3, 1.5 and 1.11 and of the Appendix. An effort has been made to allow for independent reading of different sections, and to make a large part of this work accessible to a nonmathematical audience. Of course, to make an effort does not mean to attain a result.., actually, this has not even been tried in Sections 1.8, 1.9 and 1.10 that are devoted to nonlinear PDEs with hysteresis.
1.1 H Y S T E R E S I S O P E R A T O R S In this section we characterize hysteresis as rate-independent memory; we then define hysteresis operators, along the lines of Krasnosel'skiT and coworkers (see e.g. [1]), and discuss some of their properties.
1.1.1 HYSTERESIS AND HYSTERESIS LOOPS Hysteresis occurs in several phenomena in physics, chemistry, biology, engineering and so on. In physics for instance we encounter it in plasticity, friction, ferromagnetism, ferroelectricity, superconductivity,
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis adsorption and desorption, and in the recently studied materials with shape memory. More generally, hysteresis arises in phase transitions. Many other examples are known and wait for mathematical investigation. Let us consider a simple setting, namely a system whose state is characterized by two scalar variables, u and w, which we assume to depend continuously on time, that we denote by t. Here we assume a purely phenomenologic point of view: we regard the system as a (deterministic) black box, neglect its internal constitution, and assume that the evolution of w is determined by that of u. In the terminology of system theory, u is then referred to as input and w as output. In the final part of this section we shall also consider a more general approach. Let us outline a classic measurement apparatus, cf. e.g. [10]. By applying an electric current through a conducting solenoid w o u n d around a ring-shaped ferromagnetic material, one can determine a coaxial magnetic field, H, in the ferromagnet and control its intensity, u. This magnetic field determines a magnetic induction field, B, in the ferromagnet. By winding a secondary coil around the r i n g a n d connecting it to a fluxometer, one can then measure the_~intensity w of B. In first approximation, one can assume that the fields H and B are uniform within the ferromagnet, and regard them just as functions of time. In Fig. 1.1 we sketch the evolution of the pair (u, w) in a simple test. If u increases from Ul to u2, the pair (u, w) moves along a monotone curve ABC; conversely, if u decreases from u2 to Ul, then (u, w) moves along a different monotone curve CDA. Moreover, if u inverts its motion when Ul < u(t) < u2, then (u, w) moves into the interior of the hysteresis region, s namely the part of the (u, w)-plane that is bounded by the major loop ABCDA. (The m a x i m u m of - u w along the hysteresis loop might be regarded as a crude measure of the thickness of this hysteresis loop.) This qualitative behavior must be quantitatively represented by means of specific models. Here we assume that the pair (u, w) moves along continuous curves, and speak of continuous hysteresis; afterwards we shall also deal with discontinuous hysteresis. It is convenient to assume that any point of the hysteresis region s is accessible to the pair (u, w). In typical cases, the system is controlable, that is, by means of a suitable choice of the input function u the system can be driven from any initial point of s to any final point of s In any case we assume that the evolution of w is uniquely determined by that of u; this will be made precise by formulating the concept of hysteresis operator. In this simplified setting we are assuming that at any instant t the state of the system is completely characterized by the pair (u(t), w(t)). This is a severe restriction, and actually fails in several examples of major physical
1.1 HYSTERESIS OPERATORS
_
Ul
7,/1-7
,
/
i
FIGURE 1.1 Continuous hysteresis loop.
interest, as we shall see. Later on we shall encounter models that also account for the evolution of internal variables.
Memory At any instant t, w(t) d e p e n d s on the previous evolution of u and on the initial state of the system; we can express this as follows:
w(t) = [be(u, w~
u ~ [0, T].
(1.1)
We a s s u m e that
(u(0), w ~ e s
[0~(u, w~
= w~
Here ? ( . , w ~ represents an operator that acts a m o n g suitable spaces of t i m e - d e p e n d e n t functions, for any fixed w ~ We also a s s u m e that 2v( ., w ~ is causal: for any t E [0, T], the o u t p u t w(t) is i n d e p e n d e n t of ul[t,T], i.e.,
Ul[[0,t ] -- U2[[0,t ] :::> [.)t-(U1,
w~
= [.~'(u2, w~
(1.2)
1.1.2 RATE-INDEPENDENCE We require the p a t h of the pair (u(t), w(t)) to be invariant with respect to any increasing diffeomorphism ~o 9 [0, T] -+ [0, T], i.e., ? ( u o ~p, w ~ = Y(u, w ~ o ~p
in [0, T]"
(1.3)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis in other terms, for any fixed w ~ .~'(.,w ~
~
.~'(.,w ~ 1 6 2
This means that at any instant t, w(t) only depends on u([0, t]) and on the order in which values have been attained before t. We name this property rate-independence, and regard it as the main characteristic of hysteresis. It is essential for representing hysteresis graphically in the (u, w)-plane, like in Fig. 1.1, without the need of relating the different branches to any specific time-law of the input u(t). In particular, this entails frequencyindependence: if the input function u is periodic, the w versus u relation does not depend on the frequency. (However, notice that here a frequency analysis via the classic integral transformations does not seem natural, since hysteresis is a nonlinear phenomenon.) The above definition of hysteresis includes cases in which the output anticipates the input, instead of lagging behind it; for instance, this occurs in univariate elasto-plasticity, if strain and stress are respectively represented on the abscissa and ordinate axes. However, the orientation of hysteresis loops is not intrinsic, for it depends on the choice of which variable is regarded as input and which one as output, and in many cases either choices are admissible. Although most typical examples of hysteresis phenomena exhibit hysteresis loops, the occurrence of loops should not be regarded as an essential feature of hysteresis. Indeed, one can easily conceive rate-independent models in which no loop occurs (cf. (1.8) below). In some cases the hysteresis region is unbounded, as we shall see for some relevant examples in Section 1.3. Rate-dependent loops may also occur; for instance, electric losses due to eddy currents cannot be ascribed to hysteresis. For the hysteresis operator $" it is also natural to assume the following
semigroup property: V(u, w ~ ~ Dom(.T), V[tl, t2] c]0, T], setting w(tl) "= [.T(u, w~ [.T(u, w~ -- [.T(u(tl + .), w(tl))](t2 - tl).
(1.4)
Nondegenerate hysteresis relations are irreversible, that is, they are not invariant for time-reversal; in fact the pair (u, w) moves along branching and merging paths. Hysteresis is typically associated with dissipation; for instance in ferromagnetism and in elasto-plasticity, in periodic processes, at any cycle an amount of energy proportional to the area of the region encircled by the hysteresis loop is dissipated.
1.1 HYSTERESISOPERATORS
1.1.3 MEMORY SEQUENCES For any piecewise monotone input function u, on account of rateindependence, at any instant t E ]0, T] the output of a hysteresis operator is determined by the relative maxima and minima of u in the time interval [0~ t], namely, by the (finite) sequence of values attained by u at the instants {ti} (ti < t) at which u had inverted its monotonicity. {u(ti)} is accordingly n a m e d a memory sequence; it contains all the information that is needed to determine the output of any hysteresis operator, on account of the rate-independence of the latter. Anyway, it is k n o w n that (either finite or infinite) sequences of local maxima and minima like that m a y fail to exist even for continuous functions. One then defines reduced memory sequences as follows. For any u C O([0, T]) and any t E]0~ T], let tl equal the last instant at which lul attains its m a x i m u m in [0, t], and let u] equal the corresponding value of u. For definiteness, let us assume that u(t]) > 0. Let then t2 equal the last instant at which lul attains its m i n i m u m in [tl, t], and u2 equal that minimum. Next let t3 equal the last instant at which lul attains its m a x i m u m in [t2, t], and let u3 equal that maximum; and go on alternating local maxima and local minima of u. In this w a y two (either finite or infinite) sequences {tj} and {u (tj) } are constructed: 0~tl
< u(t)
(1.5)
u(t) < . . . < u(t2j+l) < . . . < u(tl), and, if the n u m b e r of steps is infinite,
tj ,7 t~
u(t2j) ,,7 u(t),
u(t2j+]) "N u(t)
as j ~ cx~.
(1.6)
For some hysteresis operators (but not for all), at any instant the output is determined by the reduced m e m o r y sequence of the input.
1.1.4 HYSTERESIS AND MONOTONICITY The monotonicity of the output versus input relation plays an important role in the analysis of m a n y nonlinear operators. There are several forms of monotonicity, and for m e m o r y operators the range of possibilities is even larger. The standard L2-monotonicity property
~0
T[~'(Ul) -- .~'(U2)](Ul -- u 2 ) d t ~ 0
VUl, U2 E D o m O v)
(1.7)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis is too strong a requirement for hysteresis operators. The following simple counterexample should convince the reader that a rate-independent operator is monotone with respect to the usual scalar product of L2(0, T) only if it is reduced to a superposition operator, namely, only if it is the form Y(u) = q~o u for some function ~p" R ~ R. In other terms, no genuine hysteresis operator is L2-monotone. (An example of the devastating power of rate-independence...) Let .T'" W 1'1(0, T) x R ~ W 1'1(0, Z)" (u, w 0) ~ w be defined by means of the following Cauchy problem dw (an)+ dt = d-t
in ]0, T[,
w(0) - w ~
(1.8)
(here x + " - (x + Ixl)/2 for any x ~ R). Causality and rate-independence are straightforward, thus ~- is a hysteresis operator; actually, this is an especially simple example of the D u h e m operator, cf. Section 1.2. Let us fix any T > 3n/2 and set Ul(t) "= sin t
u ~ [0, 3n/2], u2(t) "= 0
ul(t) " = - 1
u ~ [3n/2, T],
Vt E [0, T];
cf. Fig. 1.2. Setting wi "= YC(ui, 0) for i = 1, 2, we have [wl(t) --
w2(t)][ul(t)
--
u2(t)] ~- --1
u
For T large enough the inequality (1.1.7) then fails. This construction can easily be extended to virtually any nondegenerate hysteresis operator. It suffices to select (i) two points (u', w'), (u", w") such that ( w " - w')(u" - u') < 0, and (ii) an input function ul and a t > 0 such that Ul(0) = U',
Ul(t) = u"
Yt~t,
[.T'(Ul, W')](t) -- W".
(That is, the input Ul takes the system from (u', w') at t = 0 to (u", w") at t=t.)
Finally, let us set u2(t) = u t in R +, so that .T(u2, w') = w t. This yields
--jlT ([Y(uI, w')] - [~'(u2, w')])(ux = (T - t ) ( w ' -
w')(u" - u') < 0
u2)at u
> t;
if T is large enough, we then get f T ([ 9v(ul, w')] -- [Y(u2, w')])(Ul -- u2)at < o. dO
1.1 HYSTERESIS OPERATORS W
'/
/
(0,01
,/
FIGURE 1.2 Counterexample to L2-monotonicity: the pair (u, w) moves from (0, 0) to (-1, 1) via (1, 1) in the time interval [0, 37r/2], and stays there for t > 3~/2. If T is large enough, then fT (Wl - w2)(Ul - u2) dt < 0. 1.1.5 OTHER MONOTONICITY PROPERTIES
Several hysteresis operators are
order-preserving:
V(ul, w~ (u2, w ~ ~ Dom(.)v), u ~]0, T], Ul<~U2 in [0, t], w 10~<w20 :=:> [.T(Ul, wO)](t)~[.,~(u2, w0)](t).
(1.9)
The following property of piecewise monotonicity preservation (more briefly, piecewise monotonicity) seems especially appropriate for hysteresis operators: u w ~ E Dom(>'), V[tl, t2] c [0, T], if u is either nondecreasing or nonincreasing in [tl, t2], then the same holds for Y(u, w~
(1.10)
i.e., U, W :-- .~'(U, W 0) E W 1'1(0, T)
==>
du dw dt dt >~0
a.e. in]0, T[.
(1.11)
This simply means that hysteresis branches are nondecreasing. Let us say that a hysteresis operator Y is piecewise antimonotone whenever - Y is piecewise monotone. Piecewise monotonicity (or antimonotonicity) is a necessary but nonsufficient condition for invertibility
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
10
of a hysteresis operator; that is, any hysteresis operator is invertible only if it is either piecewise monotone or piecewise antimonotone, but neither property suffices to guarantee the invertibility, even if monotonicity (or antimonotonicity) is strict. It is easy to see that, for any hysteresis operator, order preservation entails piecewise monotonicity. The converse fails: Duhem operators (cf. Section 1.2) exhibit counterexamples. One might also wonder whether piecewise monotonicity entails rate-independence. The following counterexample, due to P. Krej~i, answers this question in the negative: [~'(u)](t) - t u ( t ) - f0 t u(~)dr
u ~ CO([0, T]).
(1.12)
For any u e W 1'1(0, Z), W :-- .T'(U) E W 1'1 (0, Z),
w ( t ) --
f0 t ~ -du ~ (~) d r
in [0, T];
thus (1.1.11) holds. However gv is rate-dependent (thus it is nota hysteresis operator). 1.1.6 RATE-DEPENDENT CORRECTIONS
The definition of rate-independence excludes any viscous-type memory, such as that represented by time-convolution. However, even in typical hysteresis phenomena, like ferromagnetism, ferroelectricity, and plasticity, memory effects are not purely rate-independent, for hysteresis is coupled with (what we might loosely define as) viscosity-type effects. One might tentatively represent the output as the sum of hysteretic and viscous components: W m -~'tot(U) :~-~ .~hys(U) -ff .~'vis(U). (1.13) This is a rather crude extension. Other expressions might be considered, too: for instance, one might consider a relaxation dynamics of the form dw
du
W -ff ~l-"TY(lt -- .T'(U) -}- ~2 d---t '
(1.14)
~1, ~2 being relaxation constants. In Section 1.11 we shall discuss examples
of this rate-dependent correction in connection with hysteresis in porous media filtration. Usually rate-dependent effects get larger as the rate increases, and vanish as the rate vanishes. Therefore hysteresis is more evident at slow regimes, whereas it may be dominated by viscosity at fast regimes. In
11
1.1 HYSTERESISOPERATORS
applications hysteresis appears only if the time-scale is sufficiently slow, and we are induced to regard as hysteretic those p h e n o m e n a for which the rate-independent component prevails at typical regimes. Several continuous hysteresis operators are constructed as follows: first the operator is defined for piecewise monotone (equivalently, piecewise linear) input functions. A uniform continuity property is then established; this allows one to extend the operator by continuity to a complete function space, usually either C o ([0, T]) or W 1'1(0, T). This extension preserves several properties: causality, rate-independence, piecewise monotonicity, and so on. 1.1.7 HYSTERESIS RELATIONS
So far we have assumed that the evolution of the variable w is determined by that of u, and accordingly regarded u as input and w as output. However this is not always the case, and we outline a more general point of view, in which the functions u and w are set on equal ground. We deal with functions u and w that are elements of some Banach space, B, of functions of time (e.g., B - C~ T]) or B - W1'1(0, Z)). We assume that we are given a functional (I) 9 B2 x [0, T] --~ R, and constrain a pair (u, w) E B2 by setting O(u, w, t) = 0
u ~ [0, T].
(1.15)
In general (I)(u, w, t) depends not only on u(t) and w(t) at the instant t, but also on the evolution of both variables; namely, (I)(u, w, .) is a m e m o r y functional. We say that (1.15) is a hysteresis relation if (I) is causal and rate-independent. Here by causality we mean that u E [0, T], Uli[0,t ] - u2][0,t ], Wli]t,T] = ==~ O(Ul, Wl, t) = O(U2, W2, t);
W2I]t,T]
(1.16)
thus (I)(u, w, t) does not depend o n UI]t,T]a n d wi]t,T]. By rate-independence we mean that, for any increasing smooth diffeomorphism ~0 : [0, T] [0, T], (I)(u o (p, w o ~0, t) = (I)(u, w, ~0(t))
u ~ [0, T];
this generalizes (1.3). Any hysteresis operator jr : B x R o determines the hysteresis relation (I)(u, w, t) "- [Y(u, w(0))](t) -
w(t)
(1.17) B trivially
Vt ~ [0, T], V(u, w) ~ B2.
(1.18)
12
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
If we allow the operator 9 to be multivalued, then we get a wide class of hysteresis models. Hysteresis can also be represented without using the notion of hysteresis operator (or relation). In Sections 1.4 and 1.5, dealing with discontinuous hysteresis and with micromagnetism, we shall see two alternative formulations.
1.1.8 HISTORICAL NOTE Rate-dependent memory has been known to mathematicians for a long time: Volterra's pioneering studies date back to the beginning of the last century. On the other hand the history of hysteresis (i.e., rate-independent memory) is quite short: mathematical developments have been lagging behind those of physicists and engineers. Of course, mathematics has been used in works of applied scientists on hysteresis, but there it occurred more as calculus than in the form of functional analysis. Apparently, it was only in 1966 that hysteresis was first given a functional approach. This was due to an engineering student: in [11,12] R. Bouc modeled several hysteresis phenomena, regarding hysteresis as a map between function spaces. The Bouc hysteresis operator is briefly reviewed in Section 1.2. In 1970 M.A. Krasnosel'skii and co-workers [13] first formulated (what now is called) the Prandtl-Ishlinskii model in terms of hysteresis operators. Then Krasnosel'skiL Pokrovskii and others conducted a systematic analysis of the mathematical properties of these operators. In the period 1970-80, they published a number of papers, several of which also appeared in English translation. This formed the basis for their 1983 monograph [1], which was translated into English in 1989. In the 1980s some western applied mathematicians and mathematical physicists also began to study hysteresis models issued from applications, especially PDEs with hysteresis. In recent years, research on models of hysteresis phenomena has been progressing, see e.g. the monographs [1-9]. The notion of hysteresis operator (or relation) raises several questions: the adequacy of these operators to represent specific applicative phenomena, the analysis of their properties (continuity in various functional spaces, construction of the closure of discontinuous hysteresis operators, and so on), their characterization, the study of their operator structure, the identification of parameters, and so on. Special attention needs to be paid to both ordinary equations and PDEs that include these operators. Something has been done, but much more is left to do.
1.2 THE DUHEM MODEL
13
1.2 THE D U H E M M O D E L In this section we outline a hysteresis model, which seems to be due to the nineteenth-century physicist P. D u h e m [15]; this model has an especially simple analytic representation, but also exhibits some drawbacks which reduce its applicability. We also mention a related model of hysteresis due to R. Bouc [11]. For any differentiable input function u(t) and any initial value w ~ of w, we define the output function w(t) to be the solution of the following initial value problem:
dw
- ~ = gl(U, W)
(du)+ -
g2(u, w)(-d~t ) -
in]0, T[
(1.19)
w(0) - w ~
where we set x + := (Ixl + x)/2 and x - := (Ixl - x)/2 for any x ~ R. Here gl and g2 are prescribed (nonnegative) functions, and are assumed to be so regular that the Cauchy problem (1.19) has one and only one solution; cf. Theorem 1.2.1 below. As we saw in Section 1.1, irreversibility is one of the main features of hysteresis; we thus assume that (1.19) only holds for increasing time, and impose the constraint dt > 0 throughout this section. Multiplying both members of (1.19)1 by dt, the positive and negative parts are then preserved, and we formally get the equivalent equation dw
du
[ gl(u, w) = /
g2(u, w)
if du > 0
in ]0, T[.
(1.20)
if du < 0
In this w a y we have eliminated time, and rate-dependence has become evident. Under appropriate regularity conditions, two systems of curves are obtained in the (u, w)-plane by integrating the fields gl and g2; these curves respectively represent the paths of evolution of the pair (u, w) for increasing and decreasing u. These curves m a y span either the whole plane R 2 or just a subset. By setting sign o ( x ) ' - - 1 if x < 0 , signo(O) "- O, signo(X) "- 1 if x > O,
g(u, w, - 1 ) "- g2(u, w), g(u, w, O) "- O, g(u, w, 1) "- gl(u, w),
V(u, w) E R 2,
14
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
we can also write (1.20) in the form
dw = g (u, W, signo ( dU du or equivalently,
in ]0, T[ (dt > 0),
(1.21)
((du))
dw _ h u, w in ]0, T[ (dt > 0); (1.22) dt ' here the function h is positively homogeneous of degree one with respect to its third argument. These equivalent representations of the equation (1.19) illustrate a connection between the sign function, positive homogeneity of degree one, and rate-independence: these are basic ingredients of the analytic representation of hysteresis, and in the sequel we shall encounter other examples of this interplay. In this model at any instant t the state is characterized by the pair (u(t), w(t)) without any internal variable. This is not always satisfactory for applications, as is shown by the following example. Let us move from the origin of the (u, w)-plane and, by a suitable choice of the input function u, come back to the origin along a closed curve. According to (1.19), the system should forget this process; the same should occur for any other closed loop in the (u, w)-plane. But, for several ferromagnetic materials experimental tests are at variance with this prediction. This suggests that for those materials the state is not completely characterized by the pair (u, w), and that the evolution of one or more interior parameters should also be described by the model. In the next sections we shall see some examples of hysteresis models that include internal variables. Nevertheless, some physicists and engineers use relations of the form (1.19) to represent ferromagnetic hysteresis, maybe because of its simplicity; one can then expect that the drawback we just pointed out might be quantitatively negligible for some materials and for certain processes. If gl, g2~>0 then the Duhem operator D is piecewise monotone, cf. (1.10); but simple examples show that it needs not be order-preserving, that is,
Ul~U2 in [0, T]
~:~
/9(ul, W0)~/~)(U2, W0) in [0, T].
(1.23)
Moreover, in general the output of the Duhem operator is not determined by the reduced memory sequence of the input, defined in Section 1.1. (We leave the search for simple counterexamples to the reader.) 1.2.1 CONFINEMENT
Dealing with (1.19) we allowed the pair (u, w) to vary in the whole R 2. A more interesting model is obtained if (u, w) is confined to a region/2 c R 2
1.2 THE DUHEM MODEL
15
that is comprised between the graphs of two monotone continuous functions. This can be represented as follows. Let us assume that we are given two functions 7f, 7r : R ~ [-cx~, +cx~] continuous and nondecreasing, ];r~O~f, (1.24) and set
J(u) := [~/r(U), ~s
r
h(u)(w)
w) :=
V(u, w) E R 2
(see the Appendix for the definition of the indicator function Ii(u)). We then couple the rate-independent differential inclusion dw (du)+ (du)dt E ~p(u, w) + gl (u, w) - ~ -- g2(u, w) - ~
in ]0, T[ (dt > 0) (1.25) with the initial condition (1.19)2. By Proposition A.9, the inclusion (1.25) is equivalent to the following variational inequality (still with dt > 0):
/i
- gl(u, w) - ~
in ,i
+ g2(u, w) - ~
(w - v)~O
in ]0, T[.
(1.26) The differential equation (1.22) can easily be extended to vectors. For any N > 1, it suffices to replace the scalar function h : R 3 --+ R by a vector function h 9 (RN) 3 -+ R N that is positively homogeneous of degree one with respect to its third argument. 1.2.2 SOME PROPERTIES OF THE DUHEM OPERATOR
Here we just state a result, and refer to [8; Chapter V] for details. THEOREM1.2.1. Assume that gl, g2 are continuous, and that
Igi(u, Wl) - g i ( u , w2)i~L(u)lwl - w21
'v'u, Wl, w2 E R (i = 1, 2), (1.27)
with L : R ~ R + continuous. Then, for any u ~ W 1,1 (0, T) and any w ~ E R, there exists a unique w "-/9(u, w ~ E W1'1(0, T) that fulfils (1.19). The Duhem operator 19(., w ~ is strongly continuous in W 1,p(0, T)for any p E [1, +cx~], and is strongly and weakly continuous in C 1([0, T]).
16
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
Even under smoothness assumptions on the prescribed functions gl and g2, in general the Duhem operator is not continuous with respect to the weak topology of W 1,p (0, T) for any p~ 1. Actually, even small-amplitude oscillations of the input field u may trigger large drifts of the output w. For instance, for any T > 0, let gl - 1 and g2 - - 0
in R 2,
un(t) = sin(nt)
Vt ~ [0, T];
then Un ~
0
weakly star in W 1,~176 (0, T) and uniformly in [0, T].
For any w ~ ~ R, the limit input u(t) - 0 is transformed by 7) into the constant output w(t) - w ~ but, setting Wn = Z~(Un, w~ W n ( t ) - wO+ f0 t (cos nz)+dz ~ w ~
weakly star in W 1'~176 (0, Z).
This simple example also shows that in general the Duhem operator /)(., w ~ cannot be extended by continuity to C O([0, T]). For this operator, counterexamples of this sort are not exceptional; actually they can easily be constructed whenever in the interior of the hysteresis region (here the whole R 2) gl and g2 are two nonidentical continuous functions. It may even occur that, for a smooth input u with unbounded variation, the output w diverges in zero time. For instance, if gl --- 1 and g2 -- 0
in R 2,
u(t) - t sin(1/t)
Vt ~ [0, T],
then dw du+[ dt -(-d--t) -
1 sin(~)-
1 1]+ ~-cos(~)
Vt > 0 ( d t > 0 ) ,
which is not integrable in any right neighborhood of t = 0. In general the Duhem operator has no continuous extension either to C o ([0, T]) or to B V(0, T). However, it can be extended to a unique continuous operator acting in C O([0, T]) NBV(0, T) equipped with the metric d(u,v)'-maxlu-vl+]f[o
[O,T]
,T] [ d u l - f [ 0 ,T] Idvl] Vu, v ~ C O([0, T]) N B V(O, T).
We refer to [8; Chapter V] for the latter statements, too. In conclusion, despite of its simplicity and of the appeal of its analytic representation, the functional properties of the Duhem model are not very
17
1.3 RHEOLOGICALMODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
satisfactory; in particular, it is rather disturbing that in general the associated hysteresis operator cannot be extended by continuity to CO([0, T]). This restricts its application, and excludes several models governed by differential equations. Nevertheless the Duhem model has some elements of interest; for instance, it is one of the few models of hysteresis of which a closed analytic representation is known. 1.2.3 THE BOUC MODEL
R. Bouc was one of the very first pioneers of mathematical research in hysteresis. Already in the 1960s, as a PhD student at the Ecole Polytechnique of Paris, he proposed and studied the following operator: [/3(u)](t) " - a u ( t ) + f o t f ( f s t iu' (r)ldOq~(u(s))u' (s) ds
Vt E [0, T]. (1.28)
Bouc applied this model to several problems of engineering interest, and studied its analytic properties also in connection with ordinary differential equations; cf. e.g. [11,12]. Here u is an absolutely continuous input, a is a positive constant, f and ~ are prescribed nonnegative continuous functions, with f nonincreasing. It is easy to see that/3 is causal and rateindependent, namely, a hysteresis operator./3 is also piecewise monotone in the sense of the definition (1.10), but it is not order-preserving in general, cf. (1.9). Iff ~ C 1 ([0, q-oo[), it is not difficult to see that B is continuous in W 1'1 (0, Z).
In the particular case of
flv) := Ae -~v
u
(A, a : constants > 0),
(1.29)
direct computation shows that/3 is equivalent to a Duhem operator [11]. Other choices of the function f can represent effects of accommodation, namely, changes of the hysteresis loop by repeated cycling and convergence to a limit loop. This model has not (yet) been studied by mathematicians, despite of its potentialities.
1.3 R H E O L O G I C A L
MODELS
OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
In this section we introduce plastic hysteresis. This is one of the most typical examples of hysteresis phenomena, was the first to be studied, and suggests the most simple examples of hysteresis operators; moreover the underlying convexity entails a number of interesting properties. This then
18
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
looks as a good starting point to illustrate the interplay between physical and mathematical aspects of hysteresis. 1.3.1 CONSTITUTIVE RELATIONS Several phenomena of engineering interest can be modeled via the following procedure. (i) The state of the system is first characterized by means of a (usually finite) set of state variables. For instance, strain and stress in continuum mechanics, electric tension and electric current in electricity, electric field and electric displacement in electrostatics, magnetic field and magnetic induction in magnetostatics, the four latter fields in electromagnetism, and so on. (ii) Some fundamental laws, the validity of which is not restricted to specific materials, are then formulated. Examples include the m o m e n t u m balance and the laws of mass and energy conservation in continuum mechanics, the Kirschhoff laws of electricity, the laws of electrostatics, the laws of magnetostatics, the system of Maxwell equations in electromagnetism, the energy and entropy balances in thermodynamics, and so on. (iii) The specific behavior of different materials is represented via constitutive relations, which may also exhibit memory effects, and in some cases hysteresis. Here we concentrate our attention upon the third issue. Constitutive laws are sometimes formulated via the construction of ideal bodies, known as rheological models in continuum mechanics, as electric circuital models in electricity, as magnetic circuital models in magnetism, and so on. These are: (i) phenomenologic models, and are not intended to represent the fine-scale structure of materials; (ii) lumped-parameter models, that is, they do not account for space dependence; nevertheless, they can also be used to study spacedistributed systems; (iii) scalar models, but can be extrapolated to tensors, as we shall see. The construction proceeds as follows. One first introduces a small class of elementary models that are meant to represent basic properties: e.g., elasticity, viscosity, plasticity in continuum mechanics; resistance, inductance, capacitance in electricity, and so on. Composite ideal bodies are then built by assembling these elements according to a restricted set of rules, which can be represented via series (or cascade) and parallel
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
19
arrangements. For each material, one then tries to select an ideal body capable of representing its constitutive behavior, and to identify the parameters occurring in the corresponding constitutive equation. Each elementary model is described by an equation, which contains one or more parameters. The constitutive behavior of the composed model is determined by that of its elements, and the corresponding equation is derived from those of its constituents by means of simple composition rules that now we outline.
Composition Rules of Rheological Models Here we deal with continuum mechanical models, regard the strain and stress tensors as state variables, and denote them by ~ and 0", respectively. Rheological models typically relate an applied force with the corresponding deformation a n d / o r with the time-derivative of the latter. They are representative of strain and stress on the basis of the following identifications: force ~
stress (= 0");
deformation ~
strain (= e).
Here we deal with univariate models; however the relations we derive will be extrapolated to tensors. Serial and parallel combinations have an intuitive meaning, and are also prone to graphic representation. Let us consider a composite rheological model that consists of two or more (either elementary or composite) submodels, which are arranged either in series or in parallel, cf. Fig. 1.3. Let us denote the stress (strain, respectively) of its components by 0"i ( ~ i , respectively), for i = 1, 2 . . . . . and the stress (strain, respectively) of the composite system by ~ (~, respectively). Let us see the main properties of these operations. (i) Combinations in Series. The constitutive elements are subjected to the same force, and this also coincides with the force acting on the composite model. The deformation of the latter is instead equal to the sum of the deformations of its elements, cf. Fig. 1.3(a): O =
0"1 =
0"2 . . . .
,
~ =
~1 i f ~2 if- " ' ' -
(1.30)
(ii) Combinations in Parallel. The properties of force and deformation are here exchanged, cf. Fig. 1.3(b): O" =
O'1 -}- 0"2 - } - ' ' ' ,
~ =
~1 =
82 =
"''.
(1.31)
The two latter characterizations will be used to extend the operations of combination in series and in parallel to tensors.
20
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
(a)
I modcl 1 [
model 2] ......... model n model 1 ] Imod9 2]
(b)
[model n I
FIGURE 1.3 Arrangements in series (a) and in parallel (b). They correspond to (1.30) and (1.31), respectively. The dual character of these arrangements is evident. These rules are extended in a natural way to combinations in parallel and in series of infinitely many elements; in that case sums are replaced either by series, or more generally by integrals with respect to a prescribed density measure. There exists a third basic composition rule: the feedback arrangement. This is especially interesting, for combined with nonlinearity it can generate hysteresis [8; Sections 1.4, II.4]. However, feedback is rather different from series and parallel arrangements, and does not enter the present discussion; we then postpone it to Section 1.7. As we have mentioned above, these models can be applied to several phenomena. In electricity, for instance, series and parallel arrangements correspond to the rules (1.30) and (1.31), with e replaced by the tension, V, and a by the current, J. In electrostatics, e is replaced by the electric field, E, and a by the electric displacement, D. In magnetostatics, ~ is replaced by the magnetic field, H, and a by the magnetic induction, B. And so on.
Elementary Rheological Behaviors First we introduce some elementary rheological laws for multivariate systems. We shall then introduce corresponding univariate rheological models, and use them to build more general ones. Finally we shall extrapolate the latter to multivariate systems. Schematically we shall proceed as follows: introduction of (tensor) laws --, definition of (scalar) rheological elements --~ series and parallel combinations of rheological elements extension to tensors.
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
21
We introduce the assumption of small (infinitesimal) deformations, so that we can identify Euler and Lagrange coordinates, Piola and Cauchy stress tensors, r~, and use the linearized strain tensor, e. In the formulation of the basic constitutive laws of continuum mechanics, we distinguish between the spheric components of the strain and stress tensors, 1 3
1 3
8(8) "- -~ y ~ 8ii I,
rT(s) "- -~ y ~ rTiiI
i=1
i=1
(here by I we denote the identity 3 x 3-tensor), and their deviatoric components, e(a) := ~ - e(s), r := r~ - r~(s). (1.32) The spaces of spheric and deviatoric tensors are orthogonal. The tensor e(a) is symmetric, since this holds for e (by definition) as well as for e(s). It is a well-known consequence of the principle of conservation of angular m o m e n t u m that the tensor r~(a) is also symmetric. Thus e(a) and r are both elements of the linear space of symmetric 3 x3 deviatoric tensors, that we denote by Ds. A linear elastic relation is classically assumed between the spheric components of r and e:
r~(s) = ae(s)
(a: constant > 0).
(1.33)
On the other hand, several models have been proposed to relate the deviatoric components; the main ones involve rT(a), e(d) and de(d)/dt. Here we confine ourselves to the following two classes, that are rate-independent; the same then holds for their series and parallel combinations. (i) Linear Elasticity. This is represented by the following equality, which also accounts for linearity of the spheric components, 3
cr - A~
i.e.
rT/j = ~
Aij~me~m
for i, j - 1, 2, 3.
(1.34)
s
Here A is a positive-definite matrix which fulfils the s y m m e t r y conditions
Aijs
- Aijm~ - A~mij
for i, j, s m - 1, 2, 3.
For isotropic materials, denoting the Kronecker tensor by ~/j, one can show that there exist two positive constants, 2 and #, n a m e d Lam~ moduli, such that
Aijs
-- ~,&s
-}-2#&is
fori, j , f . , m -
1, 2, 3.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
22
In this case (1.34) reads 3
aq = 2 ~ eeebij + 21~eq
for i, j = 1, 2, 3.
(1.35)
g=l (ii) Rigid Perfect Plasticity. This can be represented by the following inclusion:
a(d) E (C3IK)-1 (de(d)) dt
(1.36) '
(see the Appendix for this notation) or equivalently, de(d) dt
C~IK(a(d) ) ;
(1.37)
here K is a closed convex subset of Ds and K ~ 0. This set is known as the yield criterion, and its selection has been at the focus of studies on plasticity since the pioneering works of Tresca, Saint V6nant, L6vy, von Mises. The relation (1.36) may be regarded as a limit case of nonlinear viscosity, that is characterized by an inclusion of the form r
~ g (dd~d)) ,
(1.38)
for a maximal monotone function g : Ds ~ 2 Ds (the set of the parts of Ds). Some of the following developments can be extended to this more general setting; however there is a fundamental difference between viscosity and plasticity: the latter is rate-independent, at variance with the former. Accordingly viscosity is not a hysteresis phenomenon. According to (1.37) the shear deformation, e(d), is unchanged as long as the shear stress, r lies in the interior of K. As r attains the boundary of K, the material can flow; more precisely, e(d) can increase along any oriented direction of the normal cone to K (cf. the Appendix). This flow is plastic, since removing the shear stress the deformation is not removed. More precisely, the flow is perfectly plastic, for it occurs under constant shear stress, without strain-hardening (see below). It is easy to see that the deviatoric relation (1.36) is consistent with the spheric relation (1.33). Denoting by I~ the convex conjugate of the function IK, by (A.15) we have 0I~ - (r
-1. By Proposition A.9, the inclusions (1.36)and (1.37)are
23
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY respectively equivalent to the following variational inequalities 3 i,j=l
r~(d)ij ( dS (d)ij
dt
a(d) e K,
vij)~I~( de(d)ij ) - I~(v) dt ~3 ds(d)/j dt (a(d)ij -- Vij)~/O
u ~ Ds,
(1.39)
VV ~ K.
(1.40)
i,j=l
1.3.2 ELASTIC AND PLASTIC UNIVARIATE ELEMENTS Consistently with (1.34), we define a (linear) elastic elementary model, that we denote by E, which is characterized by the univariate rheological law r = ae
(a: constant > 0).
(1.41)
This rheological model is often graphically represented by a spring, cf. Fig. 1.4(a). We define the multivalued sign function as follows: s i g n ( x ) : = {-1} sign (0) := [0, 1], sign ( x ) " - {1}
ifx < 0, (1.42) if x > 0,
and introduce another elementary model, which is characterized by the univariate rheological law cr ~ b sign ~
(b" constant > 0).
(1.4:3)
We regard this as a scalar model of rigid perfect plasticity, denote it by P, and refer to it as a plastic element. Indeed this inclusion is of the form (1.36), since sign = (c~I1_1,1[)-1. The inclusion (1.43) may represent the resistance which opposes the motion of a heavy body sliding along a horizontal surface, according to Coulomb's model of dry friction. This is also consistent with the usual interpretation of plasticity as an effect of internal friction. Accordingly, this rheological model is often graphically represented by a sliding block, cf. Fig. 1.4(b).
Stop Now we introduce two (mutually dual) elementary theological models, named stop and play, that can be used to construct more sophisticated
24
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
/VVVV\ (a)
-
F
(b)
P
FIGURE 1.4 Graphic representation of the elastic (a) and plastic (b) elementary models.
(a)
p
E
/
/
9'
/
/
/ /
... /
(b)
FIGURE 1.5 Prandtl's model of elastoplasticity (or stop), E-P, in (a); corresponding a versus e relation in (b).
models of elasto-plasticity. We define them in the univariate setting; the formalism of convex calculus makes their tensor extension straightforward. The classic Prandtl model of elasto-plasticity, also named stop, can be represented by coupling a linear elastic element, E, in series with a rigid perfectly-plastic element, P. Denoting series and parallel arrangements respectively by the symbols ' - ' and '1', this model can be represented by the rheological formula E - P; cf. Fig. 1.5. By (1.41) and (1.43), denoting by e the total displacement and by a the (signed) force intensity, one easily derives the following variational inequality
lalKb,
de a dt
da)(adt
v)~O
u
Ivl~b.
(1.44)
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
25
PROPOSITION1.3.1 (18; Chapter II]). For any E ~ W 1'1(0, T) and a ~ E [ - b , b], there exists one and only one a := G(E, a ~ ~ wl'l(0, T) that fulfils (1.44) and such that a(O) = a ~ The operator G(., a ~ is continuous in W1,1(0, T), and can be extended to a Lipschitz-continuous operator in C O([0, T]).
Alternatively, one may first define ~ for piecewise linear inputs, check that this operator is Lipschitz-continuous with respect to the uniform metric, and then extend it to C O([0, T]) [1,3,5,8,16]. Defining the sign graph as in (1.42), (1.44) can also be written as a differential inclusion: da (a) d~ -dt - - F sign -1 ~ ~ a~--~.
(1.45)
The transformation E ~ a is rate-independent. In order to check this, first notice that in (1.45) it is implicitly assumed that dt > 0, since hysteresis is irreversible; moreover ), sign -1 (a) -- sign -1 (a)
V,~ > 0.
Multiplying both members of (1.45) by dt, formally we then get the equivalent condition do- + sign-I ( b ) 9 adE, which is obviously rate-independent. This model can account for elasto-plasticity without strain-hardening. Indeed it represents a material that, starting from a = E = 0, behaves elastically as long as lal < b. As a attains the threshold b, it flows plastically under constant stress. This is interpreted by stating that the deformation consists of an elastic and a plastic part, and that for a - b the plastic part may increase, whereas the elastic part remains unchanged. This flow is plastic, for if the stress is decreased, the plastic part of the deformation is not removed, until a attains the opposite threshold, -b. Play This model is the dual of the stop, and can be represented by EIP, namely, a linear elastic element E coupled in parallel with a rigid perfectly-plastic element P, cf. Fig. 1.6(a): By (1.41) and (1.43), denoting by a the total applied force and by E the displacement, a and E are then related by the following variational inequality: la - aEl<~b,
de d---~(a - aE - v)>~O
Vv, Ivl<~b,
(1.46)
26
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis E
---4AAzV i
(a)
.
P
,#
mmem m ~ m | m m m w m m
/
y
(b) FIGURE 1.6 Prager's model of perfect plasticity with strain hardening (or play), EIP, in (a); corresponding e versus a relation in (b). which is equivalently to the differential inclusion bsign
~-~ + a e ~ a .
(1.47)
PROPOSITION 1.3.2 (18; Chapter II]). For any a ~ W 1,1 (0, T) and e ~ ~ R such that Be~ - aa(O)i~b, there exists one and only e := 8(a, e ~ ~ W1'1(0, T) which fulfils (1.46) and such that e(O) = e ~ The operator 8(., e ~ is continuous in W 1'1 (0, Z), and can be extended to a Lipschitz-continuous operator in C O([0, T]). By the homogeneity property of the sign graph, formally the inclusion (1.47) can also be written as b sign(de) + ae 9 a, by which rate-independence is evident. This model can account for rigid plasticity with strain-hardening. Indeed, starting from a = e = 0, the material behaves rigidly as long as lal < b. Whenever a increases beyond the threshold b it m a y flow, the deformation being proportional to a - b; thus the larger is the deformation,
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
27
the larger is the required stress. This flow is plastic, since if the stress is decreased, the deformation is not removed until a - as attains the opposite threshold -b. At variance with the stop, the play operator has a regularizing effect, that we describe by the next proposition. PROPOSITION1.3.3. Let us denote by g the play operator characterized by (1.46). T]) and any s o ~ R such that Is~ - aa(0)l~b,
For any a ~ C ~
a ~ C~
T])
=,
g(a, s ~ ~ C~
T]) n BV(O, T).
(1.48)
PROOF. Let us set s "-- g(a, so). A simple inspection of Fig. 1.6(b), shows that s can increase (decrease, respectively), only as the pair (a, s) lies on the right (left, respectively) border of the hysteresis strip. Any uniformly continuous function t ~ a(t) can have an infinite number of oscillations, but just a finite number of them may have amplitude ~2b. The pair (a, s) can then commute just a finite number of times, if any, from the s-ascending line to the s-descending straight line or conversely. Therefore t ~+ s(t) has just a finite number of either nondecreasing or nonincreasing branches, i.e., it is piecewise monotone. The time variation of t ~ s(t) is then finite. [] On account of this result, the occurrence of a play operator in a differential equation may increase the regularity of the solution. This is an example of the smoothing character of hysteresis. Plays and stops are closely related each other. Let us denote by G and g the stop and play operators, characterized by (1.45) and (1.47), respectively; for the sake of simplicity, let us assume that a = b = 1. Denoting the identity by Z, and omitting initial values, it is not difficult to check that g + ~ - Z,
2(Z -}- ~ ) - 1 _ (• if_ ~).
(1.49)
Generalized Play Let us set R "- R U { - ~ , +c~} and assume that { ~s ~;r are maximal monotone (possibly multivalued) functions R ~ 2 I~, such that infVr(U)K sup 7e(u)
Vu ~ R
(1.50) (by 2 I~ we denote the set of parts of I~). The (possibly discontinuous and multivalued) generalized play operator, that we outline in Fig. 1.7(a),
28
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
W,
wt
,
-
p
U
,
~R+
__.../ (a)
(b)
FIGURE 1.7 Discontinuous generalized play in (a) and associated auxiliary function ~0in (b). corresponds to the following rate-independent differential inclusion:
dw dt ~ ~0(u, w) "=
I~-
if w E ~s
\ 7r(/A)
{0} i~+
if sup 7r(U) < w < inf 7~(u) if w ~ 7r(U) \ 7~.(u)
I{
if w E 7r(U) N ~f(u)
(1.51)
a.e. in ]0, T[, cf. Fig. 1.7(b). Here we set l~+ := R + U {+cx~} and 1~- := R - U {-c~}. More precisely, if 7r and 7e are Lipschitz-continuous, then the generalized play operator transforms any pair (u, ~) ~ W 1'1(0, T) x R into the unique function w ~ W 1'1(0, T) such that w(0) equals the projection of onto [~r(U(0)), ?~(U(0))] and (1.51) is satisfied. This operator can be extended to C O([0, T]) x R by continuity, and is equivalent to a variational inequality. For any u ~ R let us set K(u) := Dr(U), 7g(u)] and denote by IK(u) the corresponding indicator function (cf. the Appendix). Then g0(u, w) = -OlK(u)(W), and (1.51) is equivalent to w ~ K(u),
dw
~(w dt
- v)KO
Vv ~ K(u), a.e. in ]0, T[.
(1.52)
The following property is especially useful in the analysis of differential equations that include a generalized play, see Section 1.9. Here we use the Heaviside function: /2/(~) .= 0
if ~ 0 ,
/2/(~) ._ 1
if ~ > O,
and the sign function sign(~) :=/2/(~) _/2/(_~), for any ~ ~ R.
29
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
THEOREM1.3.4 (Hilpert's Inequality 117]). Let (U i, WO) E W1'1(0, T) • R (i = 1, 2), h be any measurable function [0, T] --+ R such that h e H(ul - u2) a.e. in ]0, T[, and denote by g a generalized play operator. Setting wi "- g(ui, w ~ and zi; " - Wl - w2, then dzb h>~ d
d---t
-~ (Co+)
a.e. in ]0, T[.
(1.53)
Hence, if s ~ sign(u1 - u2) a.e. in ]0, T[,
d& d d-TS~ ~--~Iwl
(1.54)
a.e. in ]0, T[.
PROOF. For any m e a s u r a b l e function k "]0, T[-+ R, k e/2/(&)
a.e. in ]0, T[
=,
d d& ~ (zb+) - --dTk
a.e. in ]0, T[.
To prove (1.53) it then suffices to show that k can be chosen such that d~ --(h dt
- k)~>0
a.e. in ]0, T[.
(1.55)
This can be checked by distinguishing the different cases that m a y occur at any instant t: if zb > 0 and ~ := Ul - u2 > 0, then h = k and (1.55) is fulfilled; i f ~ > 0 and ~<0, t h e n b y examining Fig. 1.7 one can see that d~/dt<~0, hence (1.55) is fulfilled; if ~ = 0, then we can take k = h so that (1.55) is fulfilled; if ~ < 0 and ~ > 0, then again Fig. 1.7 shows that d~/dt>~0, and (1.55) is fulfilled; if zb < 0 and ~<0, then h = k and (1.55) is fulfilled. []
Tensor Extension Let us denote the space of symmetric 3 x 3 tensors by R 9. A l t h o u g h so far we have a s s u m e d e and r to be scalars, the previous d e v e l o p m e n t s can easily be extended to tensors, or rather to the deviatoric c o m p o n e n t s of the strain and stress tensors (for we still a s s u m e a linear relation b e t w e e n the spheric c o m p o n e n t s e(s) and r The g r a p h sign is then replaced by (C3IK)-1, K being a closed, convex subset of Ds such that 0 e K. After Proposition A.9, (0IK) -1 coincides with the subdifferential of the s u p p o r t function of K; that is, (0IK) -1 -- OaK (-- c9I~). The function aK is positively h o m o g e n e o u s of degree one, cf. Proposition A.12; this p r o p e r t y is at the
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
30
basis of rate-independence. In the multivariate setting the operations of series and parallel arrangement have no meaning in themselves; however, one may associate them to the rules (1.30) and (1.31), and extend them to tensors. 1.3.3 PRANDTL-ISHLINSKIT MODELS
Above we introduced a model of elasto-plasticity without strain-hardening, and one of perfect-plasticity with strain-hardening; it is then natural to search for a model of elasto-plasticity with strain-hardening. Moreover, the state of any of the above models is characterized by the pair (e, a), whereas a number of tests on elasto-plastic materials indicates the occurrence of internal variables. An answer to these exhigences is given by a (scalar) model Prandtl [18] proposed in 1928, and Ishlinskii [19] rediscovered in 1944, that is obtained by coupling a family of stops in parallel. The stop-play duality then suggests construction of a dual model by coupling a family of plays in series. These two classes will be respectively named Prandtl-IshlinskiY models of stop- and play-type. The corresponding operators can be represented by systems of (possibly infinite) variational inequalities analogous to (1.44) and (1.46); the extension to tensors will be straightforward. Here we illustrate a generalization of those models, in which possibly infinite families of elements are considered, along the lines of [8; Chapter III]. In order to construct a (scalar) Prandtl-Ishlinskii operator of stop-type, first we need a density over the set of all stops. As any stop is characterized by two positive parameters, a, b, this density can be represented by a positive and finite measure, #, over the set 7~ := {p := (a, b) ~ R 2 :a, b > 0}.
(1.56)
Let us denote by ~ and ~ the strain and stress of the composite model. For any ~ ~ W1'1(0, T) and any family {a~ of admissible initial stresses, by (1.45) that model corresponds to an infinite system of variational inequalities, or equivalently of inclusions:
dap
( a)
-~
+ sign -1 ~
d~:
~ a d---[
ap(O) - a~
#-a.e. in 7~ #-a.e. in 7~
(1.57)
opdfl(p). i/
F
By Proposition 1.3.1 this is equivalent to ~ - i v ~p @' a~ d#(p)=: ~ @, {a~
(1.58)
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
31
~ is a hysteresis operator, that we name Prandtl-Ishlinski~ operator of stoptype. If # is nonnegative this operator is piecewise monotone, but not order preserving, in the sense of (1.9), (1.10). At any instant t the state of the system is uniquely determined by {~(t)} u {{Tp(t)}p~7~. The {~p'Splay the role of internal variables; in particular they must be specified to define the initial state of the system. Let us denote by A4(7}) the set of #-measurable functions 79 ---> R. In the univariate setting, under regularity hypotheses on the data, ~ can be extended to a continuous operator C O([0, T]) x A4 (7}) ---> CO([0, T]). We now consider the dual procedure, and arrange a family of plays in series. Let # be a prescribed positive finite measure over 7}, and still denote by ~ and ~ the stress and the strain of the composite model. For any ff ~ W1'1(0} T) and any family {t~ of admissible initial strains, by (1.47) this model also corresponds to an infinite system of variational inequalities, or equivalently of inclusions: dep bsign(--d~)+a~pg~
#-a.e. in 79
ep(0) = t ~
#-a.e. in 7~
(1.59)
~pd#(p), and by Proposition 1.3.2 this is equivalent to ~_
8a @', {e~
(1.60)
8~ is a hysteresis operator, that we name Prandtl-Ishlinski~model ofplay-type. At any instant t, the state of the system is determined by {~(t)} U {ep(t)}p~p; here the ep'S play the role of internal variables. Both models can be extended to tensors; to this aim it suffices to replace the multivalued function 'sign' by ~I~(, namely, the subdifferential of the conjugate of the indicator function of a closed convex set K c Ds. We saw that stops and plays are related by (1.49). The next statement establishes an analogous property for scalar Prandtl-Ishlinskii models of stop- and play-type. PROPOSITION1.3.5 ([20], Cf. also [8; Section 111.6]). For any :{ > 0 and any nonnegative finite Borel measure # over 79, there exist fl > 0 and a nonnegative finite Borel measure v over 79 such that (omitting initial values) (0r -}- ~ ) - 1 = ]~I if- ~v.
(1.61)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
32
1.3.4 ELASTO-PLASTICITY WITH STRAIN-HARDENING WITHOUT INTERNAL VARIABLES
Here we briefly illustrate two equivalent and mutually dual rheological models that account for elasto-plasticity with strain-hardening, contain no internal variable (at variance with the Prandtl-Ishlinskii models), and generalize both the stop and the play. As it is typical of the approach based on rheological models, first we deal with the univariate setting and then we extend our results to tensors. Let us fix three positive constants k, ~, fl (~ < fl), set K := [-k, k], and consider the differential inclusion de OIK(a- ~e) ~ fl dt
da dt
in ]0, T[.
(1.62)
As ,~3IK - OIK for any 2>~0, the relation between a and e defined by (1.62) is causal and invariant with respect to any increasing C~176 q~ : [0, T] ~ [0, T], thus it is a hysteresis relation. This inclusion is equivalent to the following variational inequality: a-ae~K ( deflat
in]0, T[
da)
u ~ K, in ]0, T[,
(1.63)
which generalizes both (1.44) and (1.46). PROPOSITION1.3.6 ([21]). Let 0 < a < fl, K := [-k, k] (k > 0), and two elastic elements E1 and E2 and a rigid perfectly-plastic element P be respectively characterized by the theological equations a = a8,
a = (fl-- ~)s,
a e (r
(d~t).
(1.64)
Then (1.62) is the rheological equation of the model E11(E2 - P), and represents elasto-plasticity with (linear) kinematic strain-hardening, cf. Fig. 1.8. The simple argument is based on repeated application of the rules (1.30), (1.31) of series and parallel arrangements. No internal variable occurs in this model. As a ~ 0 (fl ~ +cx~, respectively) in (1.62), the stop (play, respectively) model is retrieved. As k --~ 0 (k ~ +cx~, respectively), (1.62) is reduced to a = a8 (a = fie, respectively), which represents the elastic model E1 (El IE2, respectively).
1.3 RHEOLOGICAL MODELS OF ELASTO-PLASTICITY
33
Fl
/VvV• E2
P
FIGURE 1.8 First model of elastoplasticity with (linear) kinematic strain hardening: E ll(E 2 - P).
PROPOSITION 1.3.7 ([21], see also [5; Section 1.1]). Let ~, fl, K beasabove, and a ~ K, s ~ be such that a ~ - ~ o e K. Then:
(i) For any ~ E W 1,1(0, T) such that ~(0) = s ~ there exists one and only one a E W1'1(0, T) that fulfils (1.62) and such that a(O) = a ~ This defines a Lipschitz-continuous hysteresis operator 0 " D o m ( ~ ) C W 1'1 (0, T) x R --, W 1'1 (0, T) 9 (s, o"0) t-+ a.
(1.65)
(ii) Dually (but not symmetrically), for any a E W1'1(0, T) such that a(0) - a ~ there exists one and only one e E W1'1(0, T) that fulfils (1.62) and such that e(O) = s ~ This defines a Lipschitz-continuous hysteresis operator g " D o m ( g ) C W 1'1 (0, T) x R ~
W 1'1(0, T) 9 (o', S0) ~
~.
(1.66)
(iii) The operators ~, d can both be extended by continuity to C~ T]); these extensions are Lipschitz-continuous with respect to the uniform norm, and piecewise monotone (cf. (1.10)).
The Dual Model Setting a " - 0r-1, b : = fl-1 a n d K "= aK, (1.62) also reads
d~ da O I ~ ( a a - e) ~ ~-~ - b d--t
in ]0, T[.
(1.67)
PROPOSITION 1.3.8 ([21]). Let a, b, h be three positive constants, b < a, and set H - - I - h , hi, I< "- (a - b)H. Let two elastic elements E1 and E2 and a rigid perfectly-plastic element P be respectively characterized by the rheological
CHAPTER 1
34
M a t h e m a t i c a l M o d e l s of H y s t e r e s i s
E2
m m
p
FIGURE 1.9 Second model of elastoplasticity with (linear) kinematic strain hardening: E1 - (E2[P) 9
equations s = bcr,
s : = ( a - b)rr,
r r = (CglH)-l(d~t).
(1.68)
Then (1.67) is the rheological equation of the model E1 -- (E2 [/~), and also represents elasto-plasticity with (linear) kinematic strain-hardening, cf. Fig. 1.9. The latter is a classic model of kinematic strain-hardening, and is due to Prager [22]. Other conclusions analogous to those of the previous model can be drawn.
Prandtl-Ishlinskii-Type Models Either of above two models can be used as a building block for a more general model, along the lines of the Prandtl-Ishlinskii constructions. For instance one can consider a family {(ap, tip, Kp) : p ~ P} as in Proposition 1.3.6; each of these triplets determines a model of the form Elp[(E2p Pp), and by Proposition 1.3.7 this determines a play-type and a stop-type operator. These models can then be arranged either in series or in parallel, and this corresponds to Prandtl-Ishlinskii models of play-type and stoptype, respectively. An analogous procedure can be applied to the dual model. As (1.62) and (1.67) are equivalent, it is clear that equivalences also occur among the latter operators; however we shall not enter that issue here.
Tensor Extension The two latter models can be extended to the multivariate setting, by setting (1.62) ((1.67), respectively) for K (K, respectively) equal to closed convex subsets of Ds (the linear space of symmetric 3x3 deviators). By the orthogonality of the spaces of deviatoric and spheric tensors, it is not difficult to see that this entails a relation of the same form for rr(a) and s(a), as well as a linear elastic relation between rr(s) and S(s). Propositions 1.3.6, 1.3.7 and
35
1.4 DISCONTINUOUS HYSTERESIS
1.3.8 hold also in this more general setting, with the exception of part (iii) of Proposition 1.3.7.
C o u p l i n g w i t h PDEs The models of this section are prone to be coupled with the dynamic equation
~2~ p-~
- V.r = f
in ~T (here (V.rT)i "=
Ej&rij/axj
u
(1.69)
for space-distributed systems. Corresponding initial- and boundary-value problems for elastoplasticity have been studied via variational inequalities in a large number of works; here we just refer to the monographs [23,24]. That approach has been applied to Prandtl-Ishlinskii models e.g. in [8; Chapter VIII]; Prandtl-Ishlinskii operators have also been used to study wave propagation by Krej~i in [5,25-29]; see also [3]. Stop, plays and Prandtl-Ishlinskii models have been at the basis of early mathematical investigations on hysteresis, e.g. [1], and are still among the most studied models of scalar hysteresis. As we have seen in this section, many properties can be derived for the corresponding hysteresis operators by formulating them in terms of variational inequalities, and by applying techniques of convex analysis, that we briefly review in the Appendix. A large literature deals with elasto-plasticity; see e.g. the monographs of Besseling and Van der Giessen [30], Duvaut and Lions [23], Halphen and Salencon [31], Han and Reddy [32], Haupt [33], Hill [34], Lemaitre and Chaboche [35], Lubliner [36], Ne~as and H l a v ~ e k [24], Prager [22], Prager and Hodge [37], Simo and Hughes [38], Washizu [39].
1.4 D I S C O N T I N U O U S HYSTERESIS The so-called (delayed)relayis the most simple model of discontinuous hysteresis. In this section we review its definition, specify the functional framework, and extend it to vectors. We also introduce the Preisach model and its vector extension, and refer to the discussion of Section 1.6 on populationtype models of hysteresis. A more detailed presentation may be found in [8; Chapter VI] and in [40].
1.4.1 SCALARRELAY Let us fix any pair p := (Pl, P 2) E R 2, Pl < P 2. For any continuous function u : [0, T] --+ R and any ~ ~ {-1, 1}, let us set Xu(t) := {z ~]0, t] : u(z) = Pl
36
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
or P2} and
w(0) :=
w(t) " -
u(O)<~pl,
-1
if
~
if Pl < u(0) < P2,
1
if U ( 0 ) / > p 2 ,
w(0)
if Xu(t) = 0,
-1
if Xu(t) ~ 0 and u(maxXu(t)) = Pl,
1
if Xu(t) ~: 13and u(maxXu(t)) = P2,
(1.70)
u ~]0, T], (1.71)
cf. Fig. 1.10. Thus w(t) = q-1 for a.a. t, and this function is measurable. Notice that any continuous function u 9 [0, T] --, R is uniformly continuous, hence it can oscillate no more than a finite n u m b e r of times b e t w e e n the two thresholds Pl, P2; therefore w ~ BV(O, T). By setting hp(u, ~) := w, an operator
hp --: C~
T]) x {-1, 1} --~ BV(O, T)
is thus defined. This operator is obviously causal and rate-independent, namely, it is a hysteresis operator; it is also piecewise m o n o t o n e and order preserving. '
W
m
l
13
l l i i
-1
FIGURE 1.10 Relay operator.
1.4 DISCONTINUOUS HYSTERESIS
37
Closure It is evident that the relay operator is not closed as an operator hp 9 CO([0, T]) --, L1 (0, T). We then introduce the (multivalued) completed relay operator kp. For any u ~ C O([0, T]) and any ~ ~ [-1, 1], we set w ~ kp(u, ~) if and only if w is measurable in ]0, T[,
w(0) :=
-1
if u(0) < Pl,
~
if Pl~U(0)~P2,
1
if u(0) > P2,
{-1}
if u(t) < Pl,
[-1, 1]
if Pl~U(t)~P2,
{1}
if u(t) > P2,
(1.72)
and, for any t ~]0, T],
w(t) ~
(1.73)
if u(t) ~ Pl, P2, if u(t) - Pl, if u(t) = p 2,
then w is constant in a neighborhood of t then w is nonincreasing in a neighborhood of t then w is nondecreasing in a neighborhood of t. (1.74) Thus -1Kw(t)K1 for a.a.t. Notice thatw ~ BV(O, T) for any u ~ C~ T]), because of the argument we saw for h e . Thus
kp =: C~
T]) x [-1, 1] - , 2 BV(~
The graph of kp in the (u, w)-plane invades the whole rectangle [Pl, P2] X [-1, 1], cf. Fig. 1.11. One can show that this operator is the closure of hp with respect to the strong topology of C O([0, T]) and the sequential weak star topology of BV(O, T) [8; Section VI.1]. The use of kp is then especially convenient in problems for PDEs.
Reformulation of the Scalar Relay In view of the coupling with PDEs, cf. Section 1.10, we reformulate the completed relay operator, kp. The conditions (1.73) and (1.74) are respectively equivalent to / Iw]K1 ( w - 1 ) ( u - p2)~0 (w + 1 ) ( u - pl)>~0
a.e. in ]0, T[,
(1.75)
38
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis w
1
iii n nil
i ii ii u i u u i u i i n l l n U U l
i u u m u u u u i m u n
t I m un un m nn hum m n m u m
~
nn m m nn n m an m n
P2
-u
m i i m m u u m n u n u i l
-1
FIGURE 1.11 Completed relay operator. Here the pair (u, w) can attain any value of the rectangle [Pl, P 2]x[ - 1, 1]. w is locally nonincreasing (nondecreasing, respectively) if u(t) = Pl (u(t) = P2, respectively); w is locally constant if Pl < u(t) < P2"
f0 t u dw - ~0 t P2 dw+ - f0 t Pl d w - =: tPp(w, [0, t])
u ~]0, T] (1.76)
(these are Stieltjes integrals) [41,42]. The condition (1.73) entails that u d w ~ p 2 d w + - p l d W - , whence f3tu d w K ~ p ( w , [0, t]), independently from the dynamics of the pair (u, w) through the rectangle [Pl, P2] x [-1, 1]; the opposite inequality is then equivalent to (1.76). In conclusion, the system (1.73), (1.74) is equivalent to (1.75) coupled with the inequality
fo
t u dw>~tPp(w, [0, t])
u e]0, T].
(1.77)
1.4.2 VECTOR RELAY
Let us denote by 0 "- (01, 02) the angular coordinates (longitude and colatitude, say) on the unit sphere, $2; by an obvious identification, we can then assume that 0 ranges over S2. For any p "- (Pl, P 2) E R 2 with Pl < P 2 and any 0 e S2, we introduce the vector-relay operator:
-' ) . C 0 ([0, T] )3 x {4-1} ~ BV(O, Z)3 " (~, ~) ~ hp(u.O,-* ~)0.-* h(p,O
(1.78)
1.4 DISCONTINUOUS HYSTERESIS
39
Its closure in natural function spaces, k(p,o), is simply obtained by replacing the scalar relay he with its completion kp in (1.78), and is multivalued.
Reformulation of the Vector Relay The characterization (1.72), (1.75), (1.77) of scalar hysteresis operators can easily be extended to vectors. For any (fi, ~) ~ C~ T])3 x [ - 1 , 1] and any (0, O) as above, by (1.72), (1.75) and (1.77) we have ff~ e k(p,O)(fi,~) if and only if z~(t) = w(t)O for any t, where the scalar function w is such that
w(0) =
-1
if fi(0).0 < 01
~(p,o)
if 01~u(0).0~02
1
if fi(0).0 > 02,
(w(t) - 1)(fi(t).0(w(t) + l)(fi(t) 0 -
(1.79)
02)~0 01)>/0
u 6 [0, T],
(1.80)
]w(t)l<~l f0 t fi.O -~dw>~f p(w, [0, t])
u e]0, T].
(1.81)
This formulation of the vector-relay operator can be extended to spacedistributed systems, just by assuming that it is fulfilled pointwise in space. Let us set ~"~t :-- ~'~X]0, t[ for any t > 0, and denote by {-, .) the duality pairing between C~ and C~ '. As dw = dw + - d w - and Idwl dw + + dw-, (1.81) can then be extended as follows:
(Ft.O, r
0))>/02 q-20_____f~ _____21[w(p, O, X, t)- wO(p, O, X)] dx
ff-P2--PIII~w(p' HCO(G), ) (--" fO~p(W(p, 0), ) ar O [0, t])
Vt ~]0, T]. (1.82)
1.4.3 THE PREISACH MODEL
Maybe this is the most powerful scalar model of hysteresis among those that are known so far (which are not many; more would be wellcome...) This model was proposed by the physicist F. Preisach in 1935 [43] to represent scalar ferromagnetism; it was then also applied to model hysteresis in porous-media filtration as well as other hysteresis phenomena. Here we introduce the corresponding hysteresis operator, and review its main properties.
40
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
First, let us define the so-called Preisach (half-)plane to be the set of thresholds of all relay operators (1.83)
T~:= {P-- (Pl, P2) E R 2 " p l < p 2 } "
Let us denote by T4 the family of Borel measurable functions T' --~ {-1, 1}, and by {~p}, or just ~, a generic element of T4. For any finite (signed) Borel measure It over T', let us then define the Preisach operator N~. C~ ['/-t~(u, r
T]) x 7~ - , L~176 T), (t):= f;, [hp(u, Co)] (t)dIt(p)
Vt ~ [0, T].
(1.84)
This construction may be regarded as a sort of spectral resolution of a class of hysteresis operators, that we shall characterize afterwards. The operator "]-t~ is causal and rate-independent, namely, it is a hysteresis operator; if Its>0,//~ is also piecewise monotone and order preserving. These properties are clearly inherited from the relay operator. Memory
Maps
Let us fix any u ~ C~ T]), any ~ ~ T4, and let wp ~ kp(u, ~p) It-a.e. in T'. On the basis of the definition of the relays hp, it is easy to see that for any t ~]0, T], if Pl
>
if P2
<
u(t) u(t)
if Pl < u(t) < P2
then wp(t) = -1 then wp(t) = 1
(1.85)
then Wp(t) depends
o n uI[0,t]
and on ~p.
Let us set
Aw(t) := {p ~ 7:"wp(t) = -1},
A+(t) := {p ~ T"wp(t) = 1},
Bw(t) "- OAw (t) M OA+ (t). (1.86) At any t, the curve Bw(t) intersects the line Pl = t2 at the point (u(t), u(t)). Because of (1.85), as u increases (decreases, respectively) in time, Bw moves up (to the left, respectively), cf. Fig. 1.12. It is then easy to check that for any t ~ [0, T], Bw(t) is a maximal antimonotone graph in ~', provided that this holds for t = 0. This graph will be called a memory map; it contains the complete information on the state at the instant t of all relays that do not sit on the the map itself. At any instant the output is retrieved by integrating the values of all relays with respect to the prescribed Preisach measure It. This integral is determined by Bw(t) provided that It(Bw(t)) = 0; obviously
41
1.4 DISCONTINUOUS HYSTERESIS
z -
j
wp(t)= +-'1
wp(t) = +-l~l
/
i
wo(t)- 1
/ r
1
p,
z 9
(a)
I
(b)
wp(t)=-l, w~(t)=!l
K(t) "'".,~7"~u(t),u(t))
/
Pl
f
(c)
m,
F
Pl
f
(d)
FIGURE 1.12 In (a) the possible states of relays wp :-- hp(u, ~p) are shown. As u increases (decreases, respectively) certain relays are switched to the state I (-1, respectively), cf. (b) and (c) respectively. The regions characterized by the states -1 and 1 are then separated by a maximal antimonotone graph, Bw(t), provided that the same holds at t - 0; cf. (d). this condition is fulfilled w h e n e v e r # is not singular with respect to the ordinary bidimensional Lebesgue measure. Let us a s s u m e that Bw(O) coincides with the bisectrix of the second quadrant:
Bw(O) - B v := {p ~ 7~ : Pl
q- P 2 "-" 0}.
This relay configuration represents the state of a virginal ferromagnetic material, namely, a system w h i c h has never experienced a n y hysteresis process. Let us a p p l y any input u ~ C~ T]), a n d set re(t) - max{lu(r)l 9 r [0, t]} for any t ~ [0, t]. One can s h o w that at any instant t the m e m o r y m a p
42
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
Bw(t) is then the union of the half-line {p ~ T' : - P l
= P 2 > m(t)} with an either finite or countable family of segments; each of these segments is parallel to one of the axes Pl and p 2, and they can only accumulate in a neighborhood of the line {p ~ T' : Pl ~- P 2}" Conversely, starting from the virginal state, any graph of the form, that we just outlined can be attained by applying a suitable input u ~ Co([0, T]). It should be noticed that not any memory map B may be attained starting from the virginal state B v, since parts of B v lying on the line Pl if-P 2 = 0 once deleted cannot be restored. However, if a maximal antimonotone graph B in T' contains a half-line included in the bisectrix {p ~ ~' : - P l -- P2}, then it can be approximated in the Hausdorff distance by a sequence of graphs having a staircase shape in correspondence to diagonal parts of B. Each of these approximating graphs is obtained by applying a continuous input function having oscillations of decreasing amplitude. There is a strict analogy between the above approximation procedure and the alternate demagnetization process, which is used to demagnetize magnetic heads for instance. The latter consists of applying an alternating current of decreasing amplitude, which generates a magnetic field also having oscillations of decreasing amplitude. By the above construction, it is easy to see that for any input function u ~ C~ T]) and at any instant, defining the memory sequence {u(tj)} as in (1.5),
the sequence {u(tj)} determines the memory map Bw(t), and conversely; the input u determines the memory map Bw(t), and Bw(t) determines the output [N~(u, ~v)](t) via integration with respect to/~. The Preisach model allows for a unified treatment of several (scalar) hysteresis models. This is conveniently illustrated by means of the Preisach plane. The (ordinary) play operator is equivalent to a Preisach operator characterized by a measure that is uniformly distributed on a straight line parallel to the bisectrix of the first and third quadrants (as this measure is infinite, some modifications are needed in the above formulation, in particular integration over T' should be replaced by the Cauchy principal value). More generally, a generalized play is obtained if the measure is (possibly nonuniformly) distributed along the graph of a strictly increasing single-valued function Pl ~ P2. Thus ordinary plays and generalized plays are Preisach operators. By (1.49) one can then represent stop operators in terms of Preisach operators, too. The same also applies to Prandtl-Ishlinskii operators of both types, for they are averages of plays and stops.
1.4 DISCONTINUOUS HYSTERESIS
43
Continuity Properties of the Preisach Operator We summarize several continuity results in the next statement. Here by /3 we denote the set of maximal antimonotone graphs in/9. THEOREM1.4.2 ([44], [8; Section IV.3]). Let # be a finite Borel measure over T~ and ~ ~ T4. Then:
(i)
~(u,
~) e C~
T])
Vu e C~
(1.87)
T])
if and only if (setting # := 0 outside 7~) I#l (R x {r}) = I#l ({r} x R) = 0
Vr e R.
(1.88)
(ii) IfC/-l~(., ~) operates in C O([0, T]), then it is also continuous in that space. (iii) c/-la(., ~) is uniformly continuous in C~ T]) if and only if ll~(B)l = 0 for any B ~ B. (iv) ~ ( . , ~) is Lipschitz-continuous in C~ T]) with Lipschitz constant L if and only if
I~{(Plq-0r P2ff-0~2)" (Pl, P2) E B, ~/~2 ft. 0(2 K ~}l~a~
VB e B, Ve > 0. (1.89)
Under appropriate conditions on the Preisach measure #, "Ha(-, ~) operates in the Sobolev spaces W 1,p (0, T) (1KpK +oo), or in the H61der spaces C~ T]) (0 < vK1), or in C~ T]) A BV(O, T) [44]. Other conditions on # guarantee the existence of the inverse operator ~ 1 , and yield its continuity in the spaces above.
Vector Preisach Model The extension of the Preisach model to vectors is of special interest for applications. This can be constructed by integrating a family of vector relays with respect to a suitable measure v, that is defined over the four parameters that determine vector relays: 191, 192, 01, 02" At the expense of some generality, one can also use the following procedure [6,7,45-47]: (i) project the input onto a generic direction, 0; (ii) apply to it a scalar Preisach operator, which may depend on 0; (iii) average these outputs with respect to a prescribed weight function, 7(0).
Characterization of Preisach Operators For any measure/~, the Preisach operator 1 ~ fulfils the congruency and wiping-out properties, that we now outline. Let a, b ~ R (b ~: 0), T >> 1 + ~,
44
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
~i E T4, and
ui E C~
T]),
ui(t) - a + b c o s ( t - 1)
u ~ [1, T]
(i = 1, 2). (1.90)
Thus ui is periodic of period 2~ in [1 + ~, T]. By means of the definition of the relay operator, one can check that the same holds for wi := c/-la(ui, ~i). The pair (ui, wi) then moves along (possibly degenerate) so-called minor hysteresis loops, at the interior to the major loop. The following holds: (i) Congruency Property. The function Wl - w2 is constant in [1 + ~, T]; that is, minor hysteresis loops are congruent via vertical translations in the (u, w)-plane. (ii) Wiping-out Property (also named return-point property). Let Ul and u2 be as in (1.90), and set
Ai := {t ~ [0, 1]:ui(t) ~ [ a - b, a + b]}
(i = 1, 2).
It is easy to see that, ifA1 = A2 and Ul = u2 inA1, then Wl = w2 in [1 + ~, T]. (Notice that Ul and u2 need not coincide in [0, 1] \ A1.) This can easily be checked on the basis of the properties of the memory map, i.e. of relays, and means that any past oscillation of u at the interior of a larger one has no influence on the memory: small cycles in the (u, w)-plane are wiped out by larger ones. The characterization theorem states that, under minor restrictions that we omit, a hysteresis operator fulfils the congruency and wiping-out properties if and only if it is a Preisach operator.
(1.91)
This result was first established by Mayergoyz [48,49]; a rigorous mathematical argument was then provided by Brokate [50].
Identification of the Preisach Measure As the measure/~ characterizes the Preisach operator, the identification of /~ is a key step for the effective use of this model in applicative problems. As can easily be checked via the memory map, by applying a suitable input and measuring the corresponding output, it is easy to evaluate the measure of an arbitrary square of the Preisach plane P having sides parallel to the axes. By this procedure one can effectively approximate the Preisach measure #. An algorithm based on an appropriate selection of the input functions allows one to reduce the number of measurements [6-8,51].
The Preisach Model and Ferromagnetism The Preisach model is often applied to represent the magnetization versus magnetic field relation in a ferromagnetic body formed by an aggregate of
45
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
single-domain particles. Although the properties that can be derived from the Preisach model are in good qualitative agreement with the physical evidence, for several ferromagnetic materials there are quantitative discrepancies. This also applies to the vector Preisach model. Physicists and engineers then proposed several variants of the originary Preisach model, in order to provide a more adequate model of ferromagnetic hysteresis. For instance, Della Torre [52] replaced the relation M = ~a(H) by M = ~ a ( H + aM)
(a being a constant > 0);
(1.92)
this also defines a hysteresis operator, "]-/a,a : H ~ M; this is known as the moving Preisach model. Other models are reviewed e.g. in [4,6,7]. In the next section we illustrate a classic model of vector ferromagnetic hysteresis, that deals with a finer length-scale than that the Preisach model is supposed to represent.
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM In this section we outline the theory of micromagnetism, and introduce the Landau-Lifshitz equation. In order to account for dissipation due to magnetic inclusions, we then amend this equation, and derive a purely rateindependent mesoscopic model of ferromagnetic hysteresis.
Spontaneous Magnetization Even a small magnetic field is capable of inducing a large magnetization in a ferromagnetic body below a temperature (named Curie's temperature) that is characteristic of the material. In 1907 Weiss [53] explained this phenomenon by assuming that any ferromagnetic material exhibits a spontaneous magnetization,/~I =/~i(x), even if no magnetic field is applied. Since magnets can look macroscopically demagnetized, Weiss assumed that the body breaks up into small uniformly magnetized regions (named magnetic domains), which may be magnetized along different directions. Under these conditions, by applying a small magnetic field one may produce a large macroscopic magnetization either by modifying the domain configuration, or by rotating the domain magnetization. The origin of spontaneous magnetization remained unclear, until in 1928 Heisenberg explained it on the basis of quantum mechanics. In 1932 Bloch assumed that magnetic domains are separated by thin transition layers (Bloch walls), where the magnetization rotates smoothly. Afterwards several kinds of walls and more exotic configurations were conjectured and experimentally observed; see e.g. [54] for a detailed account. In 1935
46
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
Landau and Lifshitz [55] proposed a mesoscopic quantitative model, and on that basis Brown [56-58] introduced a theory that is now known as micromagnetism (or micromagnetics),* that we synthetically review below. In their work of 1935 Landau and Lifshitz also proposed representing the evolution of magnetization via a simple equation, that accounts for the domain-wall dynamic and relaxation towards (metastable) equilibrium. That equation is rate-dependent, and thus cannot represent hysteresis, as we defined it in Section 1.1. Moreover, it does not account for rate-independent dissipation due to magnetic inclusions. We shall propose a modified equation, to eliminate these drawbacks. Maxwell's
Equations
We deal with processes in a ferromagnetic material that occupies a bounded domain f2 of R 3 in a time interval ]0, T[, and set f2T "= f2x]0, T[, R 3 := R3x ]0, T[. We denote the magnetic field by/7/, the magnetization by/~,I, and the magneticinduction by B; in Gaussian units, these fields are related by the condition B - H + 4z~M. We also denote the electric field by E, the electric displacement by D, the electric current density by J, the electric charge density by ~, and the speed of light in vacuum by c. The Maxwell laws read --)
.~
cV x/7/= 4z~J q- ~cgt V. B = 0,
'
cV x E =
cgB 0t
V./~ - 4z~fi
in R 3 in R 3.
'
(1.93) (1.94)
These equations must be coupled with appropriate constitutive relations. For instance, we may assume that the material is homogeneous, isotropic, and is surrounded by vacuum; the electric conductivity rr and the dielectric permeability e are then constant in f2, whereas r~ - 0 and = I outside f2. Ohm's law then reads ] = rr(E + ~)
in R 3,
(1.95)
where ~ represents a prescribed applied electromotive force. Moreover, /~ - ~E
in R 3.
(1.96)
These equations must be coupled with initial conditions for/~ and B, and with suitable decay conditions at infinity. Even if we were just interested *This theory deals with phenomena that occur on the length-scale of the #m, which nowadays is labeled as mesoscopic.
47
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
into the evolution of the ferromagnet, the Maxwell equations should not be confined to the region f2, due to difficulties in prescribing boundary conditions for the electromagnetic fields. This is strictly related to the action at distance which characterizes electromagnetic phenomena.
Magnetostatic Equations In case of slowly varying fields, the system of Maxwell equations (1.93), (1.94) can be replaced by the magnetostatic equations cV x/7/= 4z~J,
v. B - 0
in R 3.
(1.97)
We assume that the current density field J is a divergence-free datum; may include not only conduction currents but also Ampbre currents, which account for the presence of magnets outside f2. The magnetic field /7/can be decomposed into the sum of an applied field f/app induced by J, plus a demagnetizing field Hdem determined by M. The system (1.97) is equivalent to the following equations: cV x/Z/app -- 4~J
V./Y/app -- 0,
V-(f/dem if- 4Ir/~4) = 0,
V x/Y/de m -- 0
in R 3,
in R 3.
(1.98) (1.99)
Henceforth it will be assumed that any field defined just in f2 is extended with vanishing value outside f2. 1 . 5 . 1 M A G N E T I C ENERGY M I N I M I Z A T I O N
At the length-scale of about 10 -5 cm, the ferromagnetic behaviour can be described by expressing the magnetic energy as a functional of the mesoscopic magnetization field M, and then minimizing that functional. Let us represent the ferromagnet as an array of magnetic moments of prescribed modulus, h4, and variable orientation. According to the above mentioned Heisenberg theory, the ferromagnetic behavior is due to the occurrence of a strong coupling among electronic spins, which induces neighboring moments to be (almost) parallel. By averaging over the mesoscopic length-scale, the constraint on the magnitude is then preserved: IMI -
,M
in f2.
(1.100)
48
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
The magnetic coupling and the nonconvexity of this constraint are at the basis of the ferromagnetic behavior, in particular of hysteresis.
Magnetic Energy For the sake of simplicity, henceforth we neglect magnetostriction, namely, mechanical effects related to magnetization. We also assume that the material is a (single grain) perfect crystal; however, this restriction will be removed later. The magnetic (free) energy can be represented as a functional of the magnetization, M, and consists of the following contributions. (i) Exchange Energy. The force which locally tends to align electronic spins can be represented by a term which penalizes the space derivatives of M:
gex(M) := 2 z'j~laij
~dx; t~xi.~x j
(1.101)
here {aij} is a positive definite, symmetric 3 x 3-tensor. (ii) Anisotropy Energy. This has the form
Ean(t~/I) :'-/f~ (fl(]~/I)dx.
(1.102)
The minimization of this term accounts for the tendency of M to point in one or more directions of easy magnetization. The function q0 9 R 3 --~ R depends on the crystal structure of the ferromagnet. We assume that (p is convex and smooth; thisconvexity hypothesis is not very restrictive, as any function of IMI may be added to q0(M), because of the constraint on the modulus. Near the Curie temperature, as a first approximation we can assume that ~0 is quadratic, e.g., q)(/~) - c(M 2 + M~), c being a positive constant. (iii) Magnetic Field Energy. We saw that the field H can be represented as the sum of the applied field Happ - Happ q) and the demagnetizing field Hdem = Hde m (M), cf. (1.98), (1.99). The energy that is stored in the field H is then the sum of two terms:
~field(M):-'~app (if/I)q- Edem (M)=-
pp. M dx + ~
3I/-~/dem(]~/I),2 dx. (1.103)
49
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
Magnetic Energy Functional By assembling the above contributions, we get the magnetic energy functional:
~rnag(M) :-- ~ex(~~I) q- ~an (M) if- ~field(M) = ~(~
cgMcgM aij cgx---~." c~---~j+ q~(~) - Happ"
dx "}- ~1
2 dx. 3 ]/_7_/dem(~i)l
i,j=l (1.104) Henceforth we shall assume that the applied field Happ is prescribed. Any thermodynamically stable magnetic configuration fulfils the following variational principle:
~mag(M) - inf {~mag(V) " V E Hl(~) 3, ]vl -- -~ a.e. in f2}. By the direct method of the calculus of variations, one can see that this problem has a solution. The HI-coerciveness entails that the limit of any minimizing sequence is compact in L2(~) 3, and then fulfils the nonconvex constraint on the modulus (1.100). In general uniqueness fails, because of nonconvexity. For_~instance, several stable stationary configurations may occur if Happ - 0 identically in f2, provided that the specimen is not so small to be reduced to a single domain. Relative minimizers (i.e., states that minimize the functional ~'mag just with respect to variations of M that are small in the norm of H 1(~)3) represent metastable states, and are physically acceptable. Their stability, that is, the time-scale by which they will decay to a lower minimum of ~-mag, depends on the temperature and on the deepness of the potential well they sit in. The (either absolute or relative) minimization of the functional Emag accounts for the onset of the domain structure, as it is briefly illustrated in the caption of Fig. 1.13.
Domain Walls Magnetic domains are separated by transition zones (walls) across which magnetization rotates smoothly, cf. Fig. 1.14. The layer thickness is a compromise between the tendency of the exchange energy to enlarge the layers, and that of the anisotropy energy Ean (M) to reduce their thickness, in order to align the field to a preferred direction, z. If either anisotropy is too small or the specimen is not large enough, a single domain appears. In the bulk of the ferromagnet the field is essentially parallel to z, whereas near the boundary it tends to stay tangential to the boundary itself, in order to reduce the field energy, Cfield(M), cf. (1.103). Thus in thin films the domain magnetization is parallel to the film itself. Note that the demagnetizing
CHAPTER 1
50
m m m | | m m | | m m m |
Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
k.]
~,,
m | |
9
m |
m
| m m m | | m m
m m
r,,~..i',,~..t
| m m
,
r
m | |
m m
m 9
k.]
FIGURE 1.13 Along the lines of [59], here it is illustrated how progressive modifications of the magnetization of a ferromagnet may reduce the functional Cmag. The first configuration generates a large exterior magnetic field. The second one reduces that field at the expense of the formation of domains, which are separated by 180~ The third one introduces so-called closure domains by forming 90~ this modification eliminates the exterior field almost completely. The broken lines represent domain walls, whereas the solid lines are force lines of the field/~I inside the ferromagnet, of the field/q outside.
t tt t ttt tt tttl/,,,,.,,~,\\ 11111111~1 t tt t t tt tt tt t t,',,,,.,,~,\\ ~111111~111 tttttttttttttz,,.,x\\ lll llll l ,
Domain "+1"
Wall
Domain "-1"
FIGURE 1.14 180~ domain wall. More precisely, this a hybrid Bloch-N~el wall: the field/VI rotates in the plane of the page, and also in an orthogonal plane (it then appears shorter, because of perspective).
field Hde m determines a nonlocal feedback: M depends o n Hde m via the above minimization principle, and in turn the latter depends on the former via the magnetostatic equations. This theory accounts for the occurrence of different types of walls. For instance, let us consider a wall separating two domains in which the magnetization attains two opposite values parallel to the wall itself
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
51
(a so-called 180~ M then rotates through the wall matching smoothly the two opposite values. This rotation can occur in two fundamental modes: either parallel to the plane of the wall (Bloch wall), or orthogonal to that plane (Ndel wall). The first mode is energetically convenient in the bulk, whereas the second mode is preferred near the boundary, for it allows the magnetization to remain parallel to the boundary itself. Actual walls have an intermediate structure, and more exotic structures may also occur, cf. Fig. 1.14. In thin films N6el walls may only occur. In general the coefficient of the exchange energy is fairly small, and for certain ferromagnetic materials anisotropy is large. In that case the coefficients of the exchange and anisotropy energies can be represented as proportional to e and e-l, respectively. As e ~ 0 a sharp interface is then obtained; this can be justified analytically via a F-limit operation [60]. 1.5.2 THE LANDAU-LIFSHITZ EQUATION
In their seminal work [55] of 1935, Landau and Lifshitz proposed to represent micromagnetic evolution via the following equation: ~M -- ,~IM x H e - ,~2M x (M x H e) Ot
i n ~ T,
(1.105)
where the effective magnetic field H e is defined as
3 ~--Ie "-- I - t - r (~/I)-Jr- ~ i,j=l
~2~/I aij cgxicgxj ( --
(~_.Emag(]~/I)) cgM
in ~"~T (1.106)
0 we denote the Fr6chet, or variational, derivative). 21 and 22 are (by ~-~ positive phenomenological coefficients; typically 21 > 22, in some cases 21 >> 22. We shall refer to the system (1.105), (1.106) as the Landau-Lifshitz equation. This dynamic is equivalently expressed by the Gilbert equation c~M c~t -- #IM" x ( /7_/e
#2 c~M) Pl 0t
inST.
(1.107)
A simple calculation shows that the two pairs of constants (21, ~2) and (#1, P2) are related by the following transformation formulae: /]'1 • ,~2 --
/11 1 + #22d~2 #lf12 1 + 2M2
,;[2 if_/~2/~2 fll -or equivalently
/],2
.2-
21
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
52
(1.105) is the most simple relaxation dynamic for a magnet that is free to rotate and issubjected to a magnetic field H e. In fact, multiplying (1.105) scalarly by M, one can see that IM] is constant in time. For a magnetic material surrounded by a diamagnetic medium, the following boundary condition holds: 3
~]VI
-,
~r x E a ij -~x i VJ - - 0 i,j=l
on cX~]O, T[.
(1.108)
Energy Balance The vector
1 A~/Ix(]~/Ix/~/e) /=/e .Ad2 --
1 d ~ (]~ 9
(1.109)
is the projection of the driv~g force H e onto the tangent plane at the point M to the sphere with center 0 and radius 3,4. By (1.105), this term drives M to move towards H e and is dissipative. The vector M x H e lies in the same tangent plane and is orthogonal to/~I x (s x ~ e ) ; it induces/~ to rotate around H e by forming a constant angle (precession) and with angular velocity proportional to Isel; this contribution is not dissipative. As a result of the composition of these two forces, under a constant H e, M asymptotically converges to H e along a nonplanar spiral on the spheric surface of radius .M. The relaxation time is proportional to 1/22. By (1.105) and (1.106), d ~rnag(M) "-
dt
c~t
. H e dx = ~2
lad x/:/e [2 dx,
(1.110)
which yields the energy balance equation
grnag(A~(t)) q- 22
/ot
d'c
]A~ x f/el 2 dx - grnag(Ad(0)).
(1.111)
Quasi-stationary Landau-Lifshitz equation The larger is ~2, the faster is the relaxation; in the limit as ,~2 ~ q-OO,(1.105) yields M x He- 0 in f)T. (1.112) This means that the vectors M and H e are pointwise parallel, and only entails that M is a stationary point of the magnetic energy functional Emag
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
53
under the constraint IMI - 34. The dissipation condition
d ~mag (]~) ~0
(1.113)
dt
must then be required explicitly. 1.5.3 MODIFIED LANDAU-LIFSHITZ EQUATION
The Landau-Lifshitz equation is rate-dependent: if (/~/(x, t), M(x, t)) is a solution of (1.105) and (1.106), and s : R + ~ R + is a diffeomorphism, then in general (/2/(x, s(t)), ~l(x, s(t))) does not solve the same system. On the other hand, ferromagnetic hysteresis cycles are rate-independent for a fairly wide range of frequencies. This suggests that relaxation towards (metastable) equilibrium occurs on a shorter time-scale. Analytically, this can be represented by rewriting (1.105) of the form ..+
0M = ~IMx -* /2/e - ~2]~/[x (]~/ix/Z/e) 7--~--
in ~T,
(1.114)
and then passing to the limit as the relaxation time 7 vanishes. However, due to the nonlinearity of this equation, difficulties arise in performing the limit procedure; indeed in this way the time regularity of M is lost, hence the field M might exhibit uncontrolled oscillations in time. Let us then revisit the physics of the problem. So far we have not accounted for the occurrence of magnetic inclusions, like impurities, dislocations, and so on. These inclusions induce a sort of internal friction which opposes the motion of domain walls, and thus contributes to dissipation. In fact domain walls are pinned by defects; unpinning requires a sufficiently strong effective magnetic field, and occurs by a small dissipative jump. This also accounts for the well-known Barkhausen noise. This process can be regarded as rate-independent, and is responsible for most of hysteresis dissipation in ferromagnetic materials that exhibit a domain structure. For instance, steel may be regarded as iron with uniformly distributed inclusions of carbon and other substances on a microscopic length-scale; it turns out that hysteresis is much more pronounced in this material than in pure iron. Here we describe the effect of inclusions on magnetic dynamics in a way that is reminiscent of Coulomb's dry friction. Along the lines of [61] we couple the equation -+
Ot
= /~1/~ •
__ ~2/~ X (/~"IX/_~/E)
in ~T,
(1.115)
54
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
with the
modifiedeffectivemagneticfield 3 ~2~ f-IE :--I--I- q)' (A/I) -Jr-~ aij cgxicgxj i,j=l whereZe00
(1.116)
c~t "
Here c96 is the subdifferential of a prescribed convex function R 3 ~ R +, that is positively homogeneous of degree one: 6(a~) = a~(b) for any a > 0 and any ~ ~ R 3. By Proposition A.12, ~ is then a support function, i.e., it is of the form ~=/K
where K C R 3 is closed and convex, and 0 ~ K;
(1.116) is thus equivalent to a variational inequality. The most simple choice of 6 is to take it proportional to the modulus function: 6(~) = r/Ivl, ~/being a positive constant; in this case K is a ball with center at the origin. A more general ~ may account for anisotropy. Nonuniformity of the mesoscopic distribution of inclusions might also be represented by allowing ~ to depend explicitly upon x. As it occurs for similar equations, the fact that the function ~ is multivalued does not prevent the process from selecting a unique Z ~ 3~/(3M/at). We shall refer to the system (1.115), (1.116) as the modifiedLandauLifshitz Equation. (1.115) might also be written in the following equivalent Gilbert-like form, cf. (1.107):
. x ( f/E 0t = ]/1M
]/2 3M ) ]/1 cgt
in ~T-
(1.117)
Energetic Interpretation As
f OM~Edx=f OM (t7/e -- ~) dx = ~t " --~-"
d Emag (/~) -- ~-~
/fl ~ / ( OM - ~ ) dx, (1.118/
multiplying (1.115) by
~?M/c~twe get the energy balance equation +~(cgM --~-)] dx = ~mag(A/I(0)). (1.119)
Emag (~'I(t)) q- ~0t d'c ff~ [,~21~Ix/~-/E12
Similar to (1.105), equation (1.115) represents a relaxation dynamic of /vl under the action of the field/~/E. Because of the 06-term,/~4 can change
55
1.5 MICROMAGNETISM
only if/2/a lies on the border of K. Sometimes this setting is ascribed to occurrence of an activation energy. The system (1.115), (1.116) accounts for (i) precession because of the 21-term; (ii) relaxation (i.e., rate-dependent dissipation) because of the 22-term; (iii) a component of hysteresis (i.e., rate-independent dissipation) related to the nonconvexity of the potential. This is due to the combined effect of the nonconvex constraint (1.100), and of anisotropy; (iv) a friction-type component of hysteresis, due to magnetic inclusions. This is related to the lack of Gateaux differentiability of the functional ~, cf. the Appendix. The larger the projection of the input field H onto the tangent plane at M to the sphere of radius M, the larger is the effective field H e, the farther the system is from equilibrium, and the larger is the relaxation rate OM/~Vt. On the other hand Z (cf. (1.116)) is confined to K. Friction effects are more evident at low rates, whereas at high rates they are dominated by relaxation. The presence of the ~?O-term increases the stability of the system, and enlarges the class of metastable states.
Quasi-stationary Modified Landau-Lifshitz Equation Let us rewrite the modified Landau-Lifshitz equation in the form (1.114), with/~/E in place of/Z/e. By passing to the limit as the relaxation time ? vanishes, we get
~IA~/I x/-~/E _ ~2]~/1 x (/~/I x/~/E) -
in ~'~T.
If (~1, ~2) 7~ (0, 0), this is equivalent to the quasi-stationary modified Landau-Lifshitz equation /vl x/2/E _ ~
in ~"~T.
(1.120)
This equation means that there exists/2/a as in (1.116), and that this field is either parallel or antiparallel to M pointwise in f~T. This condition is rateindependent but not stationary, for/~/a contains the term Z, which depends on OM/Ot. (1.120) does not entail dissipation; we then require it explicitly, in analogy with (1.113): d Cmag(/~//) + / f l !~(~-t )dx~<0. dt
(1.121)
56
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
In conclusion, the system (1.120), (1.121) represents a mesoscopic model of ferromagnetic hysteresis, which can be coupled either with the Maxwell system or with the magnetostatic equations. A number of monographs deal with ferromagnetism, e.g. Aharoni [62], Bertotti [2], Brown [56-58], Chikazumi and Charap [63], Cullity [64], Della Torre [4], Doering [65], Herpin [66], Hubert and Sch/ifer [54], Jiles [67], Kneller [68], Kronm~iller [69], Maugin [70], Mayergoyz [6,7], Morrish [71]. The Landau-Lifshitz equation has been studied either independently or coupled with the Maxwell laws, see e.g. [61,72-89].
1.6 MODELS OF HYSTERESIS WITH INTERNAL VARIABLES Population Models The Prandtl-Ishlinskii and Preisach models of hysteresis, which are respectively used to represent elasto-plastic and ferromagnetic hysteresis, account for the occurrence of internal variables, and are both formulated in terms of populations. In this section we outline and discuss a larger class of population models, whose applicability is not restricted to any specific physical phenomenon, and which can also be applied to nonhysteretic phenomena. In the case of ferromagentism, we shall see that it is not clear how a natural vector extension of the Preisach model might be consistent with the Maxwell system. We then propose an alternative approach, that is issued from the theory of two-scale homogenization, which was introduced by Allaire [90] and Nguetseng [91]. The Prandtl-Ishlinskii and Preisach models are constructed by assembling a population of elementary models, either plays or stops or relays, which have common characteristics and only differ for the value of their characteristic parameters. Each of these constitutive elements is assumed to be subjected to the same input, which also coincides with the input of the composite model; we shall see that this assumption is crucial. These elements are also assumed to be reciprocally independent: each one then yields an output which does not depend either on the state or on the output of the others. These elementary outputs are then summed to produce the output of the global model.
1.6.1 SCALAR SETTING First Model: the Particle-Density Approach We deal with a material which occupies a Euclidean domain f2, and assume that a population of (not better specified) particles sits at each coarse-scale
1.6 MODELS OF HYSTERESIS WITH INTERNAL VARIABLES
57
point x 6 ft. These particles may be characterized by their either elastoplastic or magnetic behavior: here this choice is immaterial. We first assume that all fields have a fixed direction, and replace vectors by components in that direction, so that we can deal with a scalar setting. For the time being, we also neglect dependence on the space variable x. We assume that each of these particles is characterized by a function fp, with p ranging through some set 7~ of parameters. For a large part of this discussion we can also neglect memory effects; we thus assume that the fp's are reduced to real functions. Actually, most of these developments also apply to phenomena without memory. As different particles may correspond to a same p, we represent the space density of these different p's by means of a (positive) measure/t on 79. One may think that each p characterizes a family of undistinguishable particles, which coexist at any coarse-scale point x, and whose behavior is characterized by a function, fp, which transforms an input variable, u, into an output variable, w. For instance, in elasto-plasticity u and w are the strain and stress, or conversely; in ferromagnetism as u and w we can take the magnetic field and the magnetization, respectively. Our basic constitutive relation is then
w(p) =fp(u(p))
Vp ~ 79.
(1.122)
We represent by #(p) the space density of the family of particles characterized by the parameter p, and introduce two key hypotheses: we assume that, at each x E fL (i) all the particles are subjected to the same input, u; (1.122) then reads w(p) =fp(u) Vp E 7?; (ii) the total output equals the sum of the outputs of the different particles: w = fp w(p) d#(p).
(1.123) (1.124)
These hypotheses obviously entail the following relation:
w - f d,(u) d#(p) =: 9Vu(u)
at any x E fl.
(1.125)
Notice that this condition is just expressed in terms of the fields u, w, and keeps no trace of the underlying distributions p ~ (u(p), w(p)). This model and the corresponding operator, 5~u, are indeed characterized by the family {fp : p ~ 7)} and by the measure #.
Second Model: Two-scale Approach The occurrence of a population distributed on a fine scale suggests the possibility of applying a homogenization approach to the previous model.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
58
To each coarse-scale point x ~ f2 we associate a reference set, 3; := [0, 1[ say, that we equip with the Lebesgue measure. We assume that a particle sits at each y e 3;, and transforms an input field ~(y) into an output ffa(y); y ~ 3; thus represents a fine-scale variable. As the parameter p depends on the specific particle, there exists a function/3 9 3; --+/~ such that p = ~3(y). Thus ~(y) = u(~(y)) and ~(y) = w03(y)); henceforth we shall omit the tildes. The constitutive law (1.122) is here replaced by
w(y) =/~(y)(u(y))
vy ~ 3;.
(1.126)
The assumptions (1.123) and (1.124) then read
w(y) = ff~(y)(u) whence
Yy ~ 3;,
w =/3; w(y) dy,
P
w = J3ff~(y)(u ) dy =: Gf~(u)
Vx ~ f~.
(1.127)
(1.128)
As in (1.125), here the variables x and t have been omitted, and in (1.128) there is no trace of the underlying distributions y t-+ (u(y), w(y)). This model and the corresponding function ~a are characterized by the family {fp 9 p ~ ~} and by the function/3" 3; -+ ~.
Comparison The two approaches above are equivalent, and ~'~ = G~, if and only if # is the image of the ordinary three-dimensional Lebesgue measure, 2, by the mapping ~ 93; --+ ~P, that is, ~'~ - ~
4~
# =/3(2).
(1.129)
Setting IAI "= ,~(A) (= fa dx) for any measurable set A C R 3, this condition on the measure # means that #(A) = I/3-I(A)] for any A, or equivalently (setting dy - d2(y) in the integral, as usual) / , ~o(p) d#(p) = 13; ~0(/3(y)) dy
V~0 ~ LI(/~; #).
(1.130)
The two-scale approach may be regarded as underlying the particledensity model, and thus looks more fundamental. It provides a detailed account of the fine-scale structure: for any coarse-scale point x and any input u, it yields the fine-space field w = w(y). The particle-density model, on the other hand, requires less information, for it only involves the density measure of the field w = w(p), parameterized by the variable p ~ /~.
1.6 MODELS OF HYSTERESIS WITH INTERNAL VARIABLES
59
Nevertheless, under condition (1.130), the two models are equivalent, for the final outcome of both is a relation between the coarse-scale fields u and w, with no trace of the underlying fine-scale field. We shall see that this equivalence is strictly related to the hypotheses (1.123). There is an obvious analogy between the particle density and Young's parameterized measures [92-94], which indeed are also image measures. It may be noticed that the two-scale representation is more precise; on the other hand parameterized measures seem to be a more ductile tool, with a wider spectrum of applications.
Coupling with PDEs (Scalar Case) Here we assume that f~ is univariate, replace it by an interval ]a, b[, and set Q := ]a, b[ x ]0, T[. We couple the w versus u constitutive relation with a PDE, (9 ~2u ~t(u + w)
0x 2 = g
in Q,
(1.131)
g = g(x, t) being a prescribed source field. This equation may represent the Maxwell-Ohm equations without displacement current for a univariate conducting material (with normalized coefficients); in this case u and w respectively denote the magnetic field, H, and the magnetization, M. Let us couple the coarse-scale equation (1.131) with a coarse-scale constitutive relation between the fields u and w: let us prescribe either w = )C~(u) or w = @(u) pointwise in ]a, b[, cf. (1.125), (1.128). This problem can be treated also if ~c and Gk are replaced by hysteresis operators. Under natural assumptions on the data, it is not difficult to prove the existence of a solution such that U E s l ( 0 , T; L2(a, b)) fh LeO(O, T; Hi(a, b)) =" X,
w e L~(Q).
(1.132)
cf. e.g. [8; Chapter IX] and Section 1.9 below. The argument is based on approximation by time discretization. An energy-type balance can be derived by multiplying the approximate equation by the approximate solution, u~, r being the time-step. This yields a uniform estimate for u~ in X. Therefore there exists u ~ X such that, possibly extracting a subsequence, u~ ~ u weakly star in X. Because of the compactness of the injection ~ L2(a, b; C O([0, T])3), possibly extracting a further subsequence, ur -+ u
in C O([0, T]), a.e. in ]a, b[.
(1.133)
As we saw, several hysteresis operators are either continuous on Co ([0, T]) or discontinuous but closed; either property suffices to pass to the limit in
60
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
the hysteresis relation, and thus to conclude the proof of the existence of a solution for our problem. We conclude that in the scalar setting a coarse-scale formulation of the Maxwell-Ohm equations coupled with the population model can be justified analytically. 1.6.2 VECTOR SETTING N o w we extend the two models above to vectors. At any coarse-scale point x of the domain {2 of R 3, we still represent the system as an aggregate of particles. We still denote the parameter set by 3v, although in general it will be different from that of the univariate setting (as it is the case for the vector Preisach model). We represent the i n p u t - o u t p u t relation in the form if; =fp(~)
u
~ 3v,
(1.134)
and still assume that 3v is equipped with a density measure #. Under the assumptions (1.123) and (1.124), the input ~ and the output if; are related as follows if; =
(~) d#(p) =: Y~(~)
at any x ~ {2,
(1.135)
similarly to what we saw in the scalar setting, cf. (1.125). The corresponding two-scale model is also analogous to the scalar one: at any x ~ {2, we associate a reference set, 3; := [0, 1[3, that we equip with the Lebesgue measure. We then prescribe a mapping ~ 9 3; ---> 7~. As above, for any y ~ 3;, p(y) determines the mapping f~@, which characterizes the behavior of the particle sitting at the point y. The hypotheses (1.123) and (1.124) then entail that
Co(x)= fy/f~@(~(x)) dy =: Gf~(~(x))
for a.a. x ~ {2.
(1.136)
It is clear that these two models are equivalent, and 3r~ = G~, if and only if # is the image of the Lebesgue measure by the mappings ~, cf. (1.129), (1.130).
Coupling with PDEs (Vector Case) We shall see that in the vector case the analysis of the Maxwell-Ohm equations is more problematic than in the scalar setting. Let us consider electromagnetic processes of a three-dimensional ferromagnetic metal, that we represent by a Euclidean domain {2. Let us denote the magnetic field by ~ and the magnetization by if;. The system of the
1.6 MODELS OF HYSTERESIS WITH INTERNAL VARIABLES
61
Maxwell-Ohm equations without displacement current (with normalized coefficients) yields
0 (~+~)+VxVx~_~
0t
in ~"~T "-- ~K]O, T[ (Vx := curl),
(1.137)
- ~(x, t) being a given function. As an alternative one might deal with the corresponding system of first-order equations, namely the Amp6re and Faraday laws; this would have no effect on the conclusions we draw below. Let us couple the coarse-scale equation (1.137) with a coarse-scale constitutive relation between ~ and if;; let us then prescribe either if; - ~ (~) or if; = ~ (~) pointwise in fiT. Natural regularity conditions for the solution of (1.137) read as follows: E Hi(0, T; L2(f~)3)ML~(0, T; L2ot(~) 3) =: X,
E L~(~T) 3. (1.138)
In analogy to what we saw for the scalar setting, a suitable timediscretized problem has a solution, and a uniform-in-r estimate in fr can be derived for the approximate field ~ . Therefore there exists ~ E f~ such that, possibly extracting a subsequence, ~ ~ ~
weakly star in f{, as r --~ 0.
(1.139)
However, space oscillations of increasing frequency are not excluded in this limit, since the injection X ~ L~oc(fl; C~ T]) 3) is not compact. It is then not clear how one might pass to the limit in the hysteresis relation, and thus prove the existence of a solution to our problem. We conclude that in the vector setting we are not able to justify analytically a coarse-scale formulation of the Maxwell-Ohm equations coupled with the population model. These difficulties are strictly related to the occurrence of the double-curl operator in the equation (1.137).
Homogenization Approach The above discussion suggests that the field ~(x, t) might have a nontrivial fine-scale space structure, which should be accounted for in the formulation of the problem. This induces us to amend the hypothesis (1.123), and to apply the viewpoint of homogenization theory. Let us denote the mesoscopic length-scale by e. Dealing with the two-scale-type vector model, we already defined the mapping t3 " 3; ~ / ) . Now we extend that mapping to R 3 by 3;-periodicity, and consider the following if; versus ~ relation:
Co(x) --ff~(xle)(F~(x))
for a.a. x ~ fl.
(1.140)
62
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
This represents the constitutive behavior of a periodic ferromagnetic material, which in each period ey reproduces the arrangement of magnetic particles that we represented by the function ~(y). At this point one should couple this constitutive relation with the Maxwell system, and study the limit as e vanishes. (In these notes we do not enter that issue.)
Comparison between the Prandtl-Ishlinskii and Preisach Models As we anticipated, the above discussion is not restricted to ferromagnetism, and might also be applied to a number of phenomena. For instance, in elasto-plasticity one can assume the (linearized) strain and the stress as state variables. In Section 1.3 we formulated two basic models: the play, and the stop; the corresponding constitutive relations can be expressed in terms of variational inequalities. By means of parallel and series arrangements of these elements, we then constructed the Prandtl-Ishlinskii models, which can be represented by systems of variational inequalities. Along the lines of the discussion of this section, we distinguish a finescale description (two-scale approach) from that based on the image measure (particle-density model). The latter is at the basis of the PrandtlIshlinskii model, and provides a less detailed description than the former. There is an obvious analogy between relays and the Preisach model on one hand, and plays or stops and the Prandtl-Ishlinskii models on the other. However, these two settings exhibit a relevant difference. For ferromagnetism we have just seen the difficulties that arise in coupling the Maxwell-Ohm equations with a population model expressed in terms of the image measure (thus using a coarse-scale constitutive law). On the other hand, in the case of elasto-plasticity well-posedness has been proved for the dynamic equation coupled with the Prandtl-Ishlinskii models (that is a coarse-scale constitutive law, too) [88; Chapter VII]. This can be ascribed to the intrinsic convex structure plays and stops have, at variance with relays; indeed plays and stops can be represented via variational inequalities.
1.7 G E N E S I S O F H Y S T E R E S I S A N D C O U P L I N G PDEs
WITH
1.7.1 HYSTERESIS AND NONMONOTONICITY Discontinuous hysteresis relations can be approximated by introducing a time-relaxation term into equations that contain a nonmonotone function. In this section we couple equations of this type with some especially simple
1.7 GENESIS OF HYSTERESIS AND COUPLING WITH PDES
63
P..2........ '% ",,%
w
w 4 ...........
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 1.15 Nonmonotone u versus w relation (1.142) in (a). Associated relaxation dynamics approximating a hysteresis behavior in (b).
ODEs and PDEs, and deal with the limit behavior as the relaxation constant vanishes. By inverting a n o n m o n o t o n e relation, a m u l t i v a l u e d correspondence is obtained; this represents a feedback mechanism. A hysteresis relation is then derived b y a s s u m i n g a suitable dynamic. For instance, let us fix any Pl,/92 E R with/91 < /92, and consider the n o n m o n o t o n e relation of Fig. 1.15(a):
u e or
] -- c~,p 2]
if w -- - 1 ,
l[pl+P2_(p2_Pl)W]
if-1 <w
[Pl, + ~ [
ifw-
(1.141)
1.
Let us fix a constant s > 0, approximate (1.141) b y m e a n s of the relaxation d y n a m i c s
dws s--~- + ~(ws) ~ u
for t > 0,
(1.142)
and set 1 ,~(w) "-- ~ [ (Pl - P 2)w -}- Pl q P 2]
'r
R.
Let us also denote b y ~I[-1,1] the subdifferential of the indicator function of the interval [ - 1 , 1] (cf. the Appendix), so that a = 2 + 0I[-1,1]. The inclusion (1.142) is then equivalent to the following variational inequality
(s -aws -~
+ 2(w~) -
u) (w~
-
v) <~O
f o r t > 0. Vv e [ - 1 , 1]
(1.143)
64
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
The two vertical branches of the graph of :~ are attractors for this dynamic, whereas the oblique segment is a repulsor. Let us assume that the evolution of u is prescribed, and make some heuristic remarks. If at the initial instant the pair (u, w) does not lie on the oblique branch, then after a transient w "" 4-1 and u "" z for some z ~ a(w). If w(t) -- - 1 , as u increases b e y o n d the u p p e r threshold P2, by (1.142) w increases until w "" 1. Similarly, if w(t) = 1, as u decreases below the lower threshold Pl, then w decreases to w _~ - 1 . The smaller is e, the faster is this dynamic; see Fig. 1.15(b). Therefore, as e vanishes, (1.142) tends to a discontinuous hysteresis relation between u and w; more precisely, in the limit we get a relation of the form
w ~ f~p(u, w ~
for t > 0.
(1.144)
The multivalued operator hp acts from C~ T]) to 2 Bv(~ for any T > 0; it essentially differs from hp (we defined in Section 1.4) in that, if u(t) -- Pl (u(t) = P2, respectively) at some instant t, then [hp(u, w~ can attain either - 1 or I [88; Section XI.1]. This analysis rests on the assumption that the evolution of u is prescribed; if this restriction is removed, a more complex behavior m a y occur. We n o w couple the relaxation dynamic (1.142) with a differential equation that involves both u and w, and see whether the feedback that w exerts on u via this equation is able to modify the above dynamic.
Coupling with ODEs (i) L e t f ~ L~oc(R+) be a given function, and consider the system due for t > 0 (e: constant > 0).
dwe
(1.145)
~-d-~ + ~(w~) ~ u~ The function u = limE~0 u~ is necessarily continuous. We claim that then the feedback exerted on u by w via the differential equation (1.145)1 does not modify the above picture; as e --, 0 we thus get
{an
+ w -f
for t > 0.
(1.146)
w ~ ~p(u, w ~ For instance, let us start from u~(0) < P2, we(0) = - 1 , and let f = fo (constant) > - 1 . Then u~ increases, until it overtakes P2. At that point,
1.7 GENESIS OF HYSTERESIS AND COUPLING WITH PDES
65
we quickly moves up, and attains a value "~ 1 in a time of order of 1/s. It might be objected that, as we increases, duE/dt = f - we m a y change sign, so that uE m a y invert its direction and thus decrease below the threshold P2. But, if s is small enough, this cannot stop the increase of we. Indeed, as we increases, the t h r e s h o l d 1[/91 4- P2 - (P2 - P1)ws] at which d w e / d t changes sign moves to values 92; and the smaller is s, the faster is this motion. The latter argument depends on the shape of the graph of a in a neighborhood of the turning points (-1,/92) and (1, P1); if a were modified so to have a horizontal tangent at those points instead of a corner, then the discussion w o u l d be more delicate. (We refrain from entering these details here.) Thus f - w~ _~ fo - 1 after a transient; if fo < 1, then uE inverts its direction, and decreases until uE~pl. Therefore if - 1 < fo < 1 then the pair (uE, we) keeps on cycling: u oscillates between/91 and P2, and w jumps back and forth between - 1 and 1. This construction is used to model several oscillatory behaviors in physics, biology, engineering, and so on. (ii) Let us n o w consider a system of the form d
h-/(u~ + w~) + w~ = f for t > 0.
(1.147)
dwe
~ - - ~ + ~(w~) ~ u~ I f f is locally b o u n d e d , the function u + w = limE-_,0(uE + we) is continuous, whereas u needs not be so. Let us then set ~(v) := ~(v) + v for any v e R, and rewrite (1.147)2 in the equivalent form awe
s-~-- + ~(wE) 3 u~ + w~
for t > 0 (s: constant > 0),
(1.148)
so that the function uE 4- we here plays the role that before was of uE. If the function ~ is nondecreasing, i.e. P2 -- P 1 ~ 2 , then no hysteresis occurs as --, 0. If instead ~ is decreasing in ] - 1, 1[, i.e. p 2 -/91 > 2, then hysteresis appears; in the limit we then get
d -~(u+w)+w=f
for t > 0.
(1.149)
w ~ :F(u + w, w ~ Here .T is a multivalued hysteresis operator: ~" is analogous to kp of (1.72)(1.74), but its thresholds are different.
CHAPTER 1
66
M a t h e m a t i c a l M o d e l s of H y s t e r e s i s
Coupling with PDEs (iii) Let f~ be a bounded domain of R N (N~>1), f be a prescribed function f2 x R + --, R. Let us set A := ~ N 1 (~2/(9X2, consider a system of the form Ou___~_ Au~ + w~ = f 3t Owe ~ - ~ + ~(w~) ~ u~
in f2, for t > 0,
(1.150)
and couple it with initial and boundary conditions for ue. If f is regular enough, by analogy with the ODE system (1.145), as e ~ 0 we may expect to get
~U_hu+w= f cg--t
in f2, for t > 0.
(1.151)
w ~ kp(u, w O) (iv) Let us now consider an equation of the form 3~(u~ + w~) - Aue = f
in f~, for t > 0.
(1.152)
If this is coupled with a maximal monotone relation we = a(ue), the corresponding initial- and boundary-value problem is well posed under mild assumptions [95,96]. The same holds also if (1.152) is coupled with the relaxation dynamics (1.142), for any e > 0; but in this case, as e vanishes, the analysis of the asymptotic behavior of the pair (ue, we) is nontrivial. Actually, here one cannot expect that the evolution of ue uncouples from that of we, since the feedback exerted by we on ue might modify the above picture, t Therefore a priori it is not obvious that by passing to the limit in the system (1.142), (1.152) one would get ~ ( u + w) - Au = f w ~ kp(u, w O)
in f~, for t > 0.
(1.153)
An Alternative Approach N o w we provide an alternative interpretation of the relaxation dynamics (1.142), and introduce a different approach, along the lines of [97]. We still assume that the function a is as in (1.141), although our discussion might easily be extended to other nonmonotone functions. t This would be the case even if (1.142) were coupled with a simple equation like u g, where b is a constant > (P2 - P l ) / 2 and g is a prescribed function of (x, t).
+ bw =
1.7 GENESIS OF HYSTERESIS AND COUPLING WITH PDES
67
Let us consider a space-distributed system the state of which is characterized by two scalar variables, u and w. By u we shall denote a continuous quantity, such as temperature, or the component of the magnetic field along a fixed direction, and so on. On the other hand, w = 4-1 will represent two admissible phases; e.g., solid and liquid, or up and d o w n orientation of magnetization in a uniaxial ferromagnet. The variables u and w will be related by a constitutive law like (1.141), that we couple with the equation 0-~(u + w) - Au = f
in f2, for t > 0;
(1.154)
this m a y represent either the energy balance for solid-liquid systems, or (for a univariate system) the coupling of the O h m and Maxwell laws without displacement current. However, here we shall not refer to any specific applicative setting. N o w we assume that at the small length-scale the two phases are well separated, but that at the coarse length-scale they m a y look to be finely mixed. On the latter scale we then represent the phase by a new variable ~, which we derive from w via a local average, or by convolution with a compactly supported mollifier. Accordingly if; will range in the set [-1, 1]; values of ~ ~] - 1, 1[ m a y be interpreted as representing mixtures, with a fraction 21-(1 + ~) (1 (1 - ~), respectively) of particles in the state w = 1 (w = - 1 , respectively) .(Here we use the term particle rather freely, referring to a small aggregate of elements.) Thus w and if; can respectively be regarded as fine-scale (or mesoscopic) and coarse-scale (or macroscopic) phase variables. In the f r a m e w o r k of the two-scale model that we are outlining, as long as Pl < u < P2 the particles that are in either state w = 4-1 remain unchanged. The same then occurs for the average value ~; as long as Pl < u < P2, the coarse scale variable if; then constantly attains some value of [-1, 1]. This m a y represent the behavior of ~ in the critical cases in which either (i) u drops below P2 while if; is rapidly moving towards 1, or symmetrically (ii) u increases b e y o n d Pl while ~ is rapidly m o v i n g towards - 1 . On the basis of the above discussion, we set
q~(u, if;) "=
l-if;
if u > P2,
0
if P l ~ u ~ P 2 ,
~-1
ifu < Pl,
u
~) ~ R 2",
(1.155)
68
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
w
P2
u
. . . .
D'
,
~<0
@>0
=0
FIGURE 1.16 Outline of the coarse-scale relaxation dynamics ed~o/dt = ~(u, ~) corresponding to ~ as in (1.155). we then replace the fine-scale relaxation equation (1.142) by the (nonequivalent) coarse-scale dynamic (cf. Fig. 1.16) -1Kff;K1,
e-~-. = r ot
if;)
in Q.
(1.156)
A More General Setting Let us assume that { ~ , 7r are maximal monotone (possibly multivalued) functions R --, 2 R \ {0} such that inf ?r(U)K sup ~r u ~ R, cf. Fig. 1.17(a), (1.157) and set ~(u, if;) := [if; - inf 7r(U)]- - [~; - sup 7r
+
u
if;) E R2;
(1.158)
thus q~(u, if;) = 0 ~
inf 7r(U)~ff;~ sup 7~(u)
u
if;) E R 2.
As e vanishes in the corresponding relaxation equation (1.156), we get the dynamic of Fig. 1.17(b). The equation (1.156), with ~ as in (1.155) or (1.158), can be coupled with the equation -~(u + if;) - Au = f
in (2, for t > 0.
(1.159)
1.8 A T R A N S P O R T E Q U A T I O N W I T H HYSTERESIS
w
69
#
,4
;I" @<
J/
r,
v
t
,~>0
u
J
(b)
Ca)
FIGURE 1.17 Function goof (1.158) in (a); corresponding coarse-scale relaxation dynamics ~d~v/dt = go(u, ~) in (b).
In [97] corresponding initial- and boundary-value problems were formulated, and the behavior of the solution (u, ~) as ~ vanishes was studied.
1.8 A TRANSPORT EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS In this section we introduce PDEs with hysteresis operators. We shall use typical notation of the analysis of P.D.E.s in Sobolev spaces, see e.g. [3,5,8] and references therein. We then deal with a simple example: we prove well-posedness and asymptotic stability of an initial- and boundary-value problem for a semilinear transport equation in a single dimension of space. 1.8.1 P D E S WITH HYSTERESIS
First we extend the definition of hysteresis operator to space-distributed systems. Let ~ be a domain of R N (N ~ 1) and T be a positive constant. We assume that )v. C o ([0, T]) x R ~ C o ([0, T]) is a continuous hysteresis operator, (1.160) cf. (1.2) and (1.3), and define the corresponding space-distributed operator ~" as follows: Vu E L~oc(f2; C~ T])), Vw~ ~ L~oc(f2), for a.a. x e f2, Vt E [0, T], [~'(u, w~ t)"= [)r(u(x, .), w~
(1.161)
We thus regard the space variable x as a parameter, and neglect any space interaction between neighboring points, for no space derivative occurs
70
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
in (1.161). This can also be extended to multivalued hysteresis operator. Henceforth we identify ~ with ~, and omit the tilde. Let A be an elliptic operator. Here are some basic examples of PDEs with hysteresis, in f~x ]0, T[: D~[u + Y'(u)] + Au = f , ~u ~t
-F Au + .,~'(u) = f,
c9t2[u + ~-(u)] + Au --f,
~2U
(1.162)
(1.163) (1.164)
(9
cgt-T-- -F Au + -~ ~ ( u ) - f ,
(1.165)
~2u c~t2
+ Au + .~'(u)
+ 7(u)l + c~u
Ou
=d
=f, (for N = 1),
(1.166) (1.167)
c~u
+ Yxx+ y:(u) = f
(for N = 1).
(1.168)
Classification of PDEs with Hysteresis The standard classification of nonlinear PDEs can be extended to equations that contain hysteresis operators. In Section 1.1 we saw that any scalar hysteresis operator, ~', is reduced to a (possibly multivalued) superposition operator on any time interval in which the input function is monotone (either nondecreasing or nonincreasing). Let us denote by S~- this class of superposition operators; in several examples of applicative interest, these operators are associated with nondecreasing functions (we named this property piecewise monotonicity of ~). We say that a scalar equation that contains Y is either parabolic or hyperbolic whenever it would be so if the operator .~ were replaced by any element of S~-. These equations are nonlinear, and by the same criterion we also extend the usual definition of semilinearity, quasilinearity and full nonlinearity. These definitions can be extended to vector hysteresis operators, provided that whenever a vector input function evolves monotonically along any fixed (possibly x-dependent) direction, the vector output is reduced to a (possibly multivalued) superposition operator. This property is fulfilled,
1.8 A TRANSPORT EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS
71
for instance, by the vector-relay and the vector Preisach operator. The same applies to tensor hysteresis operators, like those of Prandtl-Ishlinskii. For instance, the equations (1.162), (1.163) are parabolic, and (1.164)(1.168) are hyperbolic. On the other hand (1.162), (1.164), (1.167) are quasilinear, and (1.163), (1.165), (1.166), (1.168) are semilinear. 1.8.2 TRANSPORT EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS IN CLASSICAL SPACES
In this and the next sections we shall deal with some of the above equations. In the remainder of this section we study the semilinear first-order equation (1.168), along the lines of [8; Section X.4]; this example is rather simple, and gives us the opportunity to introduce some of the techniques that are currently used for the analysis of PDEs with hysteresis. First we fix any T > 0, set Qt := R +x]0, t[ for any t > 0 and Q := QT, denote by C~ (R +) the Banach space of b o u n d e d continuous functions R + ---> R equipped with the uniform norm, and define C~ (Q) similarly. We assume that (1.160) holds and that f E C~
u~
~ ~ C~
v ~ ~ C~
T]),
u~
- v~
(1.169)
by integrating the equation (1.168) along the characteristic lines x - t = constant, we now formulate an initial- and boundary-value problem in integral form in the space of continuous functions. PROBLEM 1.8.1. Find u E C~(Q) such that, setting
w(x, t ) ' - [,T(u(x, .), w~
u
t) ~ Q,
(1.170)
if 0 < t~x if O < x < t ~ T
(1.171)
one has u(x,t)=
fot
[f-w](x-t+r,r)dz+
{ uO(x--t) vO(t_x )
for any (x, t) ~ Q. THEOREM 1.8.1 (Well-posedness). Let (1.160), (1.169) hold, and assume that 3L, L > 0" Vvl, V2 E C 0([0, T]), Vr r E R, u ~]0, T], max I.T(vl, r - Y'(v2, r max Ivl - v21 + L1r - r [o,t] [o,t] u > 0, u ~ C~
T]), if v(O) - u~
then [3V(v, w~
(1.172) - w~ (1.173)
72
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
Then Problem 1.8.1 is well posed. More precisely, for i - 1, 2, let u ~ w ~ v~ fi be as in (1.169), and denote by ui the corresponding solution of Problem 1.8.1. Set "= Ul - u2, define f~o, coo, f;o,~ similarly, and set M(fio, ~o, t) "-
max {][U0[]Cg(R+), II~~
then IlfillcoQt) ~e Lt
(/o t-ILfllco(G) d~: + Ltllfo~
+ M(f~ ~ bo, t))
(1.174)
Vt ~]0, T]. PROOF. For i = 1, 2, let us take any
Wi(X, t)"=
[.TZ'(zi(x, .),
Zi
E Cg ((~) and
w~
u
[fi --
t) ~ Q,
[ uO(x--t)
~0 t ui(x, t) =
set
Wi](X
--
t + r, r) dr + ( v~
x)
(1.175)
if 0 < tKx if 0 < x < tKT.
(1.176) Setting ~ "= Wl - w2 and ~ := Zl - z2, by (1.172) we have IIz~llcgQt) ~LIl~llcg(ff2t) + LII~~
+)
u ~]0, T];
(1.176) then yields
~ IlfftllcoQt) ~ ~0 t(llfllcg(G) -4- II~llcg(G)) d~: + M(~ ~ ~o, t) ~ fot(l~llcg(Q~) + LII~.IIcg(G)) dr + LtlICo~
4- M(fi ~ ~o, t)
(1.177)
u ~]0, T]. In particular for any u ~ w ~ v~ lift IIcoQt)~L
as in (1.169) we have
~0 t IIf:llcO(G) dr
If t < 1/L then the m a p p i n g z ~ it has a fixed point. Reiterating conclude that Problem 1.8.1 has place of ~, and (1.174) follows by
u ~]0, T].
u is a strict contraction in C 0b (Qt), - hence the a r g u m e n t step by step in time, we a solution. (1.177) then holds with ~ in the Gronwall lemma. []
1.8 A TRANSPORT EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS
73
1.8.3 FORMULATION IN SOBOLEV SPACES
We assume that (1.160) is fulfilled, that u 0,w 0 eLl(R+),
v 0 ELI(0, T),
fELl(Q),
(1.178)
and reformulate the above problem in differential form. This will allow us to improve the regularity of the solution, by using some of the most common techniques for the analysis of PDEs with hysteresis operators. PROBLEM1.8.2. Find u ~ W1LI(Q) such that, setting w(x, t ) : = [Z(u(x, .), w~
Vt ~ [0, Tl,for a.a. x > O,
(1.179)
one has c3u c3u 0---[ + -~x + w = f u(x, O) -- u~ u(O, t) - v~
a.e. in Q,
(1.180)
for a.a. x > 0,
(1.181)
for a.a. t ~]0, T[.
(1.182)
As WI,I(Q) c LI(R+; C~ T])), (1.179) is meaningful, and w(x, .) ~ C O ([0, T]) for a.a. x > 0. The functions u and w will be regarded as elements of spaces of functions of t parameterized by the variable x, and also as elements of spaces of functions of x parameterized by the variable t. Occasionally this will be made clearer by displaying indices x and t in the expression of function spaces. THEOREM1.8.2 (Existence, Uniqueness and Regularity). Let 1 < p < +cxb assume that (1.160) holds, and V(v, ~) ~ Dom(Z), V[tl, t2] c [0, T], if v is either nondecreasing or nonincreasing in [tl, t2], then the same holds for )r(v, ~),
(1.183)
3M, N > 0 : V(v, ~) ~ C~ T]) x R, Vt ~ [0, T], I[$'(v, ~;)](t)l~lr + MIv(t)l + N.
(1.184)
Then Problem 1.8.2 has one and only one solution; moreover
cgu cgu
u, ~-7' ~x
(0, T; L'x(R+)) n Lx(R+; CtP(0,
(1.185)
74
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
u ~ Wtl'~176 T; LPx(R+)) N Lx~176 w]'P(o, T)) A L ~ ( 0 , T; WI'P(R+))A WI'~176 LP(0, T)), w ~ L~(R+;
(1.186)
w}'P(o, T)).
(1.187)
If (1.172) is fulfilled, then the solution is also unique.
PROOF. (i) Approximation. Let us fix any m ~ N, set h := T / m and 0 Um :__ UO,
0 Wm :=
W0
,
fn :=f(., nh)
for n = 1 ..... m.
We a p p r o x i m a t e our p r o b l e m via implicit time-discretization. family {Vm}n= I n ..... m o f functions R --, R, let us set: Vm :-- time-interpolate of v ~
.. ., Vm, m a.e. in f~, n vm(', t) := v m a.e. in f2, Yt ~](n - 1)h, nh], for n = 1 . . . . . m.
For any
(1.188)
Yl
PROBLEM 1.8.2m. Find u m E W I'p (R +) such that, for n = 1 ..... m, setting for a.a. x > 0,
w n ( x ) :--" [.TZ(Um(X, .), w~
one has n n-1 U m -- U m
du n
+wn=/n
(1.189)
a.e. in R +,
u n (0) = v 0 (nh).
(1.190) (1.191)
Existence of an approximate solution can be p r o v e d step by step. For any n (X) n, at the nth step u ~ ..... u nm- 1 are known. By the causality of 9v, w m tl then only d e p e n d s on urn(x); that is, there exists a C a r a t h e o d o r y function g n . R x R + --, R such that (1.189) reads w 1"/ m (x) = gnm (u n (x), x)
for a.a. x > 0.
(1.192)
By (1.183) a n d (1.184), gn (., x) is nondecreasing and affinely b o u n d e d . The C a u c h y p r o b l e m (1.190)-(1.192) then has one and only one solution in R +. (ii) A Priori Estimates. Let us set 0
Zm = fl', O)
du o -dx
W0
n
'
.
Zm =
n n-1 Um m Um
for n = 1 ..... m, (1.193)
h t
am,p-l(V) :-- min{Ivl p-2, m}v,
Am,p(V) :=
fO
am,p-l (~) d~
Yv ~ R, Ym ~ N.
(1.194)
1.8 A TRANSPORT EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS
75
By taking the incremental ratio in time in (1.190), we have n n-1 n 1 z nm - z n-1 m _ff dz n Jr- Wm - Wm -- fm - f m h ~ h h a.e. in R +, for n = 1 .... , m. Multiplying this equation by
Lx (Am,p(zn (x)) Lx
1
am,p-1 (zn),
and integrating in ]0, x[ we have
+,p(zn(x)) Am,p(Zn-1 ( x ) ) )dx (Am
n n-1 Lxfn Wm -h wm am,p-l (Z n) d x -
q-
(1.195)
Am,p(zn (O)))
_fn-1 h am,p-l (Z n) d x
(1.196) for a.a. x > 0, for any n; by (1.183) the third a d d e n d u m is nonnegative. By s u m m i n g for n = 1 ..... s for any s ~ {1 ..... m}, we then get x
s
L (Am'p(Zem(X))- Am'p(zO(x)))dx + ~ (Am,p(Z~(X)) - Am,p(Z~m(O))) f ~< ~
n=l
fm _fn-X I1 II
h
n=l
LP(O,x)
Notice that Z~m(O) "= [v~163 then yields
n IIp-1 IlZm ~(O,x)
v~
for a.a. x > O, re.
- h)]/h for any
II-FII
II
s A simple calculation
(by C1, C2 .... we denote suitable constants independent of (1.184), IlWm [IL~ (Q) ~ C2. (iii) Limit Procedure. The equation (1.190) also reads OUm
~Um
~----~-if- W
if- zidm ~'~d~m
(1.197)
~C1
m); hence,
a.e. in R + x ]0, T[.
by
(1.198)
(1.199)
By (1.197) and by comparing the terms of this equation, we get
II
-c3.
, II
1200
By (1.197), (1.198) and (1.200) there exist u, w such that, possibly taking m ~ ~ along a subsequence, 1Am ~
U,
~Um
0t
(~U ~Um C3U ---+ ~ ~ --~
c3t'
c3x
cgx
weakly star in L~(0, T; LPx(R+)) M Lx(R+; LtP(0, T)),
(1.201)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
76
Wm ---> w
weakly star in Lx(R+; wI'P (o, T)).
(1.202)
By passing to the limit in (1.199) we get (1.180). By (1.201), Um ---> u uniformly in [0, T] for a.a. x > 0; by (1.160) this entails
Z(Um, w ~ ---> Z(u, w ~
uniformly in [0, T], a.e. in R +.
As Wm is the linear interpolate of win(', nh) := [Z(Um, w~ 1 ..... m), then
W m --+ .TO,l, w O)
", nh) (n =
uniformly in [0, T], a.e. in R +.
By (1.202) we conclude that w = Z(u) a.e. in Q. Thus u solves Problem 1.8.1. (iv) Uniqueness. By (1.186), u ~ C~(Q) and u solves Problem 1.8.1; by Theorem 1.8.1 the solution is then unique. (This might also easily be proved directly on Problem 1.8.2.) [] Remarks (i) Existence of a solution of Problem 1.8.2 can easily be established also if the piecewise monotonicity property (1.183) is replaced by that of Lipschitz-continuity (1.172). In this case one also gets w Lx (R+; W] 'p (0, T)). (ii) If the drift term 8u/Sx is replaced by v(x)Ou/Sx for a prescribed nonincreasing positive function v ~ W 1'~176 (R+), no difficulty arises in extending Theorem 1.8.2. Other extensions are also possible, e.g. R + can be replaced either by R or b~r a bounded interval. (iii) Let R + be replaced by a domain f} c R 1~, ~ : f/---> R N be a given function, and consider the equation ~u 0t
+ ~(x). Vu + ~-(u) = f
in f/x ]0, T[.
(1.203)
If the field ~ is integrable, then one can integrate this equation along each integral line, retrieve a family of equations in a single space variable of the form (1.168), and thus derive well-posedness results. 1.8.4 LARGE-TIME BEHAVIOR
Problems 1.8.1 and 1.8.2 can be extended to t ranging in the whole R +, just by assuming that u solves the corresponding problem in any finite interval [0, T]; in that case we shall say that u solves the problem in R +.
1.8 A T R A N S P O R T E Q U A T I O N W I T H HYSTERESIS
77
Because of rate-independence, for any hysteresis operator .T as in (1.160) it is easy to see that .T. C~ (R +) x R --+ C~ (R +) and is continuous,
(1.204)
V(v, ~) e C~(R +) x R, 3 lim v(t) E R =~ 3 lim [ . T ( v , ~ ) ] ( t ) e R .
(1.205)
t--++r
t--,+e~
Let us set Qoo "- (R+) 2. PROPOSITION 1.8.3. Assume that (1.160), (1.172), (1.173) hold, and u ~ w ~ v ~ e C o (R+),
f " R + --, C~
+) is strongly continuous.
(1.206)
Then Problem 1.8.1 has one and only one solution in R +.
This is a straightforward consequence of Theorem 1.8.1. Let us n o w come to the large-time behavior of the solution of Problem 1.8.2. PROPOSITION 1.8.4. Let 1 < p < +cx~, (1.160), (1.172), (1.173) hold, and f ~ w~'P(R+; LP(R+)),
u ~ w ~ v ~ ~ WI'P(R+),
,
~3r(u, w 0 ) Ou p-2 ,tll
,~t
I~1
c~u p
~,~'~1~1
(1.207)
a ein,',' (1.208)
Then Problem 1.8.2 has one and only one solution in R+; moreover
~u c3--t- e L7 (R+" Lpx(R+)) A L~ (R +" Ltp (R+)),
(1.209)
~u Ot
-~ 0
strongly in LP(R+), as t --, +cx~.
(1.210)
PROOF. Existence and uniqueness of the solution in R + follow from Theorem 1.8.2. By passing to the limit as h --~ 0 in (1.196), by (1.208) we have
ld/oX I~;~ U d~+ (l~xt~-I~ ip ~~1~) dv~ § ~d~ 2 foXllp d~ +
~<7-
d~
I~ d~
for a.a. x > O,u > 0,
78
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
whence, multiplying by p, d
i
Xcgu
I
d-t ~0 I--~(~,t) d~ 4-I-~(x, t) + ~
2/o/l Jl Idv~ ~
d~ + --~-(t)
b P+l fXl 2 Jo
CgUIP d~ (1.211)
for a.a. x > 0 and a.a. t > 0.
As the right side is integrable with respect to time in R +, Lemma 1.8.5 below yields (1.209) and (1.210). [] LEMMA1.8.5. Let f ~ LI(R+),f~0, and a, C be positive constants. Let Y be the family of nonnegative functions y ~ WI,I(R +) such that y(O)~C,
for a.a. t > 0.
y'(t) + ay(t)Kf(t)
(1.212)
Then y(t)KC y(t) ~ 0
~) dr
u > O,
(1.213)
as t ~ +cx~, uniformly in Y.
PROOF. By the formula of variation of constants we have
y(t)~e-aty(O) ff-~Ot e-a(t-r)f(z) d r ~ C y(t)
~e-a(t-T)y(T) + <<.e-a(t-r~M +
/;
fiT) d~ =" M
Yt>0,
e-a(t-T)f("0 d'c
"c) d~
gT, t > 0, T < t.
This yields (1.213).
[]
1.9 A Q U A S I L I N E A R PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS In this section we deal with a quasilinear parabolic equation that contains a continuous hysteresis operator. We prove well-posedness, study the large-time behavior of the solution, deal with the corresponding periodic problem, and finally prove the existence of a solution for a parabolic equation with hysteresis in the coefficient of the elliptic term.
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
79
1.9.1 FORMULATION AND EXISTENCE RESULT
Let f2 be a bounded Lipschitz domain of R N (N>~1), T be a positive constant, and set f2T := f2x ]0, T[. We assume that ,T" C o ([0, T]) x R --~ C o ([0, T]) is a continuous hysteresis operator, (1.214) and identify it with ~ , cf. (1.161). We fix a functionf 9 f2T --* R, and couple the equation 0 0-~[u 4- 3V(u)] - Au - - f in f2T (1.215) with suitable initial and boundary conditions. For the sake of simplicity, here we assume the homogeneous Dirichlet condition, and set V := H~ (f2). We identify the (real) Hilbert space H := L2(~) with its topological dual H'; in turn H can then be identified with a subspace of V I, as V is a dense subspace of H with continuous injection. We thus get the Hilbert triplet V C H = H I C Vt
with continuous and dense injections.
We denote by {., .} the duality pairing between V' and V, and define the linear and continuous operator A : V --, V I by
{Au, v) "= I n Vu. Wv dx
'Cu, v E V.
Finally, we assume that u ~ w ~ ~ H,
PROBLEM1.9.1. Find u : f2 --, C~ and, setting
w(x, t):= [~-(u(x,-), w~
f ~ L2(0, T; V').
(1.216)
T]) measurable such that u ~ L2(0, T; V)
u ~ [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f2,
(1.217)
w E L2(0, T; H), u + w ~ Hi(0, T; V'), and
c~(u + w) 4- Au - f
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[,
(u 4- w)It=0 -- u~ 4- w~
in V'.
(1.218) (1.219)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
80
For N = 1 this problem is a simplified model of scalar ferromagnetism, with normalized coefficients. (1.218) can be derived from the Maxwell equations, neglecting the displacement current term and assuming a linear relation between the electric field, E, and the electric current density, J. The operator .T then represents the (scalar) hysteretic relation between the magnetic field, H, and the magnetization, M. THEOREM1.9.1 (Existence). Assume that (1.214) is fulfilled, and u ~j) e Dom(.T), u t2] c [0, T], if v is either nondecreasing or nonincreasing in [tl, t2], then the same holds for .T(v, ~;),
(1.220)
3M, N e R + :u ~j) ~ C~ T]) x R, u E [0, T], I[~'(v, ~;)](t)lKl~;i + MIv(t)i + N,
(1.221)
for a.a. x e f~, u ~ C O([0, T]), ifv(O) - u~ [.T(v, w~ u~ e V , w~ f = f l +f2, f] ~ L2(0, T; H),
(1.222)
= w~
f2 e W1,](0, T; V').
(1.223)
Then Problem 1.9.1 has a solution such that
u ~ Hi(0, T; H) A L~176 T; V),
w ~ L2(f~; C~
T])).
(1.224)
Moreover the norm of (u, w) in the latter spaces is bounded by a constant that only depends on the data u ~ w ~ via the respective norms in V, H, L2(0, T; H) + W ]'1 (0, T; V').
PROOF. We use the argument of Theorem 1.1 of [8; Chapter IX], which is based on approximation by implicit time-discretization, derivation of a priori estimates, and passage to the limit by compactness. (i) Approximation. We fix any m ~ N, set h := T/m and
f~m(X) "--
1/nh
-~
(n_l)hfl(X, t)dt for a.a. x E f),
fn ._ f~m +f2n '
u~ "= u~
w~ "- w~
f~m "- f2(nh),
(1.225)
for n = 1 ..... m.
Defining time-interpolate functions as in (1.188), we now approximate our problem via implicit time-discretization.
81
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS PROBLEM1.9.1m. For n -- 1 ..... m , f i n d u 7"/ m E V s u c h that, s e t t i n g wn(x)
"-- [.~'(Um(X, "), w ~
f o r n = 1 . . . . . m , f o r a.a. x ~ f2,
(1.226) one has n n-1 Um -- Um
n n-1 Wm -- W m
+
h
+An n _fn
in V ' , f o r n -
1, ..., m .
(1.227)
h
Existence of an approximate solution can be proved step by step. For any n, at the nth step u~,..., u n-1 are k n o w n a.e. in f2. By the causality of 9r, w n then only depends on u nm, i.e., n
n
7,/
for a.a. x ~ fL
W m (X) -- gm(Um (X) , X)
for a suitable Caratheodory function gn . R x f2 --+ R. By (1.220), (1.221), for a.a. x E f2 the function gn (., x) is nondecreasing and affinely bounded. Existence of a solution of the elliptic equation (1.227) then follows. n - um n-1 , and Let us multiply equation (1.227) by u m sum for n = 1 ..... s for any s ~ {1 ..... m}. By (1.220), (ii) A Priori E s t i m a t e s .
( w n - - W m ) n-1 (un--Um
n-1 ) ~ 0
a.e. inf2, f o r n - 1
..... m;
hence h ~-~
fot
n t2+llo
Um--Um n
h
n=l ~ ~
2
(IV s 2 - IVu~ 2) dx
-
Uml
(1.228) n _ U mn--1 )V V ' ~ f n , Um
Vs
n=l
(n nl)2
As n V'~ cn /Am
'
n=l
-
n-1 /V~ Um
110Cl
2
IIL2(O,T; H)
q_h
Um
h
Um
dx
n=l q_Cl1~2862WI,I(O,T;V ,) _}_ l m a x n _-0 , .... ~llunl[ 2
Vs (1.229) (by C1, C2 .... we denote suitable constants independent of m), by a standard calculation we get IIUm BeH ] (0, T;H)r3L ~ (0, T; V) ~ C2.
Hence Um is uniformly b o u n d e d in a 2 ( ~ ; C~ have [IWm []L2(f2;cO([O,T])) ~ C3.
(1.230)
Z])), and by (1.221) we (1.231)
82
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis Notice that (1.227) also reads 0 rr ---:(urn if- Wm) q- Aum --fm
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[.
(1.232)
(iii) Passage to the Limit. By the estimates (1.230) and (1.231) there exist u and w such that, possibly taking m ---> o0 along a subsequence, Um --+ U Wm --* w
weakly star in H 1(0, T; H) N Lo~(0, T; V), weakly star in L2(~; L~176 T)).
(1.233)
By taking m ---> ~ in (1.227) we then get (1.218); (1.219) is also easily derived. As Hi(0, T; H) N L~(0, T; V) C L2(f2; C~
T])) with compact injection,
by (1.233)1 possibly extracting a further subsequence 1Am(X, .) ~ U(X, .)
uniformly in [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f2.
(1.234)
By the continuity of 3c, cf. (1.214), this entails that ~'(Um, w O) --> JJC(u, w O) uniformly in [0, T] a.e. in f2. As win(x, .) is the linear interpolate of win(x, nh) := [3C(Um, w~ nh) (n = 0 ..... m) for a.a. x, Wm ---> Y:(u, w ~ uniformly in [0, T] a.e. in f2. By (1.233)2 we then conclude that w = 9V(u) a.e. in f2T. The final statement is a straightforward consequence of the above estimates. []
1.9.2 UNIQUENESS We assume that
7e, 7r : R --~ R are two Lipschitz-continuous and affinely bounded curves, 7r ~)'~ pointwise,
(1.235)
and denote by 9c the corresponding generalized play operator, cf. (1.51). The next result carries over to a larger class of hysteresis operators, which also includes several (either continuous or discontinuous) Preisach operators, cf. Section 1.4. THEOREM1.9.2 (Dependence on the Data and Uniqueness [17]). Assume (1.235) is fulfilled, let u~
w~
(i=1,2),
fl-f2eLl(f2r),
that (1.236)
and set w ~ := min { max{w ~
7r(U0)}, )~(U0)}
a.e. in f2 (i - 1, 2).
(1.237)
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
83
Let Ul, U2 E H 1(0, T; H) N L~(O, T; V) be corresponding solutions of Problem 1.9.1 (which exist after Theorem 1.9.1), and define Wl, w2 as in (1.217). Then
/f~ [(Ul -- U2) + (X, t) + (Wl -- W2) + (X, t)]dx
fo
(1.238) [(u ~ - u ~ + + (w ~ - w ~ + ]dx + f0t'~) d ~ (fl - f2) + (x, ~)dx, gt
for any t ~ [0, T]; an analogous inequality holds if the positive part is replaced either by the negative part or by the absolute value. Therefore the solution of Problem 1.9.1 is unique, and depends monotonically and Lipschitz-continuously on the data u ~ w ~ f . PROOF. We follow Hilpert's argument of [17]. First let us approximate the Heaviside function, /2/(~) .= 0
if ~KO,
/2/(~) ._ 1
if ~ > O,
by setting/2/m(~) :-- max{min{m~, 1}, 0} for any ~ ~ R and any m ~ N. Note that Wl, w2 ~ H 1(0, T; H), as 7e and ~/r are Lipschitz-continuous. Let us write (1.218) for i = 1, 2, take the difference of these equations, multiplyitbyHm(Ul-U2),andintegrateitinf~t "- f~x]0, t[ fora.a, t ~]0, T[. By the monotonicity of/2/m, we get
( ~ ( U l -- U2)q-
JJn,\&
)
(Wl -- W2) f-Ira(U1 -- U2)dxdz
fff2t(fl --f2) f'Im(Ul -- U2) dxdr
for a.a. t ~]0, T[.
Notice that f-Im(u I - u2) ~ ~ -- /2/(Ul - U2) a.e. in f~T as m ~ passing to the limit in the latter inequality we then infer that //f~ ( ~ ( U l -
t
oo. By
c9 w2)) ~ d x d l : ~ / / f l (fl - f 2 ) + dxdl: U2)if- ~T(Wlt
for a.a. t ~]0, T[. (1.239)
Moreover ~ ('~T(Ul -- U2))l/I -- -~[(Ul
-- U2)
+]
a.e. in f~T,
and the Hilpert inequality (1.53) yields
(-~-~ C9"C( W l - W2))~J~ ~~ [(Wl -- W2) +1
a.e. in f2T.
84
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
The inequality (1.239) then yields //f2 t ~~ ((Ul - u2) + 4- (Wl -- W21)+) dxdz~ //f2 (fl - f 2 ) + dxdz t for a.a. t e]O, T[, and integrating in time we get (1.234). 1.9.3 LARGE TIME BEHAVIOUR
THEOREM1.9.3 (Uniform Asymptotic Stability in V). Assume (1.220) and (1.221) hold, that 3L > 0 9Vv ~ C~
that
(1.214),
4-oo[), V~ ~ R, V[h, t2] C [0, 4-cx~[,
v affine in [tl, t2] =:~ I[.T(v, ~)](t2) - [.T(v, ~)](tl)l~LIv(t2) - v(tl)l,
(1.240) u~ eV, w~ ~ H , f - f l 4-foo, fl ~ L2(0, + ~ ; H),
foo ~ V',
(1.241)
and set u ~ := A - l f ~ (~ V). Then there exists one and only one
u E (HI(0, 4-oo; H) A L~176 4-cx~; V)) 4- u ~
(1.242)
that solves Problem 1.9.1for any T > O. Moreover
u(., t) ~ u ~ "- A - l f ~
strongly in V, as t ~ +o0,
(1.243)
uniformly as u ~ (fl, respectively) ranges in any bounded subset of (L 2 (0, 4-cx~; H), respectively). Finally,
V
Ow 0t e L2 (0, + ~ ; H),
(1.244)
in measure in f~, as t --> + ~ .
(1.245)
w e L~oc(0, +c~; H), and there exists w ~ e H such that
w(-, t) ~ woo
PROOF. First notice that by rate-independence (1.220) and (1.221) hold for a n y T > 0. Setting ~ := u - u~ (1.218) also reads 0t(~ 4- w) 4- A~ - f l
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[,
(1.246)
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS Let us multiply this equation by
c~/c~t, and
0w 0i ~w c~u = ~>0 cgt 0t 0t cgt
85
integrate over f]. By (1.220) a.e. in f]T,
and we get
fo
~--~f.
c~ 1d ]-~-~-]2dx4-
~ 2~ I-~] ,, dx a.e. in ]0, T[. (1.247) By (1.240), Icgw/c~tl<<.LIO~/c~tl.Multiplying (1.246) by ~ we then have
'V~' 2dx--
c~ 1 f fl-~dx~-~ fo( [ / 112+
ld
2dt f I~t]2dx+ffl IV~t.2dx = ffl(fl - --~ C~W)~dx<./~([fli +L] -~ g~tc ( _1 L/:ll2dx + ~aag2[2_~_ 0u ] + ~
alul2) dx
])[~] dx
a.e. in ]0, T[, Va > 0. (1.248)
By the Poincar6 inequality there exists a constant a > 0 such that a multiplying (1.248) by 1/fllc9~[2
L
1L
]u]2dx~<~
a/(2L 2) and
IVU]2 dx;
(1.249)
adding it to (1.247), we then get
aLIV~12dx l d f f l ( La lal2 q_ IV~I2)dx + 4-~ dx+ h-}
2L2 + 1 ~< 4L2 I~rl]l2
a.e. in ]0, T[.
This yields (1.242). By setting
y(t) "-
(~-~J~(x, t)l 2 +
iVu(x, t)i2)dx
for a.a. t ~]0, T[,
for a suitable constant ~ > 0 we also get
dy (t) + ay(t)<. 2L2 + 1 d--t-
2L2 Itfl(', t)II2
for a.a. t ~]0, T[.
As the right side is integrable in ]0. + cx~[, by Lemma 1.8.5 y(t) ~ 0 as t ~ +cx~; (1.243) thus holds. By (1.240) and (1.242) w has the regularity (1.244). Finally, by (1.243), (1.244) and by the continuity of Z, we infer that there exists w~ E H such that (1.245) holds. []
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
86
1.9.4 PERIODIC PROBLEM
We introduce a periodic problem associated with Problem 1.9.1, with a nonhomogeneous Dirichlet condition. Let .T fulfil (1.214) and f ~ L2(0, T; V').
(1.250)
PROBLEM1.9.2. Find u ~ L2(ff2; C~
T])) C3L2(0, T; V),
w E L2(f2; C~
T])) N L2(0, T; H),
(1.251)
such that u + w ~ Hi(0, T; V') and
Vt ~ [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f2,
w(x, t) = [.T(u(x,-), w(x, 0))](t)
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[,
_ot (u + w) + Au = f
u(-, 0) = u(., T),
w(., O) = w(., T)
a.e. in Ya.
(1.252) (1.253) (1.254)
THEOREM1.9.4 ([98]). Let .7: be the generalized play operator associated with two curves ~ , 7r such that ~/~, ~r : R ~
R are Lipschitz-continuous and nondecreasing;
~r~;~ in R; 7~(~) > 0 V~>0, 7r(~) < 0 V ~ 0 ,
(1.255)
and assume that
f = f l +f2,
fl ~ L2(0, T; H),
f2 ~ WI'I(0, T; V'),
f2(0) =da(T , (1.256)
(1.257) Then Problem 1.9.2 has minimal and maximal solutions with respect to the pointwise ordering. That is, denoting by S the set of all solutions of this problem, 3f,,f* ~ V' :
f , Kf2Kf*
in/)'(f2), u ~ [0, T].
3(u,, w,), (u*, w*) ~ S :V(u, w) ~ 8, u,~u~u*,
w,~w~w*
(1.258)
a.e. in fiT.
Moreover, these minimal solutions and a maximal solution have the regularity
u ~ H 1(0, T; H) N L~176 (0, T; V),
w E H 1(0, T; H).
(1.259)
PROOF. We follow the argument of [98], and split it into several steps. (i) Let us first set X : - {(u, w) ~ V x H " 7 r ( U ) ~ W ~ ( u ) a.e. in f2}; this set is partially ordered with respect to the natural ordering (Ul, Wl) ~ (U2, W2)
K=~ Ul~U2, Wl~W2
a.e. in f2.
87
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
For any (u ~ w ~ ~ X let us denote by S the solution operator, that maps (u ~ w ~ to the solution u ~ Hi(0, T; H) N L~(0, T; V),
w ~ L2(f~; C~
T]))
of Problem 1.9.1 corresponding to the initial values (u ~ w ~ and to the source term f, cf. (1.224). Let us then define the Poincar6 mapping 7~ 9 X ~ X" (u ~ w ~ ~ (u(., r), w(., r)). (ii) We claim that for any sequence {(U~ wOn)}in X and any (u ~ w ~ ~ X, if u 0n ~
uo
weakly in V,
w0 n --+ w 0
weakly in H,
then, setting (Un(', r), Wn(', r)) := ~D(U0, WOn)and (u(., T), w(-, T)) "- 3V(u~ wO), Un(', T) --~ u(., T)
weakly in V,
Wn (',
T) --+ w(-, T)
weakly in H.
After the final statement of Theorem 1.9.1, the uniform estimates that we derived in the proof of that theorem apply to the sequences {Un} and {Wn}. Moreover, as (1.255) entails the Lipschitz-continuity of ~-, the uniform boundedness of {Un} in Hi(0, T; H) yields the same property for {Wn}. The stated convergences then follow. (iii) Let z,, z* ~ V be such that Az,
- f, ,
Az* = f*
in V'.
Then (z,, 7r(Z,)) ((Z*, 7s respectively) is a (constant in time) solution of Problem 1.9.1 associated with the source term f, (f*, respectively). By the monotonicity of A -1, (1.257) entails that z, ~z*
a.e. in f~.
(1.260)
(iv) We claim that the sequences {TJn(z,, ~/r(Z,))} and {7~n(z*, ~/s are respectively nondecreasing and nonincreasing in V x H, and are bounded in that space. Moreover,
(Z,, 7r(Z,)) ~ "Pn(z,, 7r(Z,)) "< ~Dn(z*, 7e(Z*)) ~ (Z*, 7g(Z*)) Yn.
(1.261)
In order to prove this statement, let us set (u,, w,) "- S(z,, 7r(Z,)) and (u*, w*) "- S ( z * , ?e(z*)). By (1.257), (1.260) and Theorem 1.9.2,
(Z,, 7r(Z,)) ~ (U,(., Z), w,(., Z)) -" 7J(z,, 7r(Z,)) _ (u*(., T), w*(., T)) - . 7J(z*, ~e(Z*)) ~_ (z*, ~(z*)).
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
88
By applying the operator S to all these terms, by Theorem 1.9.2 we get
7~(Z,, ~r(Z,)) -< ~D2(Z,, 7r(Z,)) ~ ... ~ "Pn(z,, ~r(Z,)) -<... -< 7Jn(z *, ~fg(Z*)) ~ ... -< "JD2(Z*, 7s -~ "JD(Z*, ~fs i.e., (1.261).
(v) By the final part of Theorem 1.9.1 the sequences {T'n(z,, 7r(Z,))} and {T'n(z*, 7r are bounded in V x H. Therefore there exist (u ~ w~ (u ~ w ~ ~ X such that
0 ~Dn(Z*, 7r "]Pn(z,, ~/r(Z,)) ~ (UO, W,),
~ (U0* , W0*)
weakly in V xH.
By (1.261 ) then
0`
=
0`
0,, w0, =
0,, w0,
The solutions (u,, w,) and (u*, w*) of Problem 1.9.1, that respectively correspond to the initial data (u ~ w ~ and (u ~ w~ are then respectively minimal and maximal solutions of Problem 1.9.2 in the sense of (1.258). The boundedness of the initial data finally entails the regularity (1.259). [] 1.9.5 A N EQUATION WITH HYSTERESIS IN A COEFFICIENT
Let now a function k be given such that k E C~
3k(1),k(2) E R ' V ~ E R, 0 < k ( 1 ) ~ k ( ~ ) ~ k ( 2 ) .
(1.262)
We are interested into the following equation with hysteresis in a coefficient: 0~[u + .T(u)] - V. [k(.T(u)) Vu] = f
in f2r.
(1.263)
This is a simplified version of an equation we shall encounter in Secction 1.11, dealing with hysteresis in fluid flow through porous media. The analysis of (1.263) does not seem easy, and even the apparently simpler equation Ou V. [k(.T(u)) Vu] - f in f2T (1.264) ~t looks rather challenging. If the coefficient were of the form k ( u ) , one would apply the classic Kirchhoff transformation: K "u ~
U "-
fO it k(~) d~,
1.9 A QUASILINEAR PARABOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
89
so that, V- [k(u) Vu] = AU. As K is invertible, one would then replace u by U in the PDE. However, it is not clear how a Kirchhoff-type transformation might be applied whenever hysteresis occurs in the k versus u constitutive relation. We then suggest simplifying the problem as follows, by inserting a regularizing rate-dependent memory effect. We fix a kernel q~ such that
~ CI(RN),
q~>0, fRN q~(~)ds~ = 1,
(1.265)
denote the space convolution by
vx
(f,q~)(x) "--/RNf(x -- y)q~(y) dy
R N, vd e C oc(RN),
and deal with the regularized equation 0
a--~[U4- .T(U)]- V. [k(.7(u),qo) Vu] - f
in ~T.
(1.266)
(In the convolution, functions defined in f2T will automatically be extended with vanishing value outside f2T.) For any g ~ L~(f2), let us define the linear and continuous operator Ag 9 V --+ V t by
(Agu, v) "-/c~ gVu. Vv dx
PROBLEM1.9.3. Find u 9 {2 ~ C~ and, setting
Vu, v e V .
T]) measurable such that u
w(x, t ) " - [Z'(u(x, .), w~
~
u ~ [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f2,
g "- k(~(u),q~)
a.e. in fiT,
L2(0, T; V) (1.267) (1.268)
w E L2(0, T; H), u 4- w ~ Hi(0, T; V'), and
c~t(u + w) 4- Agu - f
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[,
(1.269)
in V'.
(1.270)
(u 4- w)lt=0 - u 0 4- w 0
THEOREM1.9.6 (Existence). Assume that the hypotheses of Theorem 1.9.1 arefulfilled, as well as (1.262) and (1.265). Then Problem 1.9.3 has a solution such that (1.224) holds.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
90
Outline of the Proof. This argument is partially analogous to that of Theorem 1.9.1; here we just illustrate the main differences. In the approximate problem here we set gnm := k(wnm,cp)
a.e. in f2, for n = 1 ...... m,
(1.271)
and replace (1.227) by
n _ n-1
Urn
n_
Um
n-1
+win
h
Wm h
+ A(gn-1) Urn n = fn
inV',forn=l
... m.
'
'
(1.272) Existence of a solution {un}n=] .....m can then be proved step by step via the argument that we used for Problem 1.9.1m. In order to derive a priori estimates, let us multiply equation (1.272) by (unto _.umn-l~]/,y,m,.~n-1(E V), and sum for n = 1 ...... s for any s ~ {1 ..... m}. As
d ll, (o
(wn
IlVgn-111L~(n)N
~k(2) I[VcpI[cI(RN)~C4
u
we have
n
n-1
n Um -- Um (a(gn-1) Um, gn- 1 ) =
ffl
gnm-1
= If2 Vu n . v ( u n m - u n-1 m )dx-
n
Vu n . V
dx
gn-] ( unm-umn-X ) d x If2 vun" vgn-1
c4 (ivunl 2 -iVumn-1 I2) dx- k-G
x
n-1
Um -- Um gn- 1
n n-1 IvunI turn--Urn tax;
moreover, as abaca 2 + (4c) -1 b2 for any a, b, c ~ R (c ~: 0),
n n-1 f 2 h um - um C4 ff2 [run[ lUm-U m I dx~ C2hk(2) k~l) j Ivunl "'" dx+.-v--~K(2) ffli n h n-l] 2 dx.
ko)
By the equation (1.272) we then get
h ~jf2] k(2) n=l
n -- Um n-112 dx + 1 ff 2 (IVu~I 2 - i U02) Um I dx h
< C2hk(2)(k(1)) 2 ~ff2
s
n=l
+hY-~ v,{fn, u nm - U mn-1 )v.
n=l
h
~~f2 [vunl 2 dx + 4-~(2) n=X
i Um n - hUm n-l12 dx
(1.273)
1.10 A QUASILINEAR HYPERBOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
91
The latter term can be estimated similarly to (1.229); a standard calculation based on the Gronwall lemma then yields an a priori estimate like (1.230). The remainder follows as in the proof of Theorem 1.9.1. [] A similar result holds if in (1.268) the convolution in space is replaced by a convolution in time, cf. Section 1.11.
A Semilinear Parabolic Equation with Hysteresis Results are also known for initial- and boundary-value problems governed by semilinear equations like
0u cgt
Au + ~V(u) = f
in f2T.
(1.274)
If the hysteresis operator ~" is Lipschitz-continuous in C O([0, T]), existence and uniqueness can be proved via the contraction mapping principle, without assuming any monotonicity property just as it is natural for semilinear equations [8; Chapter X]. The asymptotic behavior as t --~ +cx~ can also be studied by means of classic techniques.
Parabolic Equations with Discontinuous Hysteresis Several results of this section can be extended to quasilinear and semilinear parabolic equations like (1.215) and (1.274) with a discontinuous hysteresis operator ~. In this case one of the main difficulties stays in the formulation of the operator ~- itself. For the relay and Preisach operators, this can be achieved via the approach of Section 1.4 (cf. the weak formulation (1.75)-(1.77)); in Section 1.10 we shall apply this approach to a quasilinear hyperbolic equation of the second order. For continuous Preisach operators one can then use either the formulation in terms of hysteresis operators, or the latter one.
1.10 A QUASILINEAR HYPERBOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS In this section we deal with an initial- and boundary-value problem for a quasilinear hyperbolic equation of second order that contains a hysteresis operator, Y': ~2 j [ u + ~-(u)] - au = I in n r , (1.275) [U -}- .~'(U)]t=0 -- U0 if- W0 in f2, I -- ul if-w1 ~-~ [u -}- .T(u)] t=0
inf'.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
92
If Z is replaced by a (nonlinear) superposition operator without memory, existence of a solution is only k n o w n under severe restrictions on the nonlinearity. On the other h a n d if Z is a Prandtl-Ishlinskii hysteresis operator of play-type, cf. Section 1.3, the problem can be reduced to a system of variational inequalities, and well-posedness can be proved without m u c h effort [8; Chapter VII]. Along the lines of [41], here we assume that 3v is a relay operator, cf. Section 1.4, and prove existence of a weak solution, by means of a technique that can easily be extended to (either continuous or discontinuous) Preisach operators and to more general equations as well. In this case, because of the discontinuity of the hysteresis relation, the equation (1.275)1 is the weak formulation of a free boundary problem. In fact, if w -- -}-1 a.e. in f2T, under regularity conditions the space-sets respectively characterized by w = I and w = - 1 are separated by an u n k n o w n moving front (or free
boundary). We still denote by f2 a b o u n d e d Lipschitz domain of R N, fix any T > 0, and set f2T := f2x ]0, T[. We also set F "=
., r ) d r + u 1 +
W1
in
~T,
(1.276)
so that, integrating (1.276)1 in time, we get 0 (u + w) ~t
~
A
Lt
u(. z ) d r - F ~
in
~'~T 9
(1.277)
We define the Hilbert spaces H, V, and the operator A : V ~ V I as in Section 1.9, assume that u ~ w ~ ~ H,
F ~ L2(0, T; V'),
(1.278)
and formulate an initial- and boundary-value problem for Eqn. (1.275)1. PROBLEM1.10.1. Find U ~ L2(0, T; V) A Hi(0, T; H) and w ~ L~(f2T) such that, setting u := ~U/Ot, TD,
(1.279)
0w ~ co (f2T) t , 0t
(1.280)
U = 0
a.e. in (f2 x {0}) U (r
Iwl~l
a.e. in f2T,
LT
II
((u~ - u + w ~ - w)-77 vtOv+ V U. V v ) d x d r =
d d f2 T \
Vv E Hi(0, T; H) N L2(0, T; V), v(., T) - 0,
(F, v ) d r
(1.281)
93
1.10 A QUASILINEAR HYPERBOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS (w- 1)(u- p2)~0 (w + 1)(u - pl)~0
12In [u(x, t) 2 -
U0(X)2 q-
a.e. in ~~T,
(1.282)
IVU(x, t)[ 2] dx + I n tPP(W(X' ")' [0, t]) (1.283)
L{f , u) dr
<~
for a.a. t e]O, r[.
Interpretation Eqn. (1.281) entails
to~(u + w) + A U - F
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[.
(1.284)
By differentiating in time and setting f := OF/Ot we get (1.275)1; by integrating in time the latter and comparing with (1.281), the initial condition (1.275)2 is also derived in the sense of traces of H 1(0, T; VI). Whenever u ~ L2(0, T; V), we can multiply (1.284) by u = OU/Ot, and integrate in space and time; it is easy to see that (1.283) then reads L t(~(~--~(u + w), u) dr.~/~lln[u(x, t) 2 - u~
+fh~p(W, [0, t])
for a.a. t ~]0, T[. (1.285) This inequality is meaningful, but this derivation is rigorous only if u L2(0, T; V), and this regularity property is far from being obvious for Problem 1.10.1. (1.283) may then be regarded as a weak formulation of the dissipation condition (1.76) (i.e. (1.74)) a.e. in f~. On the other hand, the system (1.282) is equivalent to the confinement condition (1.75) (i.e. (1.73)) a.e. in f~T. In Section 1.4 we saw that (1.75), (1.76) and the initial condition (1.72) (here rewritten with w~ in place of ~) are equivalent to the hysteresis relation
w ~ kp(u, w ~
a.e. in f~.
(1.286)
We conclude that Problem 1.10.1 is the weak formulation of an initialand boundary-value problem associated to the system (1.284), (1.286). Notice that the second order equation (1.275)1 may equivalently be replaced by a system of two first-order equations, with unchanged results.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
94
Applications For N - 1, Problem 1.10.1 can represent processes in a univariate insulating ferrimagnetic material; these materials are actually characterized by a rectangular hysteresis loop. The equation (1.275)1 can be derived from the Maxwell equations, assuming that the displacement field D is proportional to the electric field E, that there is no electric current, i.e. J = 0. The magnetic field H and the magnetization field M are here denoted by u and w, respectively. This model can also be extended to univariate conducting ferromagnetic materials; in this case the Ohm law yields J = r~E, and a term proportional to O(u + w)/Ot must be inserted on the left side of (1.275)1; this corresponds to occurrence of a term proportional to u + w in the timeintegrated equation (1.284). Displaying coefficients the equation reads ~2 u
~_---~(u 0t z~2 + w) + 4~r~~t (u + w) - c2
cgx2
= prescribed field
inST. (1.287)
The electric conductivity cr is so large that (denoting the dielectric constant by 5) the term ~c92B/cgt2 is not dominated by rrcgB/cgtonly for rapidly variable fields (i.e., high frequencies). Problem 1.10.1 can also represent evolution in a univariate insulating ferroelectric material; in this case u and w represent the electric field E and the polarization field P, respectively. As we already pointed out for equation (1.275)1, this does not apply to N > 1, for in that case u and w are vector variables, and the operator - A should be replaced by curl 2. THEOREM1.10.1 (141]). Let (1.278) befulfilled, and F = F1 q- F2,
F1 ~ L 1(0, T; H),
F2 E W 1'1(0, T; V').
(1.288)
Then Problem 1.10.1 has a solution (U, w) such that U E W l'cx~(0, T; H) N L~(0, T; V).
(1.289)
PROOF.
(i) Approximation. Let us fix any m ~ N and set h := T/m, 1 /nh
F~m(X) "-- -h Fn .=
FI(X, t)dt for a.a. x ~ f2,
(n-1)h n F~m q- Faro, u 0 := u 0,
WO :__ w 0,
F~m := F2 (nh), for n - 1 ..... m, (1.290)
1.10 A QUASILINEAR HYPERBOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS
95
1 I.................................. ,
FIGURE 1.18 Graph of the multivalued function G,(., ~) for a fixed ~ ~ [-1, 1].
G, (v, ~) " -
{-1}
ifv
[--1, ~]
if
{~}
if/91 < v 9 2
[~, 1]
if
{1}
if v > P2
<
/91
V = /91
u
~) E R x [ - 1 , 1], (1.291)
V - - /9 2
cf. Fig. 1.18. Let us define time-interpolate functions as in (1.188).
PROBLEM1.10.1m. F i n d u Ylm
11
E V a n d w m E H (n = 1 . . . . . m ) s u c h that, f o r a n y n,
tl
w m E G , ( u n , w nm- 1 )
n
n-1
u m - l~m
h
n
+
n-1
wm ~ wm
h
a.e. in f2,
(1.292)
n + h ~
AuJm = F n
(1.293)
in V ' .
j=l
Existence of an approximate solution can easily be p r o v e d step b y step, as G p is maximal monotone. (ii) A Priori E s t i m a t e s . Let us multiply the equation (1.293) b y h u n , and s u m 1/
9
for n - 1 ..... s for any s ~ {1 ..... m}. Setting U n := h ~ UJm a.e. in fl for j=l
96
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
n = 1 ..... m, by (1.291) we get
1 /f~ [(U~)2
(U0)2 q-IKTGI2 ] dx q-/D
2
t[Ip(Wm
[0 s
<~h y ~ ( f n, unm)~IIFIIILI(O,T;H) max Ilun lls n=O..... n--1 q-21]F211WI,I(O,T;V,) max IlunlIv fors 1 ..... m. n=0 .....s
(1.294)
A simple calculation then yields
]]Um lIWI,oo(O,T;H)C3Loo(O,T;V) , Iltrffp(Wm, [0, t]) ]]L~(O,T;LI(f2)) constant (independent of m).
(1.295)
(iii) Limit Procedure. By the above estimates, there exist U, w such that, as m ~ ~ along a suitable sequence, Urn --* U
weakly star in W 1'~176 (0, T; H) (~ L~ (0, T; V),
W
Wm ~ ~Wm
8t
~W
-+ ~ 8t
weakly star in Le~(~T),
(1.296) (1.297)
weakly star in CO(~VV)'.
(1.298)
Setting Um := ~t fim(', z)dz a.e. in f2T, (1.293) and (1.294) also read
~(um + win) + AUra =Fm t8
•
[fire(x, t) 2 - u~
Jr2
[(F-m, um)dz
in V', a.e. in ]0, T[,
f
2 q-]Vfim(X, t)I2]dx + f ~ p ( W m ,
(1.299)
[0, t])dx
JD
(1.300)
for a.a. t ~]0, T[;
Jo
by passing to the limit in (1.299) and to the inferior limit in (1.300), we then get (1.281) and (1.283). Finally, (1.292) entails
fff2 fff2
(Wm --
1) (fim --/92) qg(X, t) dxdt~0
T
T
v~o ~/~(~T), ~o~0, (Wm q- 1)
(1.301)
(fire --/91) ~(X, t) d x d t ) 0
and (1.296)-(1.298) allow one to pass to the limit in these inequalities, because of the following lemma. []
1.10 A QUASILINEAR HYPERBOLIC PDE WITH HYSTERESIS LEMMA1.10.2 (141]). If tWO sequences
Um -+ U Wm ~ w
{Um},
97
{Wm} are such that
weakly in L2(~T) A H-l(0, T; V), weakly star in L ~ ( ~ T ) ,
(1.302)
II t ~ w m
Kconstant, ---~-- ]1LI(~T)
then l/f)
UmWm T
dxdt ~ / 1 ~ uw dxdt.
(1.303)
T
This statement can be proved via Banach-space interpolation [41]. The convergence (1.298) stems from regularizing properties of the relay operator we met in Section 1.4; this plays a key role in the proof of the above existence result, which indeed has no analog for quasilinear hyperbolic equations without hysteresis. Equation (1.275)1 turns out to be one of the few known examples in which analysis is made easier by occurrence of hysteresis. Uniqueness of the solution of Problem 1.10.1 is an open question. Extensions
Problem 1.10.1 and Theorem 1.10.1 can be extended into two main directions: (i) the relay operator can be replaced by the either continuous or discontinuous Preisach model, (ii) one can deal with the vector setting, i.e., with u and w ranging in RN.
The first extension can be pursued without much effort [8]. As for the second one, we already mentioned that processes in insulating ferrimagnetic materials fit into the above picture. Assuming that the field D is proportional to E, the Maxwell system yields an equation of the form c92
c~t2 (/2/q_/VI) q- curl2/?/i
(1.304)
(here written with normalized coefficients). The relation between ]~I and/?/ can be represented by a vector extension of the relay operator, we illustrated in Section 1.4 [45,48,49]; an initial- and boundary-value problem can be formulated in the framework of Sobolev spaces, and existence of a solution can be proved [99]. A different approach to quasilinear hyperbolic equations with hysteresis in a single dimension of space was used by Krej~i in a series of papers,
98
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
see [26,5; Chapters III,IV] and references therein. Assuming the convexity of hysteresis loops and exploiting the dissipativity properties of hysteresis, he derived results of existence and uniqueness of the solution, decay as t --, +cx~, stability and asymptotic stability, and the existence of periodic solutions. On top of all this, he also studied the Riemann problem in detail.
1.11 H Y S T E R E S I S I N P O R O U S - M E D I A
FILTRATION
In this section we illustrate hysteresis in unsaturated flow through porous media, and formulate a relation between saturation and pressure that accounts for rate-dependent decay towards the hysteresis relation. We then illustrate how existence of a solution can be proved for a boundary- and initial-value problem, in which that relation is coupled with the law of mass conservation and Darcy's law; we refer to [100,120] for details.
Filtration Without Hysteresis Unsaturated fluid flow through porous media is relevant for engineering, and has been treated in a large technical literature, cf. e.g. the monographs [101-104]. If no unsaturated flow occurs, the wet and dry regions are in contact along an a priori unknown surface (the phreatic surface). This free boundary problem was studied in a number of mathematical papers, after Baiocchi formulated it as a variational inequality and proved its wellposedness in 1972; see e.g. [105-107], the monograph [108] and references therein. As an alternative, by an approach that was proposed and studied by W. Alt, one can deal with partially saturated flow [109-112]. Quantitatively relevant hysteresis effects occur in fluid flow through porous media [101-104,113]. It seems that Poulovassilis was the first one to apply the Preisach model (under the denomination of independent domain model) to represent hysteresis in the dependence of saturation on pressure [114-116]; Muhalem then assumed a specific form of the Preisach density [117,118]. Apparently these hysteresis effects have not (yet) received much attention by mathematicians; as far as this author knows, the functional approach based on the notion of hysteresis operator has been applied only recently and in few papers [14,100,113,119]. Let a domain f2 of R 3 represent a region occupied by a porous medium in communication with one or more nonstationary water reservoirs, cf. Fig. 1.19; let us fix any T > 0, and set ~T :-- ~X ]0, T[. Let us denote the saturation of the medium by s, its hydraulic conductivity by k, its porosity by ~a, the pressure of the fluid (water, say) by u, its flux per unit area by ~, its mass density by p, the gravity acceleration by g,
1.11 HYSTERESIS IN POROUS-MEDIA FILTRATION
99
!
FIGURE 1.19 A porous dam, with two reservoirs and an impervious bottom. and the vertical coordinate by z. The equation of mass conservation and the Darcy law respectively read
~s q~-~ + V. ~ - 0
in ~'~T (V. "--div),
7] = - k V ( u + pgz)
(1.305)
in f2T;
(1.306)
by eliminating the field ~ we then get
~s q~0t
V. [kV(u + pgz)] = 0
in f2T.
(1.307)
(For some phenomena it is possible to neglect the gravitation term; for instance this applied to two-phase flow of two immiscible fluids of comparable densities.) For a homogeneous m e d i u m without hysteresis, s and u are related by a constitutive law of the form
s(x, t) e fl(u(x, t))
V(x, t) e f2T,
(1.308)
where fl" R ~ [0, 1] is a (possibly multivalued) maximal monotone function, cf. Fig. 1.20. For instance, if fl equals the Heaviside graph
H(u):={O}
if u < 0 ,
H(0) "= [0,1],
H(u):={1}
if u > 0 ,
then (1.307) and (1.308) represent unsaturated flow. In this case both (1.305) and (1.307) should be understood in the sense of distributions, and they are the weak formulation of a free boundary problem.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
100
$
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIGURE 1.20
Saturation versus pressure constitutive relation without hysteresis. kA
! -
^
1
$
k.. v
$
FIGURE 1.21 Hydraulic conductivity versus saturation constitutive relation. The hydraulic conductivity can be represented as a nonnegative, nondecreasing function of saturation, cf. Fig. 1.21"
k(x, t) - h(s(x, t))
u
t) ~ ~T;
(1.309)
k is then a (possibly multivalued) function of pressure: k ~ h(fl(u)). Suitable boundary conditions must be appended to equation (1.307); these include a no-flux condition on the impervious part of the boundary, and a Signorini-type (i.e., obstacle-type) condition on the part of the boundary that is in contact with the atmosphere; this also accounts for occurrence of overflow along a so-called seepage face. An initial condition must also be prescribed for s. A problem in the framework of Sobolev spaces can then be formulated for the system (1.307)-(1.309), and can be coupled with these initial and boundary conditions; existence of a solution was proved in [112].
1.11 HYSTERESIS IN POROUS-MEDIA FILTRATION
101
Filtration With Hysteresis The constitutive relation (1.308) is oversimplified: porous media exhibit quantitatively relevant hysteresis effects, cf. Fig. 1.22. Laboratory measurements actually indicate that at any point x ~ f2 and any instant t, the saturation s(x, t) depends not only on the pressure u(x, t), but also on the previous evolution of u at the same point, u(x, .), and on the initial value s o (x); moreover this dependence is rate-independent. Accordingly, in place of the constitutive relation (1.308) we consider a relation of the form s(t) - [3r(u, s~
u ~ [0, T];
(1.310)
here ~" is a hysteresis operator, that we assume to be continuous in C o ([0, T]) x R. (More generally, one might assume that 3v is the s u m of a hysteresis operator and a possibly multivalued maximal monotone graph [100].) Whenever this constitutive relation is coupled with the PDE (1.307), one must account for dependence on the space variable, x ~ f2; here we assume that x occurs just as a parameter: s(x, t) - [3r(u(x,-), s~
u ~ [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f2.
(1.311)
This excludes any space interaction in the constitutive relation. By (1.309), hysteresis in the s versus u dependence entails occurrence of hysteresis in the k versus u relation. (1.307) can then be labeled as a PDE with hysteresis in a coefficient; the analysis of equations of this type often exhibits difficulties, cf. Section 1.9.
i
FIGURE 1.22 Saturation versus pressure constitutive relation with hysteresis.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
102
The Issue of Existence To prove the existence of a solution for the corresponding initial- and boundary-value problem does not seem an easy task. Following a standard procedure one might approximate this problem, derive a priori estimates, and then try to pass to the limit. Because of the occurrence of a memory operator, it seems especially convenient to use time-discretization. Let us denote the approximation parameter by m ~ N, and the approximate solution by (Um, Sm). Uniform estimates for Um in L2(0, T; Hi(f2)) can easily be derived by multiplying the approximate equation by urn, and then integrating with respect to space and time. This yields existence of a weakly convergent subsequence, but does not grant convergence of any subsequence of Um in C~ T]) a.e. in f2, and thus does not suffice to pass to the limit in the memory operator. In order to derive stronger a priori estimates, one might try to multiply the approximate equation by CgUm/cgt,and again integrate with respect to space and time. But then difficulties arise in dealing with the elliptic term. Whenever the dependence of s on u is without memory, of the form s = fl(u) with fl continuous and nondecreasing, say, one can apply the classic Kirchhoff transformation: / C ' u ~ w :=
~0u
h(fl(~)) d~,
(1.312)
so that
h(fl(u))Vu = Vw
a.e. in ~T,
V.[h(fl(u))Vu] = Aw
in/~)'(~'2T).
As h and fl are nondecreasing,/C is a (possibly multivalued) maximal monotone operator; hence S = fl(U) E (~ o
K~-I)(w)
a.e. in ~T,
and one can couple this relation with the equation
~S
q~-ato
Aw -- 0
in ~' (~T).
(1.313)
This procedure was used in [112] to prove existence of a solution for the problem without hysteresis. However, it is not clear how the transformation (1.312) might be extended in the presence of hysteresis in the s versus u relation.
1.11 HYSTERESIS IN POROUS-MEDIA FILTRATION
103
A Rate-dependent Correction The above difficulties induce us to amend the model. First we do so by inserting a rate-dependent correction into the memory relation. Although we are not able to derive any uniform estimate on the pressure rate, we conjecture that this rate should not be too large, even on the (rather slow) time-scale of filtration phenomena. Along the lines of [100] we then propose inserting a term which penalizes high pressure rates into the s versus u constitutive relation. In this way we account for a rate-dependent component of memory, aside hysteresis. Let us assume that the hysteresis operator F is piecewise monotone in the sense of (1.10); we can then invert it, and write (1.311) in the equivalent form u(t) = [G(s, u~ u ~ [0, T], . _ .fi--1 being also a hysteresis operator. (Some specifications should be made as for the initial data u ~ and s~ but here we omit these details.) We then append a time-relaxation term, and write the constitutive relation in the form
u(t) = [G(s, u~
ds + a~-~(t) =: [~(s, u~ (t)
u ~ [0, T],
(1.314)
where a is a (small) positive constant. Under natural assumptions, the rate-dependent operator ~a(-, u ~ maps Hi(0, T) to L2(0, T). If G(', u ~ is continuous in C~ T]), then G~ is sequentially weakly continuous: for any sequence {Sn} in Hi(0, T), Sn --+ S
weakly in H 1(0,
G~(Sn, u O) ~
T) :=~ ~a(s, u 0) weakly in L2(0, T).
(1.315)
The operator G~ can then be extended to the above space-distributed problem by inserting the dependence on the parameter x:
u(x, t) - [~(s(x, .), u~
~s
+ ~ ( x , t)
Vt ~ [0, T], for a.a. x ~ f~. (1.316)
Estimation Procedure Multiplying (1.316) by cgs/c3t and integrating in time we have
/o -~u
=
/ot -~Os[G(s(.), u~
dt +
2dt
Vt e]O, T].
104
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
If G is the inverse of a Preisach-type operator, we get an estimate of the form f0 ~ ~-~U ~S d t ~ O ( s ( t ) ) - O(s 0) + ~F(slI0,~[) dt + 0of0~ [~-tl ~S 2 dt
u ~]0, T];
here (I) and ~F depend on the operator ~ = y - l ; (I) is a potential function, and (loosely speaking) ~F(sl]0,~[) measures the total variation of s in the interval ]0, t[, cf. (1.77). Let us now discretize the equation (1.307) in time, with time-step T / m (m ~ N), and denote the corresponding solution by (urn, sin). By means of the latter inequality, multiplying the discretized equation by Um and integrating with respect to space and time, one easily derives uniform estimates of the form
[]Um]IL2(O,T;HI(~)),[[SmI[Hl(O,T;L2(~))~constant(independent
of m). (1.317)
Moreover, assuming that the hysteresis operator ~(., u ~ is Lipschitzcontinuous in C~ T]), by means of (1.316) and of the uniform estimate on urn, one can derive a uniform estimate for Sm in H 1(0, T; L2(~)) [100]. By these estimates, weak convergence follows for suitable subsequences. The regularity properties of the operator G allow one to pass to the limit in the time-discretized version of (1.316), and thus to prove existence of a weak solution. It would then be natural to consider the behavior of the solution of our problem as the relaxation parameter a vanishes; but, as may be expected, in this limit one encounters the same difficulties that we pointed out for the purely hysteretic constitutive relation.
A Different Approach As an alternative to the modification of the s versus u relation we just outlined, the analytic difficulties we pointed out for the system (1.307), (1.309), (1.310) can be overcome by regularizing the k versus s dependence. More specifically, let us fix a positive and decreasing function p ~ C 1(R +) such that fR+ p(z) dr -- 1 (e.g., p(z) := ae -a~ for any z~0, for some a > 0), extend s with vanishing value for negative times, and set (s,p)(x, t) " - / R + s(x, t -- z)p(r) dr
for a.a. (x, t) ~ f2Z, u ~ Ll(f2z); (1.318)
we then replace (1.309) by k = h(s, p)
a.e. in ff/T.
(1.319)
1.12 CONCLUSIONS
105
As we remarked above, in order to pass to the limit in the hysteresis term it may be convenient to derive a priori estimates by multiplying the approximate equation by OUm/cgtand integrating in time. By doing so one encounters the term ~dt
F~dtJ~ F ---~-IVUml cgkm d~ ~ kmVum.Vt~Um Ot dx = --21 Jo 2 dx
l~(km(x, t)lVUm(X, t)l 2 - kin(x, 0 ) I V u ~
2) dx;
if one can show that Sm~ constant > ~, then km is larger than a positive constant, cf. Fig. 1.21; moreover (this is the key point)
~<max [0,1]
Ih'l sup Io'l -- constant (independent of m). R+
This allows one to complete the estimate procedure, and then to prove the existence of a solution for the continuous problem [120]. In this framework one can also prove that the solution is asymptotically stable; that is, if as t ~ +cx~ the level of the reservoirs converges, then the solution (u, s) also converges to a solution of the limit stationary problem. One can also show that as the hysteresis operator degenerates into a superposition operator, the solution of the hysteresis problem tends to that of the problem without hysteresis. 1.12 C O N C L U S I O N S We have dealt with mathematical models of hysteresis, and applied them to problems arising in continuum mechanics, in ferromagnetism, and in filtration through porous media. This survey has partly reviewed the developments of [8]; this applies especially to Sections 1.1-1.3. Novelties with respect to the author's 1994 monograph include the following issues: (i) the concept of the hysteresis relation, as an alternative to that of the hysteresis operator (Section 1.1); (ii) the formulation via a single variational inequality of a model of elasto-plasticity with strain-hardening with no internal variable (final part of Section 1.3); (iii) the modification of the classic Landau-Lifshitz equation of micromagnetism, and the formulation of a rate-independent mesoscopic model of ferromagnetism, after [61] (Section 1.5);
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
106
(iv) the two-scale approach for the Prandtl-Ishlinskii and Preisach models, based on the homogenization viewpoint (Section 1.6); (v) an answer to the question of the origin of differential equations with hysteresis, after [97] (Section 1.7); (vi) the classification of PDEs with hysteresis (beginning of Section
1.8); (vii) the proof of the existence of minimal and maximal solutions of the quasilinear parabolic problem with hysteresis, after [98], and the study of an equation with hysteresis in a coefficient (Section 1.9); (viii) the proof of the existence of a solution for a second order, quasilinear, hyperbolic equation with discontinuous hysteresis, after [41] (Section 1.10); (ix) the study of hysteresis in porous-media filtration, via a ratedependent correction of the hysteresis relation, after [100,120] (Section 1.11). The mathematical analysis of hysteresis and of related PDEs offers many open questions to the researcher. One of the most evident is that so far only a few basic models of hysteresis have been discovered and studied. Confining ourselves to the scalar setting, we encounter the Duhem model and the somehow related Bouc model (the latter still demands analytic investigation); the stop, the play and the Prandtl-Ishlinskii models; the relay and Preisach models. Then there are the vector extensions of these models, besides the typical vector constructions like the Landau-Lifshitz equation and its modified version we outlined in Section 1.5. Relevant issues like the identification of hysteresis operators, their classification on the basis of structural criteria, and others, are still largely open. On the other hand, so far only few hysteresis phenomena have been studied in some detail: elasto-plasticity, ferromagnetism, undercooling and superheating, shape memory, damage and fatigue, superconductivity, and not many others. The analysis of further phenomena, or the formulation of new viewpoints for known ones, may be expected to offer a source of new models, as has already happened in the past. In any case even the analysis of the above outlined models of elastoplasticity, ferromagnetism and hysteresis in porous-medium filtration is far from complete; this especially applies to the latter. The study of these phenomena should be enriched, e.g., with the analysis of the asymptotic behavior as t --, + ~ , of their control, and especially with their numerical analysis. Most of the developments we have reviewed above were based on Krasnosel'skii's notion of the hysteresis operator; alternative approaches have been considered in Sections 1.4, 1.5 and 1.10, and look promising for future research.
1.13 APPENDIX. ELEMENTS OF CONVEX CALCULUS
107
In recent years a different approach to hysteresis has been proposed by Mielke, Theil, Levitas and other researchers, see e.g. [121-125], to model hysteresis in quasistatic evolution; that approach does not involve hysteresis operators, and is based on coupling the energy balance with a stability condition. A similar formulation has also been applied to model fracture dynamics by Francfort, Marigo, Dal Maso, Toader and others, see e.g. [126,127]. There are similarities between this model and the formulation of the relay operator of (1.79) and (1.80) above. This method looks capable of providing a rather general framework for hysteresis, and indeed applies to a large number of phenomena, although so far it has just been used to represent quasistatic evolution.
1.13 APPENDIX. ELEMENTS OF CONVEX CALCULUS In this Appendix we review some properties of convex, lower semicontinuous functions, the Legendre-Fenchel transformation, and the notions of subdifferential, of Gateaux differential, of support function, and of variational inequality. Infinite dimensional spaces are a natural environment for this theory, especially in view of application to the analysis of PDEs; nevertheless here we deal with the Euclidean space R N, we denote by B. The finite dimensional setting indeed suffices for grasping almost all of the results of convex calculus we use in this survey; moreover it is slightly simpler, and may be closer to the interests of nonmathematical readers. Dealing with R N, we might identify the dual of B (that we denote by B*) with B; but we refrain from doing so, in order to help the reader in distinguishing the different roles these two spaces play. Anyway we shall identify B**, the bidual of B, with B. 1.13.1 CONVEX AND LOWER SEMICONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS
We denote the extended real line R U {+c~} by R. For any function F 9 B --, I~, we set Dom(F) := {v E B : F(v) < +cx~} : (effective) domain of F, epi(F) := {(v, a) e
BxR:F(v)<,a} :epigraph ofF.
(A.1) (A.2)
For any set K c B, we also define its indicator function:
I~'B~
f~'v~--, ! 0 ! +cx~
ifveK ifv ~K.
(A.3)
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
108
The use of these functions is especially convenient for m i n i m i z a t i o n problems, for this allows reduction of constrained p r o b l e m s to u n c o n s t r a i n e d ones. In fact, for a n y function F 9 B ~ R and a n y set K c B,
u = inf F K
4:~
u = inf (F + IK). B
(A.4)
A set K C B is said to be convex if ,~Vl q- (1 - ,~)V2 E K
Vvl, V2 E K, u
~ ]0, 1[.
By convention, the e m p t y set is also included a m o n g the convex sets. A function F 9 B ~ R is said to be convex w h e n e v e r F (,~Vl -}- (1 - ,~)v2) ~,~F(Vl)+(1-2)F(v2)
u
v2 ~ B, u
~]0, 1[. (A.5)
If the inequality (A.5) is strict for a n y Vl ~ V2, the function F is said to be strictly convex. A function F 9 B ~ I~ is said to be lower s e m i c o n t i n u o u s if for a n y a ~ R the set {v ~ B 9 F(v)Ka} is closed. F is said to be p r o p e r if F(B) is not identically equal to +cx~. PROPOSITIONA.1. (i) A function F 9 B ~
R is convex (lower semicontinuous, respectively) if and only if epi(F) is convex (closed, respectively). (ii) A set K c B is convex (closed, respectively) if and only if IK is convex (lower semicontinuous, respectively). PROPOSITIONA.2. (i) If {Fi " B --+ R}iEI is a family of convex (lower semicontinuous, respectively)functions, then their upper hull F : v ~ suPi~i Fi(v) is convex (lower semicontinuous, respectively). (ii) If {Ki}i~i is a family of convex (closed, respectively) subsets of B, then their intersection Ni~IK i is convex (closed, respectively). Let us denote b y F(B) the class of functions F 9 B ~ I~ that are the u p p e r hull of a family of affine functions B --, R. PROPOSITIONA.3. F(B) consists of the class F0(B) of convex, lower semicontinu-
ous, proper functions, and of the function identically equal to + ~ . For a n y set K c B, the smallest convex and closed subset of B that contains K is convex a n d closed. It is n a m e d the closed convex hull of K, a n d is d e n o t e d by ~--6(K). Similarly, let us consider a n y function F : B --,] - cx~, +cx~] w h i c h has a convex lower bound. (This a s s u m p t i o n allows one to exclude e.g. the
1.13 APPENDIX. ELEMENTS OF CONVEX CALCULUS
109
function x ~ -Ilxll2.) The u p p e r hull of all affine lower b o u n d s of F is convex a n d lower semicontinuous. It is the largest lower b o u n d of F in F(B), a n d is n a m e d the F-regularized function of F. Its e p i g r a p h coincides w i t h the closed convex hull of the e p i g r a p h of F.
1.13.2 THE LEGENDRE-FENCHEL TRANSFORMATION Let F 9 B ~ I~ be a p r o p e r function. The function F* 9 B* ~ I~" u* ~
sup{u*.u - F(u)}
(A.6)
uEB
is n a m e d the (convex) conjugate (or polar) function of F. If F* is proper, its conjugate function F** 9 B --~ R" u ~
sup {u*.u - F*(u*)}
(A.7)
u*~B*
is n a m e d the biconjugate (or bipolar) function of F. THEOREMA.4. For any proper F 9 B --, R such that F* is also proper, F* ~ F(B*)-
F**~F;
F** - F 4~ F ~ F(B)"
(F*)** - F*.
(A.8)
Moreover, F** coincides with the F-regularized f u n c t i o n of F (Fenchel-Moreau theorem). The conjugacy transformation F ~ F* is a bijection between F0(B) and
Fo(B*). 1.13.3 THE SUBDIFFERENTIAL Let F 9 B ~ R be proper. We define its subdifferential cgF 9 Dom(F) c B 2 B* (the p o w e r set) as follows: OF(u) " - {u* ~ B* 9 u*.(u - v ) ~ F ( u ) - F(v), Yv ~ B} Vu ~ Dom(F),
(A.9)
cf. Fig. A.1. 0F* 9 Dom(F*) C B* --~ 2 B is similarly defined: cgF*(u*) "= {u ~ B 9 u.(u* - v * ) ~ F * ( u * ) - F*(v*), Vv* E B*} Vu* ~ Dom(F*).
(A.10)
OF(u) - 0 is not excluded; in particular, w e set OF(u) := 0 for any u ~ B \ Dom(F). One can then take the subdifferential even of either n o n c o n v e x or n o n - l o w e r - s e m i c o n t i n u o u s functions at any point of their d o m a i n , cf. Fig. A.1.
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
110
u
/
(O,-F* (u*))
FIGURE A.1 The straight line represents a supporting hyperplane to the epigraph of F. It is characterized by the equation z = u*. (v - u) + F(u), or equivalently by z = u*.v - F*(u*), where u* e OF(u). THEOREMA.5. Let F 9 B --~ R. Then for any u e B and any u* 9 B*" F(u) + F*(u*)~u*.u u* e OF(u)
~
(Fenchel inequality),
F(u) + F* (u*) = u* . u u* e OF(u)
=~ u e aF*(u*),
[ F ( u ) - F**(u), u e 0F*(u*)] FeF0(B)
(Fenchel equality),
=~ u* e OF(u),
=~ 0F*=(cgF) -1.
(A.11) (A.12) (A.13) (A.14) (A.15)
The operator ~gF is monotone, that is,
(u~ - u~). (Ul - u2)~0
VUi 6 Dom(0F), Vu~ e OF(ui)(i = 1, 2). (A.16)
By (A.11), the Fenchel equality (A.12) also reads as u* e 3F(u)
4~ F(u) + F*(u*)~u*.u.
(A.17)
THEOREMA.6 (Rockafellar). Let F1, F2 9 B --~ R. Then r
4- r
C 0 (F1 4- F2) (u)
Vu e Dom(F1) 1"3Dom(F2).
(A.18)
The opposite inclusion holds if F1 and F2 are both convex and lower semicontinuous, and either F1 or F2 is continuous at some point uo e Dom(F1) A Dom(F2).
111
1.13 APPENDIX. ELEMENTS OF CONVEX CALCULUS
The latter condition cannot be dropped. As a counter example let us take B-R, FI(X) "-- 4-00
Vx < 0r
FI(X) : = - ~ / x
Vx/>0,
F2(x) "= F I ( - x )
Then (F1 + F 2 ) ( 0 ) = 0 and ( F I + F 2 ) ( x ) = +oo for a n y x cq(F1 + F2)(0) -= R, w h e r e a s c~F1(0) + c~F2(0) -- 0 4- 0 -- 0.
Vx ~ R.
~ 0; hence
PROPOSITIONA.7. Let F 9 B ~ R be convex and proper. Then F is locally Lipschitz-continuous at the interior of Dom(F), and there OF ~ 0.
1.13.4 EXAMPLES (i) The Fenchel inequality (A.11) extends the classic Young inequality: for any p ~]1, +oo[, 1 ilullP + p - 1 ilvllP/(p_])>~u, v P P
Vu v E R N"
(A.19)
the Fenchel equality (A.12) here reads 1 ilullP + p - 1 ilvllp/(p_l) P P
u v
4,
v
ullull p-2
Vu v e R N.
(A.20)
(ii) Let 1Kp < +e~ and set Fp(u) := Ilulle/p for any u ~ B. If p > 1, then c~Fp(u) = {llullP-2u} for any u ~ B. O n the other hand, for p = 1 0F](u) = {llull-lu}
Vu ~ B \ { 0 } ,
c9F1(0)= {v e B* : Ilvll~
In particular, if B := R then c3F1 -- sign, w h e r e sign(x) := {-1} ifx < 0,
sign(0) := [ - 1 , 1],
sign(x) := {1} ifx > 0. (A.22)
PROPOSITIONA.8. For any proper, convex, lower semicontinuous function F : B ~ f{, any u ~ B and any u* ~ B*, the following properties are equivalent: u* ~ OF(u),
(A.23)
u ~ OF* (u*),
(A.24)
u*.(u - v)>~F(u) - F(v)
Vv ~ B,
u.(u* - v*)~F*(u*) - F*(v*)
Vv* ~ B*,
(A.25) (A.26)
u.u* = F(u) + F* (u*),
(A.27)
u . u * ~ F ( u ) + F*(u*).
(A.28)
112
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
The equivalence between (A.23) and (A.24) follows from (A.14). The inclusions (A.23) and (A.24) are equivalent to the variational inequalities (A.25) and (A.26) by definition of 0F and 0F*, respectively. The equality (A.27) directly follows from the previous one, and (A.28) is equivalent to (A.27) because of (A.11). The next statement is just a particular case of the latter one. PROPOSITIONA.9. For any (nonempty) closed convex set K c B, any u ~ B and any u* ~ B*, the following properties are equivalent:
u ~ K, u.(u*
u* ~ CgIK(u),
(A.29)
u ~ Oil(u*),
(A.30)
u*. (u - v)~0
- v*)>I;:(u*)
u ~ K, u ~ K,
Yv ~ K,
(A.31)
u
(A.32)
- I;:(v*)
~ B*,
u.u* = I~(u*),
(A.33)
u.u*~I~(u*).
(A.34)
1.13.5 THE GATEAUX DIFFERENTIAL
A function F 9 B --~ I~ is said to be (strongly) Gateaux differentiable at u ~ Dom(F) if 3u* ~ B* : Vv ~ B,
F(u + 2v) - F ( u ) -+ u*.v 2
as2~0.
(A.35)
Such u* is necessarily unique; it is named the (strong) G~teaux differential of F at u, and is denoted by F'(u). PROPOSITIONA.10. Let F 9 B ~ R be convex, and u ~ Dom(F). If F is Gateaux differentiable at u, then OF(u) = {F'(u)}. Conversely, if OF(u) is a singleton, then it is G~teaux differentiable at u and OF(u) = {F'(u)}. PROPOSITIONA.11. Let F 9 B --~ R be G~teaux differentiable at any point of Dom(F), and the set Dom(F) be convex. Then F is convex if and only if F' is monotone; that is, if and only if [F'(ul) - F'(u2)].(Ul - u2)~0
VUl, U2 E Dom(F).
(A.36)
1.13 APPENDIX. ELEMENTS OF CONVEX CALCULUS
113
1.13.6 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS For any set K c B, the conjugate of the indicator function IK, I~(" B ~ I~" u* ~ sup u*.v,
(A.37)
vEK
is n a m e d the support function of the set K, and is also denoted by rrK. For instance, a0 =-- - c ~ and OrB =-- +oo. Assuming that all the Ki are nonempty, closed, convex subsets of B, the following formulas hold O'K1 ~O'K2
~
(7aKl+bK2 - - a(YK 1 +
K1 C K2,
bcrK2
Ya, b~O,
s u p (~Ki = (7UiKi" i
(A.38) (A.39)
(A.40)
A function B --,] - cx~, +oo] is said positively h o m o g e n e o u s of degree one (here written p h d l ) w h e n e v e r aK(2U) = 2CrK(U) for any u E B and any 2>0. PROPOSITIONA.12. For any nonempty set K* c B*, the function CrK, := I~(, is convex and phdl. Conversely, if cr 9 B --,] - cx~, +oo] is convex and phdl, then - CrK,, where K~ "- {u* ~ B* " u*.vKrr(v), Yv ~ B} (= Dom(cr*))
(A.41)
is closed, convex and nonempty. 1.13.7 CONES A n o n e m p t y set C c B is n a m e d a cone (with vertex at the origin) if 2C = C for any 2~0. For instance, any linear subspace of B is a cone. The d o m a i n of any proper p h d l function F : B --* ] - oo, +cx~] is a cone in B; the graph and the epigraph of F are cones in BxR. For any K C B and any u ~ Dom(0IK), 0IK(u) is n a m e d the normal cone to K. For any n o n e m p t y set K c B, U,~>0 2K is the smallest cone which contains K (i.e., the cone generated by K). Convex analysis has been the object of a large literature. We just quote some monographs: Aubin [128], Barbu and Precupanu [129], Borwein and Lewis [130], Castaing and Valadier [131], Ekeland and Temam [132], Hiriart-Urruty and Lemarechal [133,134], H 6 r m a n d e r [135], Ioffe and Tihomirov [136], Kusraev and Kutateladze [137], Moreau [138], Rockafellar [139,140], Rockafellar and Wets [141], Willem [142].
114
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This research was partly supported by the project 'Free boundary problems in applied sciences' of Italian M.I.U.R.
aefeTeylces
In recent years several monographs have been devoted to hysteresis; see [1,3,5,8] and [4,6,7,9] for mathematically- and physically-oriented approaches, respectively. We also mention the collective volumes [143-147], and the surveys [16,40,148-153]. 1. M. A. Krasnosel'skii and A. V. Pokrovskii, Systems with Hysteresis, Springer, Berlin (1989). (Russian edition: Nauka, Moscow 1983). 2. G. Bertotti, Hysteresis in Magnetism, Academic Press, Boston (1998). 3. M. Brokate and J. Sprekels, Hysteresis and Phase Transitions, Springer, Heidelberg (1996). 4. E. Della Torre, Magnetic Hysteresis, Wiley and IEEE Press (1999). 5. P. Krej~i, Convexity, Hysteresis and Dissipation in Hyperbolic Equations, Gakkotosho, Tokyo (1996). 6. I. D. Mayergoyz, Mathematical Models of Hysteresis, Springer, New York (1991). 7. I. D. Mayergoyz, Mathematical Models of Hysteresis and Their Applications, Elsevier, Amsterdam (2003). 8. A. Visintin, Differential Models of Hysteresis, Springer, Berlin (1994). 9. A. Iv~nyi, Hysteresis Models in Electromagnetic Computation, Akaderhiai Kiado, Budapest (1997). 10. J. D. Kraus and D. A. Fleisch, Electromagnetics, McGraw-Hill, Boston (1999). 11. R. Bouc, "Solution p6riodique de l'6quation de la ferror6sonance avec hyst6r6sis", C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6rie A 263, 497-499 (1966). 12. R. Bouc, Mod61e math6matique d'hyst6r6sis et application aux syst6mes a un degr6 de libert6, Th6se, Marseille (1969). 13. M.A. Krasnosel'ski/, B. M. Darinskii, I. V. Emelin, P. P. Zabreiko, E. A. Lifsic, and A. V. PokrovskiL 'Hysterant operator' Soviet Math. Dokl. 11, 29-33 (1970). 14. A. Beliaev, 'Homogenization of two-phase flow in porous media with hysteresis in the capillary relation', Euro. J. Applied Math. 14, 61-84 (2003).
REFERENCES
115
15. P. Duhem, The Evolution of Mechanics, Sijthoff and Noordhoff, Alphen aan den Rijn (1980). (Original edition: U6volution de la m6chanique. Joanin, Paris, 1903). 16. P. Krej~i, "Evolution variational inequalities and multidimensional hysteresis operators," in Nonlinear Differential Equations, P. Dr~bek, P. Krej~i, and P. Tak~ Eds., Chapman and Hall / CRC. Boca Raton (1999), pp. 47-110. 17. M. Hilpert, "On uniqueness for evolution problems with hysteresis," in Mathematical Models for Phase Change Problems, J.-F. Rodrigues Ed., Birkh~iuser, Basel (1989), pp. 377-388. 18. L. Prandtl, 'Ein Gedankenmodell zur kinetischen Theorie der festen K6rper', Z. Angew. Math. Mech. 8, 85-106 (1928). 19. A.Y. IshlinskiL 'Some applications of statistical methods to describing deformations of bodies', Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR, Techn. Ser. 9, 580-590 (1944) (in Russian). 20. P. Krej~i, 'Hysteresis memory preserving operators', Appl. Math. 36, 305-326 (1991). 21. A. Visintin, 'Rheological models and mesostructure', (in preparation). 22. W. Prager, An Introduction to Plasticity, Addison-Wesley, Reading (1959). 23. G. Duvaut and J. L. Lions, Les Indquations en Mdcanique et en Physique, Dunod, Paris (1972). 24. J. Ne~as and I. Hlav~i~ek, Mathematical Theory of Elastic and ElasticoPlastic Bodies: an Introduction, Elsevier, Amsterdam (1982). 25. P. Krej~i, Existence and Large Time Behavior of Solutions to Equations with Hysteresis, Publication of Math. Inst. Acad. Sci., Praha (1986). 26. P. Krej~i, 'Hysteresis and periodic solutions of semi-linear and quasilinear wave equations', Math. Z. 193, 247-264 (1986). 27. P. Krej~i, 'Periodic solutions of partial differential equations with hysteresis', in Equadiff 6, Proceedings, Brno 1985, Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1192, Springer, Berlin (1986), pp. 221-226. 28. P. Krej~i, 'Global behaviour of solutions to the wave equation with hysteresis', Adv. Math. Sci. App1.2, 1-23 (1993). 29. P. Krej~i, 'Asymptotic stability of periodic solutions to the wave equation with hysteresis', in Models of Hysteresis, A. Visintin Ed., Longman, Harlow (1993), pp. 77-90. 30. J. F. Besseling and E. Van der Giessen, Mathematical Modelling of Inelastic Deformation, Chapman and Hall, London (1994).
116
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
31. B. Halphen and J. Salencon, Elasto-Plasticitd, Paris (1987). 32. W. Han and B. D. Reddy, Plasticity, Springer, New York (1999). 33. P. Haupt, Continuum Mechanics and Theory of Materials, Springer, Berlin (2001). 34. R. Hill, The Mathematical Theory of Plasticity, Oxford University Press, London (1950). 35. J. Lemaitre and J.-L. Chaboche, Mechanics of Solid Materials, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1990). 36. J. Lubliner, Plasticity Theory, Macmillan, New York (1990). 37. W. Prager and P. G. Hodge, Theory of Perfectly Plastic Solids, Wiley, Chichester (1951). 38. J. C. Simo and T. J. R. Hughes, Computational Inelasticity, Springer, New York (1998). 39. K. Washizu, Variational Methods in Elasticity and Plasticity, Pergamon Press, Oxford (1982). 40. A. Visintin, "Six talks on hysteresis," In: Boundaries, interfaces and transitions. (M.C. Delfour, Ed.) 2nd Annual CRM Summer School held in Banff, AB, August 6-18, 1995. AMS-CRM Proceedings and Lecture Notes 13 American Math. Soc., Providence, RI, pp. 207-236 (1998). 41. A. Visintin, 'Quasi-linear hyperbolic equations with hysteresis', Ann. Inst. H. Poincar6. Analyse non lin6aire 19, 451-476 (2002). 42. A. Visintin, 'On hysteresis in elasto-plasticity and in ferromagnetism', Int. J. Nonlinear Mechanics 37, 1283-1298 (2002). 43. F. Preisach, 'Ober die magnetische Nachwirkung', Z. Physik 94, 277-302 (1935). 44. M. Brokate and A. Visintin, 'Properties of the Preisach model for hysteresis', J. Reine Angew. Math. 402, 1-40 (1989). 45. A. Damlamian and A. Visintin, 'Une g6n6ralisation vectorielle du mod61e de Preisach pour l'hyst6r6sis', C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6rie I 297, 437-440 (1983). 46. I. D. Mayergoyz and G. Friedman, 'Isotropic vector Preisach model of hysteresis', J. Appl. Phys. 61, 4022-4024 (1987). 47. I. D. Mayergoyz and G. Friedman, 'On the integral equation of the vector Preisach hysteresis model', IEEE Trans. Magn. 23, 2638-2646 (1987). 48. I. D. Mayergoyz, 'Mathematical models of hysteresis', Phys. Rev. Letters 56, 1518-1521 (1986).
REFERENCES
117
49. I. D. Mayergoyz, 'Mathematical models of hysteresis', IEEE Trans. Magn. 22, 603-608 (1986). 50. M. Brokate, 'On a characterization of the Preisach model for hysteresis', Rend. Sem. Mat. Padova 83, 153-163 (1990). 51. K . - H . Hoffmann, J. Sprekels and A. Visintin, 'Identification of hysteresis loops', J. Comp. Phys. 78, 215-230 (1988). 52. E. Della Torre, 'Effect of interaction on the magnetization of singledomain particles', IEEE Trans. on Audio 14, 86-93 (1966). 53. P. Weiss, 'Uhypoth6se du champ mol6culaire et la propri6t6 ferromagn6tique', J. Physique 6, 661-690 (1907). 54. A. Hubert and R. Sch~ifer, Magnetic Domains, Springer, Berlin (1998). 55. L. Landau and E. Lifshitz, 'On the theory of dispersion of magnetic permeability in ferromagnetic bodies', Physik. Z. Sowietunion 8, 153-169(1935). 56. W.F. Brown Jr, Magnetostatics Principles in Ferromagnetism, NorthHolland, Amsterdam (1962). 57. W. F. Brown Jr, Micromagnetics, Wiley and Interscience, New York (1963). 58. W.F. Brown Jr, Micromagnetoelastic Interactions, Springer, Berlin (1966). 59. L. Landau and E. Lifshitz, Electrodynamics of Continuous Media, Pergamon Press, Oxford (1960). 60. G. Anzellotti, S. Baldo and A. Visintin, 'Asymptotic behaviour of the Landau-Lifshitz model of ferromagnetism', Appl. Math. Optim. 23, 171-192 (1991). 61. A. Visintin, 'Modified Landau-Lifshitz equation for ferromagnetism', Physica B 233, 365-369 (1997). 62. A. Aharoni, Introduction to the Theory of Ferromagnetism, Oxford Science, Oxford (1996). 63. S. Chikazumi and S. H. Charap, Physics of Magnetism, Wiley, New York (1964). 64. B. D. Cullity, Introduction to Magnetic Materials, Addison-Wesley, Reading (1972). 65. W. Doering, 'Mikromagnetismus', in Handbuch der Physik. Band XVIII/2, H. P. J. Wijn Ed., Springer, Berlin (1966), pp. 340-437. 66. A. Herpin, Thdorie du Magndtisme, Presses Universitaires de France, Saclay (1968). 67. D. Jiles, Introduction to Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, Chapman and Hall, London (1991).
118
CHAPTER 1 MathematicalModels of Hysteresis
68. E. Kneller, Ferromagnetismus, Springer, Berlin (1962). 69. H. Kronm/iller, Nachwirkung in Ferromagnetika,Springer, Berlin (1968). 70. G. Maugin, Continuum Mechanics of Electromagnetic Solids, NorthHolland, Amsterdam (1988). 71. A. H. Morrish, The Physical Principles of Magnetism, Krieger, Malabar (1965). 72. F. Alouges and A. Soyeur, On global weak solutions for LandauLifshitz' equations: existence and uniqueness, Nonlinear Analysis, TMA 18, 1071-1084 (1992). 73. M. Bertsch, P. Podio-Guidugli and V. Valente, 'On the dynamics of deformable ferromagnets 1. Global weak solutions for soft ferromagnets at rest', Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. 179, 331-360 (2001). 74. G. Carbou and P. Fabrie, 'Comportement asymptotique des solutions faibles des 6quations de Landau-Lifschitz', C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6rie 1325, 717-720 (1997). 75. G. Carbou and P. Fabrie, 'Time average in micromagnetism', J. Differential Equations 147, 383-409 (1998). 76. G. Carbou, P. Fabrie, and F. Jochmann, 'A remark on the weak c0-1imit set for micromagnetism equation', Applied Math. Letters 15, 95-99 (2002). 77. A. De Simone, R. V. Kohn, S. M~iller, and F. Otto, 'Repulsive interaction of N6el walls, and the internal length scale of the cross-tie wall', Multiscale Model. Simul. 1, 57-104 (2003). 78. B. Guo and S. Fengqiu, 'Global weak solution for the LandauLifshitz-Maxwell equation in three space dimensions', J. Math. Anal. Appl. 211,326-346 (1997). 79. B. Guo and S. Fengqiu, 'The global smooth solution for LandauLifshitz-Maxwell equation without dissipation', J. Partial Differential Equations 11, 193-208 (1998). 80. B. Guo and M. -C. Hong, 'The Landau-Lifshitz equation for the ferromagnetic spin chain and harmonic maps', Cal. Var. 1, 311-334 (1993). 81. R. D. James and D. Kinderlehrer, 'Frustration in ferromagnetic materials', Contin. Mech. Thermodyn. 2, 215-239 (1991). 82. P. Joly and O. Vacus, 'Propagation d'ondes en mileu ferromagn6tique 1D: existence et unicit6 des solutions', C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6rie I 324, 29-35 (1997).
REFERENCES
119
83. W. L. Miranker and B. E. Willner, 'Global analysis of magnetic domains', Quart. Appl. Math. 37, 219-238 (1979). 84. F. Otto, 'Cross-over in scaling laws: a simple example from micromagnetics', in Proceedings of the International Congress of Mathematicians, Vol. III, Beijing, 2002, Higher Ed. Press, Beijing (2002), pp. 829-838. 85. P. Podio-Guidugli, 'Evolution equations for ferromagnetic continua', Boll. Unione Mat. Ital. Sez. B Artic. Ric. Mat. 8(4), 31-44 (2001). 86. P. Podio-Guidugli, 'On dissipation mechanisms in micromagnetics', European Physical J. B 19, 417-424 (2001). 87. P. Podio-Guidugli and G. Tomassetti, 'On the steady motions of a flat domain wall in a ferromagnet', European Physical J. B 26, 191-198 (2001). 88. P. Podio-Guidugli and V. Valente, 'Existence of global-in-time weak solutions to a modified Gilbert equation', Nonlinear Analysis, TMA 47, 147-158 (2001). 89. A. Visintin, 'On Landau-Lifshitz equations in ferromagnetism', Japan J. App1. Math. 2, 69-84 (1985). 90. G. Allaire, 'Homogenization and two-scale convergence', SIAM J. Math. Anal. 23, 1482-1518 (1992). 91. G. Nguetseng, 'A general convergence result for a functional related to the theory of homogenization', SIAM J. Math. Anal. 20, 608-623 (1989). 92. J. M. Ball, A Version of the Fundamental Theorem for Young Measures, Lecture Notes in Physics 344, Springer, Berlin (1989), pp. 207-215. 93. P. Pedregal, Parametrized Measures and Variational Principles, Birkh~iuser, Basel (1997) 94. L. Tartar, 'Compensated compactness and applications to partial differential equations', in Nonlinear Analysis and Mechanics: HeriottWatt Symposium, Vol. IV, R. J. Knops Ed., Pitman, London (1979), pp. 136-212. 95. H. Brezis, 'On some degenerate nonlinear parabolic equations', in Nonlinear Functional Analysis, F. E. Browder Ed., Proc. Symp. Pure Math. XVIII, AMS, Providence (1970), pp. 28-38. 96. H. Brezis, Op&ateurs Maximaux Monotones et Semi-Groupes de Contractions dans les Espaces de Hilbert, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1973). 97. A. Visintin, 'Forward-backward parabolic equations and hysteresis', Calc. Var. 15, 115-132 (2002).
120
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
98. N. Kenmochi and A. Visintin, 'Asymptotic stability for nonlinear PDEs with hysteresis', Euro. J. Applied Mathematics 5, 39-56 (1994). 99. A. Visintin, 'Maxwell's equations with vector hysteresis', Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 175 138 (2005). 100. F. Bagagiolo and A. Visintin, 'Hysteresis in filtration through porous media', Zeitschr. Analysis und ihre Anw. 19, 977-997 (2000). 101. J. Bear, Dynamic of Fluids in Porous Media, American Elsevier, New York (1972). 102. J. Bear, Hydraulics of Groundwater, McGraw Hill, New York (1979). 103. F. A. L. Dullien, Porous Media, Fluid Transport and Pore Structure, Academic Press, San Diego (1979). 104. D.G. Fredlund and H. Rahardjo, Soil Mechanics for Unsaturated Soils, Wiley, New York (1993). 105. C. Baiocchi, 'Su un problema di frontiera libera connesso a questioni di idraulica', Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. 92, 107-127 (1972). 106. G. Gilardi, 'A new approach to evolution free boundary problems' Comm. Part. Diff. Eq. 1099-1122 (1979). 107. A. Torelli, 'Su un problema a frontiera libera di evoluzione', Boll. Unione Matem. Ital. 11,559-570 (1975). 108. C. Baiocchi and A. Capelo, Variational and Quasivariational Inequalities, Applications to Free Boundary Problems, Wiley, Chichester (1984). 109. H. W. Alt, 'A free boundary problem associated with the flow of ground water', Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 64, 111-126 (1977). 110. H.W. Alt, 'Str6mungen durch inhomogene por6se Medien mit freiem Rand', J. Reine Angew. Math. 305, 89-115 (1979). 111. H. W. Alt, 'Nonsteady fluid flow through porous media', in Free Boundary Problems: Theory and Applications, A. Bossavit, A. Damlamian and M. Fr6mond Eds., Pitman, Boston (1985), pp. 222-228. 112. H. W. Alt, S. Luckhaus and A. Visintin, 'On nonstationary flow through porous media', Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. 136, 303-316 (1984). 113. A. Beliaev and S. M. Hassanizadaeh, 'A theoretical model of hysteresis and dynamic effects in the capillary relation for two-phase flow in porous media', Transport in Porous Media 43, 487-510 (2001). 114. A. Poulovassilis and E. C. Childs, 'The hysteresis of pore water: the non-independence of domains', Soil Sci. 112, 301-312 (1971).
REFERENCES
121
115. A. Poulovassilis and W. M. E1-Ghamry, 'The dependent domain theory applied to scanning curves of any order in hysteretic soil water relationships', Soil Sci. 126, 1-8 (1978). 116. A. Poulovassilis and E. Tzimas, 'The hysteresis in the relationship between hydraulic conductivity and soil water content', Soil Sci. 120, 327-331 (1975). 117. Y. Mualem, 'Theory of universal hysteretical properties of unsaturated porous media', in Proc. Fort Collins Fluid Intern. Hydrol. Symp. 1977, Water Resour. Res. Public., (1979). 118. Y. Mualem, 'A modified dependent domain theory of hysteresis', Soil Sci. 137, 283-291 (1984). 119. A. Beliaev and R. J. Schotting, 'Analysis of a new model for unsaturated flow in porous media including hysteresis and dynamic effects', Comput. Geoscie. 5, 345-368 (2001). 120. F. Bagagiolo and A. Visintin, 'Porous media filtration with hysteresis', Adv. Math. Sci. Appl. 14, 379-403 (2004). 121. A. Mielke, 'Analysis of energetic models for rate-independent materials', in Proceedings of the I.C.M., Vol. III, Beijing, 2002, Higher Ed. Press, Beijing (2002), pp. 817-828. 122. A. Mielke, 'Energetic formulation of multiplicative elasto-plasticity using dissipation distances', Contin. Mech. Thermodyn. 15, 351-382 (2003). 123. A. Mielke, 'A new approach to elasto-plasticity using energy and dissipation functionals', in Proceedings of the ICIAM (2003) (in press). 124. A. Mielke and F. Theil, 'On rate-independent hysteresis models', Nonl. Diff. Eqns. Appl. 11, 151-189 (2004). 125. A. Mielke, F. Theil, and V. Levitas, 'A variational formulation of rateindependent phase transformations using an extremum principle', Arch. Rational Mech. Anal. 162, 137-177 (2002). 126. G. Dal Maso and R. Toader, 'A model for the quasi-static growth or brittle fractures: existence and approximation results', Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 162, 101-135 (2002). 127. G. A. Francfort and J. -J. Marigo, 'Revisiting brittle fracture as an energy minimization problem: existence and approximation results', J. Mech. Phys. Solids 46, 1319-1342 (1998). 128. J.-P. Aubin, Optima and Equilibria, Springer, Heidelberg (1993). 129. V. Barbu and T. Precupanu, Convexity and Optimization in Banach Spaces, Editura Academiei, Bucuresti (1978).
122
CHAPTER 1 Mathematical Models of Hysteresis
130. J. M. Borwein and A. S. Lewis, Convex Analysis and Nonlinear Optimization, Springer, New York (2000). 131. C. Castaing and M. Valadier, Convex Analysis and Measurable Multifunctions, Springer, Berlin (1977). 132. I. Ekeland and R. Temam, Analyse Convexe et Probl~mes Variationnelles, Dunod Gauthier-Villars, Paris (1974). 133. J.-B. Hiriart-Urruty and C. Lemarechal, Convex Analysis and Optimization Algorithms, Springer, Berlin (1993). 134. J.-B. Hiriart-Urruty and C. Lemarechal, Fundamentals of Convex Analysis, Springer, Berlin (2001). 135. L. H6rmander, Notions of Convexity, Birkh~iuser, Boston (1994). 136. A. D. Ioffe and V. M. Tihomirov, Theory of Extremal Problems, NorthHolland, Amsterdam (1979). 137. A. G. Kusraev and S. S. Kutateladze, Subdifferentials: Theory and Applications, Kluwer, Dordrecht (1995). 138. J.J. Moreau, Fonctionnelles Convexes, Coll6ge de France, Paris (1967). 139. R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1969). 140. R. T. Rockafellar, The Theory of Subgradients and its Applications
to Problems of Optimization: 141. 142. 143. 144.
Convex and Nonconvex Functions,
Heldermann, Berlin (1981). R.T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B.Wets, Variational Analysis, Springer, New York (1998). M. Willem, Analyse Convexe et Optmization, Ed. CIACO, Louvain-LaNeuve (1989). L. H. Bennett and E. Della Torre Ed., 'Hysteresis modelling and micromagnetism', Physica B, Vol. 233(4), 259-401 (1997). M. Brokate, K. Dressier, P. Krej~i, T. I. Seidman, L. Tavemini, and A. Visintin, 'Contributions to the session on Problems in Hysteresis', in
Nonlinear Analysis, Proceedings of the First World Congress of Nonlinear Analysts, V. Laksmikantham Ed., De Gruyter, Berlin (1996), pp. 797806. 145. M. Brokate, N. Kenmochi, I. M~iller, J. F. Rodrigues, C. Verdi, A. Visintin Ed., Phase Transitions and Hysteresis. Lecture Notes in Mathematics 1584, Springer, Berlin (1994). 146. E. Cardelli Ed., 'Hysteresis modelling and micromagnetism', Physica B, Vol. 275(1-3) 1-274 (2000). 147. A. Visintin Ed., Models of Hysteresis, Longman, Harlow (1993).
REFERENCES
123
148. M. Brokate, 'Elastoplastic constitutive laws of nonlinear kinematic hardening type', in Functional Analysis with Current Applications in Science, Technology and Industry, M. Brokate and A. H. Siddiqi Eds., Longman, Harlow (1998), pp. 238-272. 149. Y. Huo and I. Mi~ller, 'Non-equilibrium thermodynamics of pseudoelasticity', Cont. Mech. Thermodyn. 5, 163-204 (1993). 150. M. A. Krasnosel'skiL 'Equations with non-linearities of hysteresis type', in VII Int. Konf. Nichtlin. Schwing., Berlin 1975, Band I, Teil 1, Abh. Akad. Wiss. Abt. Math.-Techn. DDR 3 (1977) pp. 437-458 (Russian). 151. J. W. Macki, P. Nistri, and P. Zecca, 'Mathematical models for hysteresis', SIAM Review 35, 94-123 (1993). 152. I. M~iller, 'Six lectures on shape memory'. In Boundaries, interfaces, and transitions. (M.C. Delfour, Ed.) 2nd Annual CRM Summer School held in Banff, AB, August 6-18, 1995. AMS-CRM Proceedings and Lecture Notes 13 American Math. Soc., Providence, RI, pp. 125-161, (1998). 153. A. Visintin, 'Mathematical models of hysteresis', in Topics in Nonsmooth Mechanics, J. J. Moreau, P. D. Panagiotopoulos and G. Strang Eds., Birkh~iuser, Basel (1988), pp. 295-326.
CHAPTER 2
Differential Equations with Hysteresis via a Canonical Example Martin Brokate, Zentrum Mathematik, TU Munich, Germany Alexei Pokrovskii, Dmitrii Rachinskii, and Oleg Rasskazov, Department of Applied Mathematics, University College Cork, Cork, ~re~and
Contents 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Hysteresis Phenomena Numerical Experiments Examples of Rigorous Conclusions Examples of Technical Toolboxes Acknowledgement References
125 136 152 235 278 278
2.1 HYSTERESIS P H E N O M E N A The theory of differential equations with hysteresis is a new and exciting branch of nonlinear analysis, which came into being in the late 1960s-early 1970s. The key ideas were generated by a group of Soviet mathematicians headed by Mark Krasnosel'skii, and they were first reported in a few short articles in Doklady [1,2]. In modern science, hysteresis is the collective name for a class of strongly nonlinear physical phenomena. The wording 'strongly nonlinear' means that linearization cannot encapsulate the observed behavior. Roughly speaking, hysteresis nonlinearities are defined as deterministic, rate-independent operators [Kluwer Encyclopedia of Mathematics, Supplement Volume 1, 1997, Kluwer Acad. Publ. pp. 310,384]. Hysteresis occurs in many engineering, physical sciences and economic systems. For example, in the Information and Communication Technology area hysteresis 'stores' information in dynamic memory, allows neural-networks to learn, The Science of Hysteresis Volume I, II and III G. Bertotti and I. Mayergoyz Copyright 9 2005 Elsevier Inc. All rights reserved.
126
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
affects the orbits of communication satellites via ferromagnetic friction, etc. As a different type of example, soil-moisture hysteresis in terrestrial hydrology 'helps' agriculture: 'Less mechanical work is required to insert water into unsaturated soil than to remove it - good for agriculture!" (Hillel). The principal role of hysteresis in post-Keynesian economics is highlighted in R. Cross, Hysteresis, The Handbook of Economic Methodology, Edward Edgar (1995). The list can be greatly extended. Often we need to analyse closed-loop systems, which are described by differential equations with hysteresis, and hysteresis terms are to be taken into account in various areas of differential equations, thus leading to numerous distinct branches of study, depending of the subject area, type of hysteresis operators that are used, etc. Operators of hysteresis nonlinearities often admit a simple 'picture definition', however their properties are quite different from the properties of more classical operators. Thus, the investigation of differential equations with hysteresis nonlinearities requires new mathematical methods. In return, methods which have been originally suggested for the analysis of differential equations with hysteresis appear to be useful in the classical theory of differential-operator equations. In this paper we decided to demonstrate the richness and beauty of the theory of differential equations with hysteresis via a simple canonical example. Essentially, we consider the semilinear Duffing oscillator with the Preisach nonlinearity. To some extent this example is close to the system that was considered in the articles [1,2]. The structure of the paper allows us to present various results on existence and uniqueness, on properties of periodic motions, on the convergence of numerical solutions, etc. Moreover, we show how these fuse with, and complement each other. Apart from results in traditional areas, we also present a version of the shadowing lemma specifically designed for the analysis of systems with hysteresis. Introductory remarks will be given in Section 2.1. We will give extensive results of numerical modeling in Section 2.2. Some instructive examples of rigorous statements will be given in Section 2.3. Finally, in Section 2.4 we will demonstrate how m o d e m methods of analysis of systems with hysteresis can help in rigorous, computer-aided investigations of chaotic behavior in a semilinear Duffing oscillator with the Preisach nonlinearity. The first drafts of Sections 2.2, 2.3.2, 2.3.3, 2.3.8 and 2.4 were written by Pokrovskii and Rasskazov; the first drafts of Sections 2.3.5 and 2.3.7 were written by Rachinskii. In conclusion, the three older authors would like to highlight the role of our younger colleague, Oleg Rasskazov; in particular, the difficult computing is mainly to his credit.
127
2.1 HYSTERESIS PHENOMENA
FIGURE 2.1 An iron pendulum in a magnetic field. 2.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Equations with Hysteresis, Why Bother? We consider an iron p e n d u l u m oscillating in an external magnetic field, see Fig. 2.1. Such oscillators are common in nature and in industry: a satellite orbiting the Earth, or swings in a playground (in both cases because the Earth is a huge magnet), and in numerous cases in microelectronics, etc. Without a magnetic field, the p e n d u l u m dynamics are described (in the linear approximation) by the equation x" + ax' + x = sin(cot), which can be integrated explicitly. The situation when the magnetic field is present is, however, much more complex. The iron substance of the p e n d u l u m will be magnetized and demagnetized. This process is called ferromagnetic hysteresis. The magnetization will interact with the external magnetic field, and thus the equation will have the form x" + ax' + x = A sin(cot) + y(t),
y(t) = W x ( t ) ,
(2.1)
where the nonlinearity W x ( t ) describes the interaction between the external magnetic field and the magnetized p e n d u l u m itself, and will be described more fully later. This term, W x ( t ) , depends on the p e n d u l u m
CHAPTER 2 DifferentialEquations with Hysteresis
128
position as well as on the pendulum magnetization. The pendulum' s current magnetization depends in turn on the whole previous history of the pendulum motion. Thus the actual equation is of a differential-operator type. To proceed with a quantitative and qualitative analysis of Equation (2.1), we need a convenient description of the operator W that acts on the function x(t). Some important requirements for such a description are: 1. should be amenable to physical observation; 2. should admit a convenient means of numerical implementation (to allow computer modeling of the equations); 3. Should have 'nice' properties as an operator in some function space (to develop a qualitative theory of the equation with hysteresis).
Generalities The word hysteresis is of the Greek origin and means etymologically 'coming behind'. It was introduced into the scientific vocabulary about 120 years ago by the Scottish physicist Alfred Ewing as follows 'when there are two quantities M and N, such that cyclic variations of N cause cyclic variation of M, then if the changes of M lag behind those of N, we may say that there is hysteresis in the relation of M and N" [3]. Further interesting historical details are presented in [4]. Nowadays 'hysteresis' is one of the most 'multivalued' of terms (like, say, 'entropy'). For example, it is widely used in mechanics (plastic hysteresis) [5], physics (ferromagnetic hysteresis) [6], phase transitions [7], hydrology (soil-moisture hysteresis) [8,9], glaciology [10], smart materials' theory [11,12] and economics (shock analysis) [13]. In many scientific and general encyclopedias the meaning of the word is illustrated by the picture in Fig. 2.2. Output, y(t)
FIGURE 2.2 A typical hysteresis input-output diagram.
2.1 HYSTERESISPHENOMENA
129
x(t) v
W
Y(O v
FIGURE 2.3 A hysteresis transducer. The quantities x, y, marked as the horizontal and the vertical axes, can have different physical meanings, such as deformation versus stress (plastic hysteresis) or external magnetic field versus magnetization (ferromagnetic hysteresis). In fact, this picture alone contains the basic points for an operational definition of hysteresis. We can suggest immediately that, in engineering language, a hysteresis nonlinearity is a kind of transducer W which relates the variable output y(t) to a variable input x(t), see Fig. 2.3. This transducer W is not a function: for the same current value x(t,) of the input, different output values y(t,) can be observed (geometrically some vertical lines have multiple intersections with the i n p u t - o u t p u t curve in Fig. 2.2). In other words, an output y(t), after a certain reference time t,, depends not only on the input x(t), t~t,, but also on an internal/initial state o9 -- og(t,) of the transducer W. Sometimes this internal state can be characterized in suitable physical terms; in other cases it is a kind of condensed memory of the prehistory t < t,; sometimes it is just an abstract parameter. Moreover, since there is no mention of a time scale in the picture as in the text, we can suggest that the i n p u t - o u t p u t relationships are (at least in the first approximation) rate-independent, or, what is the same thing, invariant with respect to time scaling. That is, if the pair (x(t), y(t)) is an admissible i n p u t - o u t p u t correspondence, then the correspondence (x(at + b), y(at + b)) is also admissible for real b and positive a, see Fig. 2.4 below. In formal mathematical language the relationships ' i n p u t - o u t p u t ' are to be understood as operators in suitable function spaces. Rate-independence means that these operators are invariant with respect to the action of the group G of affine transformations of the time scale. We have arrived now at one of the modern formal definitions of hysteresis nonlinearity. Omitting a few technicalities, hysteresis nonlinearities are defined as deterministic, rate-independent operators I (probably first suggested by A. Visintin [14]). Surprisingly, this general definition is sufficient for developing interesting formal concepts with various applications. 1We note, in passing, a result of F. Holland: the only linear integral operator satisfying the rate-independent property is the Hilbert transform.
130
CHAPTER 2
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
Input
x(t)
x(at+b)
Time Output
y(t)
y(at+b)
Time
FIGURE 2.4 Rate independence. The general structure of these concepts is often the following: 1. Choosing elementary hysteresis nonlinearities, so-called hysterons (such as nonideal relay, generalized play [15], Prandtl or Duhem models, etc.). 2. Treating complex hysteresis nonlinearities as block diagrams of hysterons. 3. Establishing identification principles. Nowadays this approach to hysteresis is standard [16] and it contains a wide variety of 'branches', depending on the choice of hysterons in item 1 and/or the basic type of the block diagrams in item 2. Below we discuss only one such branch: the Preisach model [17]. In this model the role of hysterons is that of nonideal relay nonlinearities, or, as they are also called, thermostat nonlinearities. Block diagrams are essentially the standard parallel connection of a number of hysterons. 2.1.2 NONIDEAL RELAY
The nonideal relay (with the threshold values a < t) is the simplest hysteretic transducer. This transducer is denoted by R~,//; its output y(t) can take one of two values 0 or 1" at any moment the relay is either 'switched
2.1 HYSTERESIS PHENOMENA
131
I
i
1
I I I I
u o~
v
0 FIGURE 2.5 Nonideal relay R~,,.
off' o r ' switched on'. The dynamics of the relay is usually described by the picture below, see Fig. 2.5. The variable output y(t)
y(t) = R~,~[to, r/0]x(t),
t>~to,
(2.2)
depends on the variable input x(t) (t~to) and on the initial state r/0. Here the input is an arbitrary continuous scalar function; r/0 is either 0 or 1. The scalar function y(t) has at most a finite n u m b e r of jumps on any finite interval tomtit1. The output behaves rather 'lazily': it prefers to be unchanged, as long as the phase pair (x(t), y(t)) belongs to the union of the bold lines in the picture above. The value of the function (2.2) at the m o m e n t t is defined by the following explicit formula: t/o, 1,
y(t) = R~,/~[to, ~/o]x(t) =
if~<x(~)
r ~ [ t o , t];
if there exists tl ~ [to, t] such that
x(tl)~fl, x(r) > a for all r ~ [tl, t]" O,
if there exists tl ~ [to, t] such that x(tl)~Cz, x('c) < fl for all ~ ~ [tl, t].
The equalities y(t) = 1 for x(t)>~fl and y(t) = 0 for x(t)Ka always hold for
t >~to. Figure 2.6 gives another geometrical illustration of the definition of a nonideal relay. Here we combine on the same graph a typical input and the corresponding output of the relay. From the physical point of view, the definition of the output is verifiable only for those inputs that have not got local minima equal to a or local maxima equal to ft. The question whether for such inputs the corresponding
132
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis x,y _
.
.
.
.
x,(t)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
,
t
_/___ FIGURE 2.6 Input and output of non ideal relay R~,~.
switching would happen or not is affected by small uncontrollable noises, which are present in any physical system. The physically meaningful deftnition of the set of possible outputs for such'critical' inputs requires special constructions. We note, finally, that the relay operators are discontinuous in any reasonable sense. A nice and important property of the nonideal relay is its monotonicity with respect to the input and initial state: if r/0,1 ~r/0,2 and xl(t)~x2(t) for t e [to, h], then R~,~[to, rlo,1]xl(t)~R~,~[to, r/o,2]x2(t) for t e [to, tl].
2.1.3 PREISACH MODEL
Definition Consider a family 74 of relays R ~ = R~,/G with threshold values aw, flw, w e f2. The index set f2 may be finite or infinite, and we call such a family a bundle of relays. Suppose that the set f2 is endowed with a probability measure #. We further suppose that both functions ao~, flu are measurable with respect to #. We call any measurable function ~/(co) : f2 --, {0, 1} the initial state of the bundle 74. For any initial state ~/0 = ~/0(w) and any continuous input x(t), t~to, we define the function
y(t) - y[to, r/0](t) = fn R~[to, r/0(og)]x(t) dp,
t~to.
(2.3)
2.1 HYSTERESIS PHENOMENA
133
e(xl~ !
eo~2~ 2
x t,
R%133 I]
.3
~176176176176176176176 ~N/
I RaN~N FIGURE 2.7 Weighted parallel connection of a finite number of nonideal relays.
We refer to this m o d e l as the Preisach nonlinearity (or w h e n convenient, Preisach model or Preisach operator or Preisach transducer). Here y(t) is the o u t p u t of the Preisach m o d e l with the initial state r/0 and the input x(t). If the m e a s u r e # has a finite s u p p o r t Wl . . . . . WN, then the definition (2.3) m a y be rewritten as a parallel connection of the relays R~J - R~j,/G j with the weights #j = #(ogj) > 0: X
y(t) = y[to, r/0](t) - E #JR~176 ~lo(C~)]x(t)'
j=l
t~to.
Figure 2.7 illustrates this discrete situation. Thus, from the point of view of system theory, the Preisach nonlinearity is a parallel connection of a continuous b u n d l e of nonideal relays [18]. For t > to, it is also convenient to interpret the function ~/(o9) : o9--, R~[to, r/0(co)]x(t ) ~ {0, 1}
(2.4)
134
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
as the state of the Preisach nonlinearity at the moment t. We note that the state (2.4) always satisfies the relationships
t/(c0)
/
0 1
if if
x(t)<~a(og), x(t)>>,fl(co).
It is convenient also to consider only admissible initial states ~/0(co) that satisfy the analogous relationships
~/0(c0) =
/
0 if 1 if
x(t0)~
x(to)>~fl(co).
(2.5)
Although the individual relays are discontinuous in any reasonable sense, the Preisach operators are often continuous with respect to the uniform norm and have other nice properties, see [15,20,21].
Numerical Implementation For a given measure/~, it is easy to write a computer program to calculate the output of the Preisach model for an input function x(t). We will postpone a detailed description of a possible algorithm until Section 2.4.1. Here we just show some typical graphs. Let us consider the case when f2 is the triangle {(a,//) 9 - 1 < ~ < ]/~<1}.
(2.6)
and the measure/~ is the uniform probability measure over that set. We encourage readers to experiment with a program modeling this particular Preisach nonlinearity on the interactive homepage: http: / /www.physics.ucc.ie / ~oll/hysteresis / Figure 2.8 is a snapshot of this program for some irregular inputs. The class of Preisach transducers is closed with respect to some natural operations. For instance, the weighted parallel connections of a number N of Preisach transducers Pi, with positive weights #i such that//1 if-'" "if-/iN 1, is a Preisach transducer, see Fig. 2.9. Also the cascade Pf connection of a continuous functional linkf 9x ---> fix) with a Preisach transducer, as shown in Fig. 2.10, is a Preisach transducer (with another measure #). We note that the reverse connection fP is NOT, in general, a Preisach transducer. -
-
135
2.1 HYSTERESIS P H E N O M E N A
1
i
i
'
i
1
- -
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0
0 -
-
1
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 -1
-0.5
0
0.5
0
1
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
1
F I G U R E 2.8 Some typical snapshots of i n p u t - o u t p u t phase d i a g r a m s for a Preisach model.
P1
~tl y~
x(t)
P2
F I G U R E 2.9
._[ F I G U R E 2.10
~
~2
Parallel connection of t w o Preisach transducers.
y~ v
v
Cascade connection of a function a n d a Preisach transducer.
136
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
2.2 N U M E R I C A L EXPERIMENTS 2.2.1 BASIC EXAMPLE The strength of the Preisach model lies in its combination of physical generality and mathematical simplicity. These features are especially important when analyzing closed-loop systems with hysteresis. As an illustration we return to the forced oscillations of an iron pendulum in a magnetic field, Fig. 2.1. For small oscillations, this is described by the equation x" + ax' + x = A sin(cot) + by(t),
y(t) = 2 ( P x ) ( t ) - 1,
(2.7)
see Paragraph 2.1.1. Here x(t) is the displacement of the pendulum from its equilibrium position at x - 0, (Px)(t) is a Preisach nonlinearity with an appropriate measure #. Here y(t) describes the interaction between the external magnetic field and the magnetized pendulum itself. We emphasize once more that Eqn. (2.7) is a differential-operator equation, not a purely differential one.
2.2.2 STRAIGHTFORWARD VISUALIZATION OF SOLUTIONS In this section we are going to describe the results of the numerical integration of Eqn. (2.7). The detailed description of the integration algorithm together with the error estimates are given in the second part of the article, see Section 2.4.3. To simplify the discussions of (2.7) we focus on the case when a = 0, co = v/2. Consider the set a = {(a,/~) : - 0 . 5 ~ < ~ < ]/~<0.5}.
(2.8)
We define the measure #(S) of the set S as two times the Lebesgue measure of the set S n A. In all our experiments the initial conditions are chosen to be ! x(to) - 0.5, x'(t0) - x 0 > 0. Thus at the moment to all the relays of the Preisach nonlinearity are 'on', that is, the initial state is ~/0 - 1.
G r a p h s of the S o l u t i o n s Plotting the fragments of x(t) versus t is the simplest way of visualizing solutions of (2.7). This visualization is convenient when the amplitude A of the forcing term A sin(~/2t) is rather small (less than 0.5). In this
2.2
137
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
,
!
0.5
0.5 r
0 '~ll 'l :l',
-0.5
-O.5
"
0
10 20 30 40 (a) time interval [0,50]
F I G U R E 2.11
50
|
I
320 330 340 310 (b) time interval [300, 350]
300
350
Beat d a m p i n g for A = 0.2: s o l i d t r a j e c t o r y b = 0; d a s h e d t r a j e c t o r y
b = 0.1. 3 0.4
2 1
0.2
0
0
-1
-0.2
-2 -3
-0.4 ,
0
10 20 30 40 (a) time interval [0,50]
50
350
I
,
I
,
I
,
I
360 370 380 390 (b) time interval [350, 400]
,
400
FIGURE 2.12 Solid lines: beat damping for A = 0.2, b = 0.1 with different i.c.; dashed line is a unique ~/'2rt-periodic solution for A - 0.2, b = 0.
case the limit behavior of the individual solutions is simple: each solution approaches some ~/2rt-periodic function. Figure 2.11 represents a typical plot of the solution of the system with hysteresis (A = 0.2, b = 0.1), the dashed line, against the corresponding solutions of the system without hysteresis (A = 0.2, b = 0), the solid line. If the amplitude A of the forcing term is small enough, and the hysteresis weight b is even smaller (as is the case in Fig. 2.11), the Preisach nonlinearity acts like a friction term, thus ' d a m p i n g the 2rt-periodic component of a solution'. This is demonstrated by Fig. 2.12, which plots sample solutions of the system with A = 0.2, b = 0.1. If the amplitude A of the forcing term is still small, but the hysteresis weight b is getting larger, a new important feature is becoming visible. Figure 2.13 is similar to Fig. 2.12, but relates to the case A = 0.2, b = 0.3. Here each individual solution tends to its o w n ~/27t-periodic limit; the limit solutions are congruent.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
138
!
!
,
i
'
I
!
!
i
!
0.40.2 0 -0.2 -0.4 !
0
5
10 15 20 25 (a) time interval [0,30]
.
,
30
300
I
305
,
I
,
I
,
I
,
I
310 315 320 325 (b) time interval [300,330]
,
330
FIGURE 2.13 Beat damping for A -- 0.2, b = 0.3 with different i.c. The situation dramatically changes when the amplitude A is large, so we now discuss the case A = 1. Depending on the values of b, the equation x" + x - sin(~/2t) + b y ( t ) ,
y(t) - 2(Px)(t)
- 1,
(2.9)
demonstrates unexpectedly rich behavior, see for example Fig. 2.14. The description of the solutions shown in Fig. 2.14 is given in Table 2.1 below. We use the notation T - ~/2~; by the period of a solution we mean the minimal one.
Phase Diagrams Another way of visualizing solutions of a second-order differential equation is to plot parametric curves in the plane ( x ( t ) , x ' ( t ) ) . Figure 2.15 shows the plots corresponding to parts (a), (b), (d), and (f) of Fig. 2.14. 2.2.3 DIAGRAMS OF POINCARE MAP
The visualization methods presented above are not always convenient since they do not provide information about the state of the Preisach nonlinearity. Now we consider a special kind of Poincare map that proved to be useful in visualizing the dynamics of the solutions of the system (2.9).
Description of the Poincare Map Recall that the initial conditions for the solutions of (2.9) are chosen to satisfy x ( t o ) - 0.5, x'(t0) > 0. (2.10) Here we mention that Cauchy problem of (2.9) has a unique solution which exists for all t>>,to and satisfies the semi-group property.
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
FIGURE 2.14
139
Solutions of (2.9) for different values of b.
Let FI d e n o t e the semi-infinite strip [0, V ~ ) x [0, ~ ) . To a given pair V 0 - (V~1) , V~2)) E I-I w e c o r r e s p o n d the pair F ( v o ) - Vl--(v~ 1) , v~2)) --
x(t), t>~to is a solution of (2.9) defined b y the initial conditions to - v~1), x(to) = 0.5, x'(t0) - v(02) a n d tl is the first t > to such that x(t) = 0.5 a n d x'(t)>~0; the m a p F : FI --, FI m a y not be defined (tl rood v/-2rc, x'(tl)) w h e r e
on all x E FI. In other w o r d s let x(t), t>~to be a solution of (2.9) such that conditions x(t) = 0.5, x'(t)~>0 hold for an infinitely increasing sequence t = tn,
140
CHAPTER 2 TABLE 2.1
Part
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
The description of solutions from Fig. 2.14
b
tO
(x(to), x t (to))
(a)
0.45
2.3
(0.5, 1.5)
[0;100]
(b)
0.45
2.3
(0.5, 1.54)
[2 000;2 050]
Stable solution of period 3T unsettled (T = ~ : ) Stable solution of period 3T settled
(c) (d)
0.625 0.625
3 3
(0.5, 1.4) (0.5, 1.4)
[1 000;1100] [1000;1400]
'Almost periodic'-like solution 'Almost periodic'-like solution
(e) (f)
1 1
2.5 2.5
(0.5, 1) (0.5, 1)
[1000;1100] Chaotic-like solution [1 000;1400] Chaotic-like solution
FIGURE 2.15
Time frame
Description
Trajectories from Table 2.1 in the coordinates x, x I.
n -- 0, 1, 2 . . . . . T h e n the pairs ( t n m o d ~/2~, x'(tn)) constitute the trajectory of F. A m o r e f o r m a l definition of F will be given later. N o t e that periodic solutions of (2.9) can be ~ T r n - p e r i o d i c only, w i t h n = 1, 2 . . . . . Each periodic p o i n t of F c o r r e s p o n d s to a periodic solution of (2.9), b u t there is no s i m p l e relationship b e t w e e n the p e r i o d of the discrete
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
141
map and the period of the solution x(t). For example, cases where a period 2 point of F represents solutions of (2.9) of period 3~/2~ and 5~/-2~ are shown later in Fig. 2.22 (e), (f).
Examples Let Fb denote the map F that corresponds to Eqn. (2.9) with the fixed parameter b. Figure 2.16 shows the trajectories of Fb corresponding to the pictures (a)-(f) of Fig. 2.14. Parts (a), (b), (d), (f) of Fig. 2.16 contain only the points of trajectories, while parts (c) and (e) contain the consecutive points of F-trajectories joined by straight lines and are slightly more informative. Note that part (c) shows part of the trajectory forming the attracting set on part (d). Other possible types of trajectories are shown in Figs. 2.17 and 2.18. Figure 2.17 (a) shows the tear-shaped attracting set of Fo.1, (b) shows a trajectory of F0.325 with the period 7. In Fig. 2.18 (a) shows a three-part attracting set for F0.35 while (b) shows the order in which these parts are visited. Figure 2.18 (c) presents some of the invariant curves inside the oval-shaped attracting set that exists for F1. 2.2.4 DISCUSSION To classify typical patterns of the long-term behavior of the solutions of (2.9) we have computed numerous solutions for randomly chosen initial conditions and various values of parameter b. For those solutions we have constructed corresponding Fb trajectories and have considered their co-limit sets. We have observed the following types of 'settled' Fb trajectories: fixed points, periodic trajectories, tear-shaped invariant curves, oval-shaped invariant curves and chaotic-like sets.
Fixed and Periodic Points The fixed points and the periodic trajectories of Fb correspond to periodic solutions of (2.9). We have never observed a fixed point of Fb that corresponds to a v ~ - p e r i o d i c solution of (2.9). All the periodic solutions of (2.9) we have observed have at least one local maximum and at least one local minimum in the interval [-0.5~ 0.5]. 2 2Since the initial conditions for our experiments were randomly chosen, the observation refers only to the asymptoticallystable periodic solutions.
CHAPTER 2
142
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.6 1.5
1.4
1.4 1.2
,
i
|
i
|
i
,
i
1.3 2.1 2.15 2.2 2.25 2.3 2.35 2.4 (b) settling to a fixed point
|
i
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 (a) a fixed point
|
i
2 1.8 1.6
2 1.8 1.6
1.4
1.4
~ .......
1.2
1.2
'\.
1
1
0.8
0.8
2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 (c) almost periodic short, connected 3
,
,
,
,
-:
2.5
-
,
i
|
i
,
,
i
i
,
....... .....~.
,
2.9
"..........
.
"\
3 3.1 3.2 (d) almost periodic long
+.3
3
2.5
!
2
i
1.5
e
1.5
]
1
0.5
.~.:~...',.'.;~,,.~-..',,.~,~
1 0.5
9
"::~,
" t"
9 ..,'.:..,r
0
|
,
0
1
2
3
I
4
(e) chaotic short, connected FIGURE 2.16
Invariant
0
,
5
"''~,
0
"
"
I
1
" .
'
.'.&.'a.,..,,'.
9 ..',.
o'..,...
,
..
"'I
,
2
I
.
"',
3
t
I
4
5
(f) chaotic long Poincare m a p examples.
Curves
C o n s i d e r t h e s o l u t i o n s of (2.9) for w h i c h t h e t r a j e c t o r i e s of Fbf o r m a n i n v a r i a n t c u r v e or a n u m b e r of i n v a r i a n t c u r v e s , see Figs. 2.18 (a), (b). N u m e r i c a l m o d e l i n g s h o w s t h a t s o m e t i m e s i n v a r i a n t c u r v e s a t t r a c t t r a j e c t o r i e s of F f r o m t h e i r n e i g h b o r h o o d . If this is t h e case, w e s a y t h e t r a j e c t o r y h a s a t r a n s i e n t p a r t , since in n u m e r i c a l e x p e r i m e n t s it is h a r d to localize t h e exact l o c a t i o n of t h e i n v a r i a n t c u r v e . In all o b s e r v e d e x a m p l e s t h e a t t r a c t i n g r e g i o n a l w a y s b e l o n g e d to t h e o u t s i d e of t h e finite r e g i o n s b o u n d e d b y t h e invariant curves.
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
,
,
143
,
0.8
1.5
0.7 0.6 0.5
0.5
0.4 '
2.5
'
3
3.5
(a) Tear-shaped attractor of Fo. 1
0.3
4
2.6
~
,
i
2.7
2.8
29.
3
(b) Period 7 orbit of F0.325
FIGURE 2.17 Two typical attracting sets.
Let C denote an invariant curve on FI that corresponds to a solution of (2.9) with a transient part. Our experiments show that the regions inside such curves are filled by other invariant curves which correspond to the solutions of (2.9) without a transient part, see Fig. 2.18 (c). We call a curve C together with its internals a cluster of invariant curves. The outer b o u n d a r y of some parts of the cluster m a y have a tear-shaped or ovalshaped form, while the invariant curves inside the cluster are always oval. The beak of the tear-shaped cluster is always touching the line v (2) = 0. We observed that the solutions x(t) of (2.9) whose Poincare trajectories seem to form invariant curves, have no maxima and minima inside the interval (-0.5, 0.5). Note that the periodic solutions that we have observed have maxima and minima inside the interval (-0.5, 0.5). It is reasonable to suggest that the invariant curves of F correspond to quasiperiodic solutions of (2.9). Here, we divide quasiperiodic solutions of (2.9) into the three groups: G1. Solutions with no local maxima and minima close to x = 4-0.5. G2. Solutions with a local m i n i m u m 0.5 or m a x i m u m at - 0 . 5 (within the precision of our experiments). G3. Solutions with a local m i n i m u m at - 0 . 5 or m a x i m u m at 0.5 (again, within the precision of our experiments). We note that solutions belonging to both groups G2 and G3 were not observed. Solutions from the group G1 do not have a transient part. We apply this classification to the trajectories of Fb which correspond to the quasiperiodic solutions of (2.9). All the b o u n d i n g solutions of the cluster that have a transient part have at least one e x t r e m u m of x(t) which is equal either to - 0 . 5 or to 0.5 up to the precision of the numerical experiments. The solutions of (2.9)
144
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
FIGURE 2.18 Invariant curves. corresponding to the 'boundary trajectories' of two clusters are shown in (x, xt)-coordinates in Fig. 2.19 below.
Chaotic Trajectories Chaotic trajectories like those shown later in Figs. 2.21(o) and (p) are the most interesting objects of our analysis. Here we discuss the 'chaotic' behavior of the map F1, see Fig. 2.21(p). Computer experiments indicate the existence of a chaotic attractor that is visually persistent with respect to long computation times, change of the integration step, and small perturbations of b. Experiments show that the map F1 exhibits sensitive dependence on initial conditions. Useful measures of a complicated behavior are the fractional values of the capacity and correlation dimensions of the attracting set. Let B(r) be a smallest number of squares with side r required to cover the attractor. Then the capacity dimension dcap is the limit dcap--
lim r-,0+
d log B(r) d log r
145
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
FIGURE 2.19 Cluster boundaries in (x, xl). 'x' signs mark the points x = 4-0.5, xf = 0. Note that the trajectory does not touch points (+0.5, 0) in part (a).
where d in the right-hand side stands for differentiation. Numerical approximations gave us the value dcap - 1.76. Let vi, i = O, 1, 2 . . . . . N be a trajectory of F. Then we define a correlation sum C(r) as 1 C ( r ) - N--*cx~ lim - ~
N
~
~(r-
]Vi -- Vj]),
i,j=l;i#j
where 7-/is a Heaviside step function (74(z) = 1 if z~>0 and 7-/(z) = 0 if z < 0). If the limit above exists, the correlation dimension dcorr is given by dcorr = lim r~0+
d log C(r) dlogr
Numerical approximations gave us the value dcorr = 1.78. The difference between dcorr and dcap is within numerical error. A detailed proof of chaotic behavior will be given in Section 2.3.8. 2.2.5 ATTRACTING SETS As a rule, for a fixed value of the parameter b, the m a p Fb has several attracting sets; for example, a cluster of invariant curves m a y coexist with a region of chaotic behavior or with stable periodic trajectories. In this subsection we present results of numerical simulations of Eqn. (2.9) for values of the parameters b ranging from 0 to 1.
146
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
Readers can proceed with further experiments at the interactive homepage: http: //phys.ucc.ie/-oll/hysteresis /
Description of Experiments We considered 41 values of the parameter b ranging from 0 to 1: bk = 0.025k,
k = 0 . . . . . 40.
Structually different results of the simulations are presented in Figs. 2.20 and 2.21. All the portraits of the phase space below were first computed with the time integration step hmax - 0.01. To make sure that we do not observe artificial trajectories due to integration error, all the graphs were recalculated with the time integration step hmax - 0.005 yielding the same result. A two-step procedure was used to determine attracting sets. 9 For each bk we considered 100 trajectories with initial conditions at the points (~/2~k/10, 0.2/), where k, l ~ {0, 1 . . . . . 9}; 9 For each of the attracting sets obtained, we computed longer trajectories to determine its type and its long-term behavior. Since only 100 trajectories per each bk are computed, we cannot guarantee that the only attracting sets which exist are those shown. Nonetheless, a test experiment for b = 0.325 with a grid containing a total of 2 500 points covering the intervals 0~
Symmetry of the Solutions Note the following symmetry of Equation (2.9): if x(t) is a solution then Yc(t) = - x ( t -
V~r/2)
(2.11)
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
FIGURE 2.20
Attracting sets for different values of b, 0~b<~0.325.
147
148
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
FIGURE 2.21 Attracting sets for different values of b, 0.425KbK1.
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
149
is also a solution. Thus if we introduce a cross-section Fl ~as the set of pairs
(t mod v/-2rc,x' (t))
satisfying
x(t)
-- -0.5, x'(t) < 0
(2.12)
and the first return map Fb 9 1T --+ IT by following the solutions of (2.9), then the functions Fb and F b~ are symmetric in the natural sense We call two trajectories of Fb symmetric, if the corresponding solutions of (2.9) are symmetric. Analogously, we call a trajectory of Fb selfsymmetric if the corresponding solution of (2.9) is symmetric to itself. Owing to s y m m e t r y (2.11), each solution of (2.9) is either self-symmetric or has a symmetric counterpart. To simplify the description of what is observed we assume that an observed trajectory is self-symmetric if its symmetric 'twin' is not explicitly mentioned. Situations w h e n the twin solution does not cross the plane 1-I will be mentioned separately.
Summary of Observations For b = 0, we have a system without a hysteresis term. This equation can be solved explicitly and has an infinite n u m b e r of beat solutions, i.e., solutions that are the sum of two periodic functions of two different frequencies. The plane l-I is covered with invariant curves, some of which are shown in Fig. 2.20 (a). At b = 0.1 we observe a tear-shaped cluster of type G3, see Fig. 2.20(b). The 'boundary' trajectory of the attractor in (x, x')-coordinates is shown in Fig. 2.19(b). A cluster of this type exists from b = 0.025 to b = 0.425 with a small gap around the parameter value b = 0.275. At b = 0.225 we observe the coexistence of a trajectory of period 4 and a tear-shaped cluster, see Fig. 2.20(c). The period 4 trajectory exists until b = 0.325, where it is replaced by a G2 cluster of invariant curves. At b = 0.25 a new stable period 3 trajectory is observed, see Fig. 2.20 (d). Solutions of (2.9), corresponding to periodic trajectories of periods 3 and 4 are plotted in Figs. 2.22(a) and (b), respectively. Surprisingly, the tear-shaped cluster does not exist at b = 0.275, see Fig. 2.20(e). Instead, one m a y see two different clusters, the first one, of type G1, consisting of the biggest oval set in the picture and the second one, of type G3, consisting of five smaller sets around the first cluster. The period 3 trajectory disappears or loses stability, thus vanishing from the picture. As we approach b = 0.3, a tear-shaped cluster appears again and there are no signs of the five-set attractor, see Fig. 2.20(f). The period 3 trajectory seems to disappear or to lose stability. Near b = 0.325 one point of the period 4 trajectory crosses the line x'(t) = 0 and the period 4 trajectory becomes a trajectory of period 3. Then
CHAPTER 2
150
0
;
'10 15 20 2; (a) b = 0.25, period 3
;
30
!
0.5
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
1'0 1'5 20 2; (b) b = 0.25, period 4
30
' 10 ' 1'5 (d) b = 0.45, period 1
20
2 1
0 -1
-0.5 .
,
9
,
40 10 20 30 (c) b = 0.325, period 7
50
-2
0
1
,
0.5 0 -0.5 5 10 15 (e) b = 0.45, period 2
20
-1
|
1
1
0
0
-1
-1 0
'
;
'
10
'
1;
20
-2
0
'
(g) b = 0.5, period 2 2
2
1
1
0
0
-1
-1
-2
5 10 15 (f) b = 0.45, period 2
20
'5 ' 10 ' 1'5 (h) b = 0.5, period 2
20
2
2
-2
~
0
0
5
10 15 20 25 (i) b = 0.525, period 4
F I G U R E 2.22 G r a p h s t, ries of s p e c i f i e d p e r i o d .
30
-2
,
0
5
,
,
,
,
10 15 20 25 (J) b = 0.525, period 4
30
x(t) of t h e s o l u t i o n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g to F - p e r i o d i c trajecto-
2.2 NUMERICAL EXPERIMENTS
151
this new period 3 trajectory becomes a G2 cluster that consists of the three parts visited consecutively, see Fig. 2.20(g). There is a stable trajectory of period 7 close to the tear-shaped cluster, see Fig. 2.20(h) for a magnification of the periodic trajectory and Fig. 2.22(c) for the corresponding numerical solution of (2.9). At b = 0.425 a three-piece cluster is no longer visible, but there are two stable period 2 trajectories and a stable fixed point, see Fig. 2.21(i). Note that the period 2 trajectory, depicted by the longer line, is symmetric to the fixed point. At b = 0.45 the tear-shaped cluster is no longer visible, but the two period 2 trajectories and the fixed point still exist, see Fig. 2.21(j). Solutions of (2.9) that correspond to the period I and 2 trajectories are given in Figs. 2.22(d), (e) and (f). Comparing Figs. 2.22(d) and (e) one sees that they are indeed symmetric. As b reaches 0.5, the period 2 trajectory, that is, the twin of the fixed point, loses one point as it reaches x ~ = 0. The fixed point still exists, see Fig. 2.21(k). Instead of the other self-symmetric period 2 trajectory, we observe two period 2 trajectories that are symmetric to each other; see Figs. 2.22(g) and (h) for the corresponding solutions of (2.9). As b increases to 0.525, the fixed points, observed at b = 0.5 (see Fig. 2.21(k)), give birth to two type-G2 clusters that are symmetric to each other, see Fig. 2.21(1). Also we see the period doubling of the twin period 2 trajectories that existed at b = 0.5. At b = 0.6 there are two periodic trajectories that are symmetric to each other and consist of 16 and 19 points, see Figs. 2.21(m) and (n). As b increases still further and passes 0.675, a chaos-like structure appears as a set of transition trajectories between the two clusters, and when b is close to I those transition trajectories become separated from both clusters, see Figs. 2.21(o) and (p). Somewhere near b = 1, clusters of invariant curves change their type to G1. There was no detailed study of the bifurcations that may occur as the parameter b varies from 0 to 1. However, it is clear that together with the usual bifurcations, like period doubling, see Figs. 2.21(k) and (1), there exist new types of bifurcations. For example, even small hysteresis perturbations kill all almost-periodic solutions outside the tear-shaped attractor, see Figs. 2.20(a) and (b). Another example is the transformation of the stable four-periodic orbit into the stable three-piece cluster of type G2, see Figs. 2.20(f) and (g). As was mentioned earlier, it may happen when one of the points of the periodic orbit of Fbreaches the line x ~ - v ~2) - 0. It is not clear what kind of bifurcations lead to the appearance of the chaotic attractor, but it seems to be related to the loss of stability of a solution represented by the cluster boundary, see Figs. 2.21(n), (o) and (p).
152
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
2.3 E X A M P L E S O F R I G O R O U S
CONCLUSIONS
2.3.1 GENERAL COMMENTS
Today the literature on differential equations with hysteresis is quite extensive: a rough estimate would be around 1000 titles. A comprehensive classification and review of all the items would take many pages and would require an article all to itself. In this subsection we mention just a small number of works that, in our opinion, have played a important role in the development of the theory and are close to the topics of this paper. We begin with the literature on the fundamental topics of existence, uniqueness and extendibility of the solutions. In most problems those questions are prerequisites for the detailed study of the equations, and results are scattered across numerous papers. The first results in this direction were formulated in [2,22]. Later those results were extended in the paper [23] and in a lecture by M. Krasnosel'skii, [24]. Profound results on existence, uniqueness and extendibility of the solutions were obtained in the series of works by A. Visintin [14,25-37] and by C. Verdi and A. Visintin [38,39]. In particular, these articles contain the first results for partial differential equations with general hysteresis nonlinearities. Methods devised by A. Visintin turned out to be valuable for other types of differential-operator equations as well. Important results for both ordinary and partial differential equations were obtained by P. Krej~i in [40-44] and by P. Krej~f and J. Sprekels [5,45-48]. In the papers by V.I. Borzdyko [49-54] various subtle results for ordinary differential equations were extended to equations with hysteresis nonlinearities. We also mention the articles [55-66,19]. Traditionally, questions of the existence of periodic oscillations and their qualitative analysis have been of major importance for equations with hysteresis nonlinearities. The first results related to the topic of the present article were obtained in [2,22-24]. This direction of research was extensively developed by the school founded by M. Krasnosel'skff. In particular, forced oscillations were studied in [61,67-71]. We mention especially the work in [72], where periodic oscillations are considered in the systems with variable hysteresis nonlinearities. Later problems of nonlinear resonance in systems with hysteresis [73] and problems of absolute stability [74] were considered. We mention again the works ofP. Krej~f [40-43,75-79]. See also [80-99]. Periodic oscillations in systems with nonideal relay nonlinearities form a special topic with its own particular methods. Here we just mention papers [100-106], in which methods used are suitable for systems with Preisach nonlinearities.
2.3 EXAMPLESOF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
153
There is a closely related area that discusses the effects of small hysteresis perturbations on periodic solutions of ODEs, see [83,107]. The averaging method for systems with hysteresis is discussed in [108-115]. Careful analysis of bifurcations in the systems with hysteresis is a relatively new area. We would like to mention the cycle of works by A.M. Krasnosel'skii and D. Rachinskii, see [116,117] and the bibliography therein. See also [84,96,110,118-122]. The appearance of chaos in a dynamical system due to hysteresis nonlinearities was cited by many authors, see [84,119,123-129]. We emphasize, that specific methods to study chaotic behavior in systems with hysteresis are only just beginning to appear, see [128,130,131]. Control of systems with hysteresis, and optimal control in particular, is one of the research areas which is important from an engineering point of view. That particular area is not immediately connected with the topic of this paper and we mention only a few papers that use specific properties of the Preisach nonlinearity: [32,69,132-141]. In the remainder of the paper we offer typical examples of statements about differential equations with hysteresis as well as typical proofs highlighting various techniques. The bulk of the results presented in this paper is connected with the rigorous computer-aided analysis of the chaotic behavior presented in Fig. 2.21(p). Our proofs of chaotic behavior are rigorous, but, of necessity, are computer-aided. Recent developments in computer technology allows one not only to raise the question of approximating the behavior of hysteresis nonlinearities in the computer, but also to combine the computational power together with specially designed algorithms, careful error estimates and topological tools to produce various, otherwise 'inaccessible', results. We would like to emphasize that these proofs rely heavily on both analytical and geometrical techniques. 2.3.2 BASIC STATEMENTS
Equations Consider the following differential-operator equations: dz/dt y(t)
r/(t) x(t)
=
fit, z, y(t)),
= = =
~(r/(t)), (F[r/0lx)(t), (c, z(t)) ;
(2.13)
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
154
x=(c,z)
z'=f(t,z,y(t))
rl(t)
y(t) = ~(n(t))
rl(t ) = (F[Tl(O)]x)(t)
FIGURE 2.23 A block diagram for Eqn. (2.13). with the initial conditions (2.14)
to, z(to) = zo, rl(to) - rio.
Here t ~ R+, z ~ Ra; the scalar function y ( t ) is an output of the Preisach hysteresis nonlinearity; r/(.) is a changing state of this nonlinearity; ~/(t0) = 1/0 is an initial state; (c, z) denotes the scalar product that sends z(.) to a scalar-valued input x(.) = (c, z(.)) of the Preisach nonlinearity. See the block diagram in Fig. 2.23 below. Our basic Eqn. (2.9) can be rewritten in the form (2.13) with a two dimensional vector z = (z (1), z (2)) for f i t , z, y) = ( z (2) - z (1) -}- y -}- sin(v~t))
~
c = (1 0) ~
9
(2.15)
Here we mention again that for any t, the state of the Preisach nonlinearity r/(t) is a characteristic function r/(t; a, ]/) of the measurable set S(t) c FI. We require that the initial states of the Preisach nonlinearity are always admissible, see (2.5). Finally, below we require the map f i t , z, y) to be differentiable. The Eqns. (2.13) above do not embrace differential equations with multidimensional hysteresis nonlinearities (Mises, Tresca and others [142,143,17]), or with multiple scalar hysteresis nonlinearities. Thus, we will also mention, w h e n appropriate, similar, but more general equations dz/dt y(t)
-
r/(t)
-
x(t)
-
f i t , z, y ( t ) ) ,
~(r/(t)), (F[r/0])x(t), Cz(t)
(2.16)
with the initial conditions (2.14). Here y and x can be multidimensional, and C is a matrix of appropriate size.
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
155
E x i s t e n c e of S o l u t i o n s The problems of the existence, uniqueness and continuation of the solution of (2.13) are well understood, see for example [15] and references therein. Here we are going to use a simple result of that kind. For a given initial state % the initial problem (2.13), (2.14) can be considered as a particular case of the problem
dz/dt z(to)
-
fit, z, Vz(t,)), z0;
(2.17)
where V is an operator, that gives a correspondence between the continuous function Vz(t), t~to and a continuous function z(t), t~to, z(to) - zo. PROPOSITION2.3.1. Let the operator V satisfy the Lipschitz condition
IVzl (t) - Vz2(t)l~K max Izl(t) - z2(t)l, to<<.s<<.t
(2.18)
and let us suppose that flt, z, u) be smooth and sublinear in z, i.e. <~a(t, U)IZl 2 -}- b(t, u),
(2.19)
where a(t, u), b(t, u) are continuous. Then there exists a unique solution z(t), ~l(t) defined for all t ~ to. PROOF. The proof uses the contraction m a p p i n g s principle in the usual way. [] To apply this general theorem to Eqn. (2.13) we need the Lipschitz continuity of the Preisach operator. Let @ denote the set of states of the Preisach nonlinearity. A usual way to impose a metric @ is to use the L 1-type metric
/91(Ul, Y/2) -- IH lUl(~, fl) -- ~2( ~, fl)l d#;
(2.20)
that is a measure of the symmetric difference between the sets St/1 and Su2. With respect to this metric the state space of the Preisach nonlinearity is partitioned into the natural equivalence classes. The correctness of the partitioning is justified in [15], where it is s h o w n that if the functions r/l(t0), r/2(t0) E (~ satisfy/91(1'/1(t0), r/2(t0)) -- 0 then Pl (/'/l(t), r/2(t)) - 0 at every m o m e n t t~to for the variable states ~lj(t) = (F[~lj(to)]x)(t). This also implies trivially the equality ul - u2 of the outputs uj(t) - ~(rlj(t)).
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
156
We suppose that #0 has compact support and that its density h(a, ]/) with respect to the Lebesgue measure is bounded. In other words there exists 7,, h, > 0 such that Ih(~,]~)l h(c~,fl)
~ =
h, for all (a,]/) ~ 11; 0 whenever a < ] / - 7 , .
(2.21)
As proved in [15], these relations imply the global Lipschitz continuity of the Preisach nonlinearity. More precisely, for every pair of continuous inputs xj 9 ~+ ~ ~ and admissible initial states r/j(t0), the variable states tlj(') = (F[wO]xj)(.) satisfy for each t>~to Pl (r/1 (t), ~/2(t0))~
(2.22)
with LF = 2h,7,, where IIXlIc[o,t] -- max{lx(r)l : to<<.r<~t}. The proof of this estimate is based on a simple explicit algorithm to construct variable states rlj(.); we do not consider it here. From the definition of the functional q~ it follows that 1~0/1) - ~(r/2)l~
t]2)
for all
g/l, t/2 E l~
2, which, together with (2.22), implies the estimate
IlUl --
UalIc[o,t]~2Pl (W0, W02) q- 2LFIIXl -- x211C[O,t]for the outputs uj(.) = ((I)(wj)) (.) of the Preisach nonlinearity at each moment t~>0. Now we obtain as a corollary of the general Proposition 2.3.1 the following statement concerning equations with the Preisach nonlinearity. LEMMA2.3.1. Let #0 have compact support and let its density h(a, fl) with respect
to the Lebesgue measure be bounded:
~(s) = f fs h(a, ~) da d~,
where
S c l-I,
sup Ihl < cx~.
Suppose that the estimate {z, flt, z, u)) <~a(t, U)IZ]
2 -Jr- b(t,
u),
holds, where a(t, u), b(t, u) are continuous functions. Then for all initial conditions (2.14) there exists a unique solution z(t), rl(t ) defined for all t>>.to. Using the standard limit constructions, this Lemma can be further improved as follows:
157
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
PROPOSITION2.3.2. Let the measure #() have a locally bounded density h(a, fl)
with respect to the Lebesgue measure: #(S) = f fs h(a, fl)dadfl,
where
sup
Ihl < H(R) < cx~, R > O.
- R ~ oe< fl <~R
Suppose that the estimate (z, f(t, z, u)) <.a(t, U)IZ] 2 if- b(t, u), holds, where a(t, u), b(t, u) are continuous functions. Then for all initial conditions (2.14) there exists a unique solution z(t), rl(t) defined for all t>~to. Moreover, this solution continuously depends on the initial conditions. A number of important hysteresis nonlinearities, e.g. the von Mises nonlinearity (see [15]), do not satisfy the Lipschitz condition (2.18). In such a case it is convenient to use analogues of Proposition 2.3.1 that use Sobolev spaces. See for example Lemma 2.1 in [83].
Dissipativity Recall that the equation is r dissipative (where r is a nonnegative number, the dissipativity radius) if any solution of the system satisfies
Iz(t)l<<.r for all sufficiently large t. Some natural uniformity conditions should also be intact. Similar to the existence of solutions, dissipativity is not only important in itself, but it also plays a fundamental role in the analysis of the system (2.13). Since the outputs of Preisach hysteresis nonlinearities are bounded, the ordinary differential equation
z' = f(t, z, O) can be used as an 'approximation' for a differential Eqn. (2.13) at infinity. Much progress has been achieved in this way. Just as an example we formulate a 'toy' statement in this direction. PROPOSITION2.3.3. Let (z, f(t, z, u)) <~- aizl 2 -Jr-b(lul) where b(p) is a continuous function. Then the Eqn. (2.13) is dissipative.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
158
u(t) =fit, x, y(t))
y(t) =
x(t) = (c, (pI-A)-lb) u(t)
11 O(rl(t))
rl(t) = (r[rl(O)lx) (t)
_...,,,
FIGURE 2.24 A block diagram for Eqn. (2.23). We also give a simple example based on the following specialization of the main equations: d z / d t = A z 4- bu(t), u(t) = fit, x(t), y(t)), y(t) = ~(r/(t)), (2.23) r/(t) = (F[r/0]x)(t), x(t) = (c, z(t)) . Here A is a square matrix, b, c are vectors; f is a differentiable function. This type of equations is especially important for control theory. It can be illustrated by the block diagram in Fig. 2.24. We consider the linear system d z / d t = A z + bu(t),
x(t) = (c, z(t)) ,
where u(t) is an input and x(t) is the corresponding output. Recall that the function W(p; A, b, c) = ( ( p I - a ) - l b , c) (2.24) of a complex variable p is called the transfer function of this system. The number rr(A, b, c) max IW(iog;A, b, c)l (2.25) - - ( X ) < (.O < ( X )
traditionally plays an important role in linear systems theory. PROPOSITION2.3.4. Suppose that the matrix A is Hurwitz, and f satisfies the estimate If(t, x, y)lK~lx] + b(lyl) (2.26) where F~< rr(A, b, c) -1, and b(p) is a continuous function. Then the Eqn. (2.23) is dissipative.
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
159
Some effective estimates for r can be given; more general systems, containing numbers of linear and nonlinear links were considered in [144]. We note also an important particular case w h e n the impulse characteristic I(t; A, b, c) = {eAtb, c} (2.27) (see [145]) is non-negative:
I(t; A, b, c)>~O,
t>~O.
(2.28)
This case is c o m m o n in control theory; some explicit conditions that guarantee the inequality (2.28) can be found in [146]. In this case the n u m b e r (2.25) can be calculated by the following formula: if(A, b, c) = II/V(O; A, b, c)l--- (A -lb, c}.
(2.29)
As an illustrative example we consider the semilinear Duffing equations with hysteresis
x" + ax ~+ x = fit, x, u(t)), u(t) = ~(r/(t)), ~l(t) = (F[r/0]x)(t).
a>0 (2.30)
This can be considered as the system (2.23) with
A_A(a)_(
-10
-a1 ),
b=b(a)=(O) 1
'
c = c(a) = ( 1 0 t " (2.31)
In this case r
-1 = e(A(a), b(a), c(a)) -1
/
av/1 - (a/2) 2, 1,
if a ~ / 2 , otherwise,
(2.32)
see Fig. 2.25 below. COROLLARY2.3.1. Suppose that the matrix A is Hurwitz, and f satisfies the esti-
mate where a < r dissipative.
If(t, x, y)l~aJxJ + b(lyi) -1, and b(p) is a continuous function. Then the Eqn. (2.23) is
Note that the problem of dissipativity of (2.9) is not solved, to the best of our knowledge, even for small positive b. 1 1By correcting the proofs of this Chapter the authors informed that this problem has been solved. The results are to be published in PhysicaB.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
160
f 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0'.s
. . . .
i
. . . .
1'.5
. . . .
FIGURE 2.25 The function r
Poincare Map It is difficult to analyse the dynamics of (2.13) using a conventional dynamical system approach. But some, rather weak, assumptions about the measure of the Preisach nonlinearity and the behavior of trajectories allow us to construct an n-dimensional map that is easy to work with. Firstly we assume that the support of the Preisach measure # is located below the line ] / = ~, i.e. that h(~, fl) = 0 for all ]/~>~. Secondly, we assume that the trajectory z(t), rl(t) of (2.13) with initial conditions (2.14) satisfies V t~to 3t, > t ' x ( t , )
= (c, z(t,)) = ~.
(2.33)
Note that at every moment t. satisfying the conditions above all the 'meaningful relays' of the Preisach nonlinearity (those, that contribute to the output) are 'on'. More formally let tl, t2 be time moments satisfying (2.33). By the definition of the Preisach nonlinearity, both S,(tl), Sr/(t2) contain {(a, fl) : a~
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
161
FIGURE 2.26 Poincare map. introduce a first return map F:~x~aN{(c,z)=y}--,
~x~aN{(c,z)=y}
from the hyperplane x = 7 to itself (see Fig. 2.26). If the right-hand sideflt, z, u) of Eqns. (2.13) does not depend on time, the first return map F 9 ~a-1 ~_~ ~a-1 will be an ordinary Poincare map. If fit, z, u) is T-periodic in time, then F is a suspension map and is acting on infinite cylinder (~ m o d T) x ~d N {(c, z) -- y}. By the Lipschitz properties of the solutions of (2.13), the map F is Lipschitz everywhere it exists except the preimage of the set x' -- (c,flt, z, (I)(r/,))} -- 0, where r/,(~, fl) -- I for all 2.3.3 EXISTENCE AND LOCATION OF PERIODIC OSCILLATIONS
First Examples Let the right-hand side of Eqn. (2.13) be periodic in t with the minimal period T. As soon as the shift operator ~b(t0, z0, ~/0; t) = (z(t), ~l(t))
(2.34)
for the time t - to along the trajectories of (2.13) with the initial conditions (2.14) defined, we can treat the T-periodic solutions as fixed points of the shift operator, and we can use different topological tools to investigate the existence and properties of such fixed points. Here the possibility of treating the internal states as elements of appropriate functional spaces is important. In particular, for the Preisach model this is possible, due to the standard representation, see Subsection 2.4.1 below.
162
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
PROPOSITION2.3.5. Let Eqn. (2.13) be dissipative. Then there exists at least one T-periodic solution. We formulate the simplest explicit corollary, for the following semilinear Duffing equation with hysteresis: x" + ax' + x u(t) r/(t)
= fit, x, u(t)), = (I)01(t)), = (F[~/0]x)(t).
a>0, (2.35)
COROLLARY2.3.2. Let a>~V~and the estimate (2.26) holdfor some a < 1, and suppose that #0 has a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Then there exists at least one T-periodic solution. Proposition 2.3.5 cannot be applied to the analysis of the periodic oscillation in Eqn. (2.9), whose dissipativity has not yet been proved. However, convenient statements can be formulated in terms of asymptotic derivatives. Recall that a m a p p i n g f 9 ~a ~ ~a is said to be asymptotically linear in x if fit, x, y) = Ax + W(t, x, y) (2.36) where A is a linear operator and IW(t, x, Y)l = o(Ixl) as Ixl --* oo. The linear mapping A is the asymptotic derivative off. PROPOSITION2.3.6. Let f have an asymptotic derivative A in x, and suppose that the matrix A does not have purely imaginary eigenvalues of theform iTn. Suppose further that #0 has a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Then there exists at least one T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.35). COROLLARY2.3.3. Let thefunction f be uniformly bounded and suppose that either a ~ O, or T is not a multiple of 2re. Let #0 have a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Then there exists at least one T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.35).
The Role of the Topological Degree Theory The propositions above are simple corollaries of more general statements that have been formulated in the language of topological degree theory. If F 9 Ra ~ Ra is a continuous mapping, D c ~a is a bounded open set, and z. ~ ~a does not belong to the image F(OD) of the boundary cgD of D, then the symbol deg(F, D, z.) denotes the topological degree [147] o f f at y with respect to D. If 0 ~ F(SD), then the number ~(F, D) = deg(f, D, 0) is well defined and it is called the rotation of the vector field F at 8D. The
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
163
/ /
\,
" 43 '~~...."~~~,X .. , 1 11 ~~5 [/1087 5%D ~~8 910................... 6 /
/
! ,
"\
",
~
II
9 ......
~,(F(r
D) = 1
FIGURE 2.27 Rotation of vector field.
properties of the n u m b e r ?(F, D) are described in detail in [148]. If a is an isolated zero of the m a p p i n g f , then the index Ind(a, F) is defined as the c o m m o n value of the n u m b e r s ?(F, Ba(e)), where 13a(E) denotes the open ball of radius e centered at a, e > 0 is sufficiently small. Thus, the index measures the multiplicity of an isolated root a of the equation F(z) - O. If all roots of the equation F(z) = 0 located inside D are isolated then the Kronecker formula (Theorem 4.3, [148]) states that 7(F, D) is the sum of indices of all such roots. The Kronecker formula reduces to the classical A r g u m e n t Principle in complex analysis if F : C ~-, C is analytic. For d = 2 the n u m b e r 7(F, D) coincides with the w i n d i n g number, and thus has a very simple and convenient geometrical interpretation. Let D be a d o m a i n in N2 which is b o u n d e d by a simple closed curve 0D and let F be a continuous mapping, such that F(z) ~= 0 for all z ~ 0D. We will interpret F(z), z ~ 0D as a vector which begins at the point z, see Fig. 2.27. We choose a point z0 at ~?D, then go around c~D anticlockwise and measure h o w m a n y full rotations our vector field will make. We obtain an integer, and this is the rotation or w i n d i n g n u m b e r of a vector field at 0D. An instructive example of the use of rotation theory in the analysis of systems with hysteresis is given below. We denote by O(y) = z(T; y) where z(t) is the solution of the initial value problem
z' = fit, z, 0),
z(O) - y.
The index at infinity I n d ( ~ , F) is defined as the c o m m o n value of the n u m b e r s 7(F, B0(e)) for all sufficiently large r.
164
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
PROPOSITION2.3.7. Let the derivative fz(t, z, u) be uniformly bounded. Suppose that I~(Y) - Yl --* oo as lYl --+ oo, and that Ind(oo, F) is not zero. Finally, let
!~0 have a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Then there exists at least one T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.35). In particular it is possible to prove the following statement. PROPOSITION2.3.8. Let ~(y) = z(T; y) where z(t; y) 9 ~ x [~2 ~ R2 is the solution of Eqn. (2.13) with the right hand sides (2.15) with z(O) = y and b = O. Then Ind(oo, 6) = 1,
and there exists at least one T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.9).
Topological Degree and Poincare Mapping If the Poincare mapping Fb of (2.9) is well defined in some area of FI = {v = (v (1) , v (2)) }, then corresponding to its fixed points are periodic solutions of (2.9). It is important that in this case the Poincare mapping is defined on a finite-dimensional cylinder (in contrast to the shift mapping). Thus here we can use simpler, and more powerful, tools including straightforward numerical calculation of the topological degree. For instance we can prove rigorously that the periodic solutions plotted in Fig. 2.22 do exist. PROPOSITION2.3.9. All thefunctions plotted in Fig. 2.22, except part (c), coincide, within a precision 0.001, with periodic solutions of Eqn. (2.9) with the appropriate
values of the parameter b. This proposition follows from the numerical construction of the Poincare mapping, see the algorithm in Subsection 2.4.3, combined with the algorithm for the topological degree in two dimensions described in Subsection 2.4.3. In a similar way we can guarantee that the centers of the clusters also correspond to the periodic solutions. As was mentioned earlier for b = 1, there are two clusters of solutions that are twinned to each other. The periodic solution corresponding to the center of one cluster is given in Fig. 2.28 (the solution corresponding to the center of the other cluster is symmetric to the one shown). PROPOSITION2.3.10. The map F1 has a fixed point Vl satisfying IV1 - -
(1.9105, 2.2502)1 < 0.001.
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS 3
i
!
!
165
|
|
|
2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
FIGURE 2.28 Solution of (2.9), b = I corresponding to a center of the cluster.
The solution of (2.9) with b = 1 corresponding to vl is 2v~z-periodic; see Fig. 2.28. M a n y unstable solutions (that are not visible as a limit set of the iterations of the Poincare m a p with r a n d o m initial conditions) can also be located in this way. For the case b = 1, we m a d e an extensive search and found two more fixed points of the Poincare map, one of which is ~/27r periodic. PROPOSITION2.3.11. The map F1 has fixed points V2 and V3 satisfying Iv2 - (1.8538, 1.0162)1 < 0.001,
IV3 --
(2.59308, 1.283)1 < 0.001.
The solution of (2.9) with b = 1 corresponding to v2 is ~/-2rc-periodic, while the solution corresponding to v3 is 3. ~/2rc-periodic; see Fig. 2.29. Notice that the solution of (2.9) corresponding to v2 is not self-symmetric, and thus has a symmetric counterpart. Proposition 2.3.8 states that the topological degree of the time V ~ shift operator on some big circles is equal to 1. By the s y m m e t r y (2.11) each of the ~/2~-periodic solutions either has a symmetric counterpart or is self-symmetric. Thus, since no self-symmetric solution was found, the topological degree should be even, which contradicts Corollary 2.3.3. This 'contradiction' will be resolved in the next subsection.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
166
2
i
i
i
i
i
i
5
6
2
'
9
i
9
'
;
'
!
9
!
1.5
0.5 0
0
'
i
.
,
1
2
.
3
.
.
.
4
7
-2
0
(a) q2-~-periodic solution
llO
115
'
'
20
(b) 3" q2-g-periodic solution
FIGURE 2.29 Unstable periodic solutions of (2.9), b = 1.
x(t) = (c, ( p l - A ) - l b }
u(t)
U
X
u(t) = f (t, x, y(t))
~
FIGURE 2.30 A block diagram for Eqn. (2.37).
The solution corresponding to v2 will play an important role in the rigorous investigation of chaotic behavior below.
Harmonic Balance In finding the approximate location of periodic solutions of a differential equation a very convenient tool is the method of harmonic balance, see for instance [149] and the bibliography therein. Let us first consider the system without hysteresis, as shown in Fig. 2.30, where the functionf(t, x) is T-periodic in t. This system is given by the equations dz/dt u(t) x(t)
-
Az + bu(t),
= =
f i t , x(t)), (c, z ( t ) ) .
(2.37)
167
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
In the simplest case we search for the T-periodic solutions x(t) of this equation in the form x,(t) - ~ + b c o s ( 2 ~ t / T ) 4- ~ sin(2~t/T).
Moreover, we approximate the function u,(t) = fit, x,(t)) by its first harmonic f , ( t , x,(t)) - ~ 4- b c o s ( 2 ~ t / T ) 4- ~ sin(2~t/T), where a-
=
b-
--
=
T2 f T f l t ' x,(t)) dt, T2 f ~ cos(2~t/T)f(t, x,(t)) dt,
(2.38)
2
T fo sin(2~t/T)f(t, x,(t)) dt.
Gathering the terms in x, = (c, (pI - A) -1 blf, (t, x,) we obtain the following formulas for the coefficients of x, W(0)~ ~ ( W ( i T ) ) b - ~(W(iT))~ ~(W(iT))b 4- ~(W(iT))~
= =
~, b, ~.
(2.39)
For equations with hysteresis the important point is that for the same Tperiodic input x(t), a number of periodic outputs y(t) is possible. Let us consider our standard equation (2.9) as an example. Recall that the Preisach nonlinearity P has our standard measure (2.8) and T = V ~ . Let x(t) have one maximum Xmax ~ 0 . 5 and one m i n i m u m --0.5~Xmin o n the interval [0, ~/2~). Then each function y(t; 1~)
[ K 4- (x(t) 4- 0.5)2/2 4- (Xmax - x(t))(Xmin 4- 0.5),
I
/C 4- (Xmax 4- 0 . 5 ) 2 / 2 -- (Xmax -- x(t))2/2,
iff x'(t) > 0, iff x ' ( t ) ~ 0
(2.40) is a possible periodic output for K ~ [0; (0.5 - Xmax)(Xmin 4- 0.5)]. Instead of the system (2.38) we consider the one-parameter family F~ =
~/T fov ~ b(2y(t; c) - 1)dt,
=
- ~ fo~
cos(,/2t)b(2y(t; c) - 1)dt,
=
~/T fo~
sinG/2t)b(2y(t; c) - 1)dt"
(2.41)
where b now is the parameter from (2.9) and x(t) (in the definition of y(t; K)) is given by x(t) = a 4- b cos(~/2t) 4- c sin(v~t). Here we will be interested in the approximate self-symmetric solution of Eqn. (2.9). In this case a - 0 and we can look for a solution of the form x(t) -- r sin(v~t 4- co),
(2.42)
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
168
0.4 0 . 8 ~
0.2
0.6
--......,.
0.4
4
0.2
-0.2 .
.
.
0.2
.
.
0.4
.
.
0.6
.
0.8
1
-0.4
(a) Positive solution r(b) of (44)
(b) Solution x, of (42) for b = 1
FIGURE 2.31 Harmonic balance of Eqn. (2.9).
w h e r e the p a r a m e t e r K in the definition of y(t; K) satisfies K = (0.5 - r)(r + 0.5)/2. Then the corresponding possible o u t p u t of the Preisach m o d e l has form + (r sin(~/'2t + co) 4- 0.5)2/2 4- (r - r sin(~/-2t 4- o9))(0.5 - r), iff (t m o d v/-2~z) ~ [~z/~/-2 - o9, 3~/~/2 - o9],
y(t; K) = K + (r + 0.5)2/2 - (r - r sin(~/2t + o9))2/2, iff (t m o d ~ ) ~ [~/~/2 - co, 3~/~F2 - o9]. (2.43) This gives us the system of equations for r and o9. In particular, the equation for the a m p l i t u d e r can be written explicitly as 9 - 9r 2 - 72br 3 - 144b2r 4 -
256b2r 4
= 0.
(2.44)
This equation has a unique positive solution, r(b) and Fig. 2.31(a) is the corresponding plot. We can see that, for b > 0.5 approximately we can expect the existence of a self-symmetric solution x(t; b) with the a m p l i t u d e strictly less than 0.5. For instance, the expected function x(t; 1) is plotted in Fig. 2.31(b). Since for some values of b the a m p l i t u d e is significantly less than 0.5, this solution cannot always be found by the Poincare m a p p i n g analysis. Consider a p r o b l e m of localization of a self-symmetric solution Xss for Eqn. (2.9) with b = 1. We r e m i n d the reader that Xss(t) = -Xss(t - V ~ ) . We introduce an auxiliary m a p G in the following way. Let
t = to, x(to) = xo, x'(to) - 0
(2.45)
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS 0.4
0.4 9
s 9
0.2
I
.,
/
~
' i i i , r , i 'l i ,
i
'
-0.36
s
0.2 -~9 . . . . . . . . . .
e
\
i
i
I t
169
/
I
\ -0.2
\
\
-0.4
I
3
4
,
-0.2
/ ~
iI I
5
*'',
I
6
,
I
7
-0.4
,
8
(a) Numerical approximation
FIGURE 2.32
3
4 5 6 7 (b) Harmonic balance, Figure 31 (b) and picture (a) combined
Self-symmetric solution of (2.9) for b = 1.
and r/(t0) --
1 1 0
(a, fl) 9 a ~ / / ~ ( 0 . 5
+ x0)/2,-0.5~:~K
- x0,
(~, fl) 9 - x o < . a < . ~ x o , otherwise,
(2.46)
be the initial c o n d i t i o n s of (2.9). C o n s i d e r a shift along the trajectories of (2.9) for the time tl - to such that x'(t) y~ 0, to < t < tl, x'(tl) = 0. Define G as (x0, to) ~ ( - x ( t l ) , tl - ~/27r). LEMMA 2.3.2. Let (xo, to) be a fixed point of G. Then the trajectory x(t) of (2.9)
with initial conditions (2.45), (2.46) is self-symmetric. LEMMA 2.3.3. Let b = 1. There is a fixed point (x,, t,) of G satisfying [(x,, t,) - (0.38334, 3.17052)1~0.0001.
(2.47)
A c o m p u t e r - a s s i s t e d p r o o f can be c o n s t r u c t e d u s i n g t e c h n i q u e s f r o m Section 2.4.3. The self-symmetric s o l u t i o n is s h o w n in Fig. 2.32. N o t e that for K > 0 small e n o u g h , each function Xss (t) 4- K is also a (nons y m m e t r i c ) p e r i o d i c solution. Careful n u m e r i c a l e x p e r i m e n t s s u g g e s t that all these solutions are unstable. F u r t h e r details can be f o u n d in Subsection 2.3.5. 2 . 3 . 4 LIMIT BEHAVIOR OF S O L U T I O N S
Limiting Periodicity and Lyapunov Stability of Solutions Figure 2.13 s h o w s one of the typical b e h a v i o r s of s y s t e m s w i t h hysteresis nonlinearities: each solution t e n d s t o w a r d a T-periodic one; different
170
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
initial conditions result in different limits; and limit T-periodic functions continuously depend on the initial conditions. Such a behavior is rare for the ordinary differential equations without hysteresis. In this subsection we consider this behavior in detail.
Applications of the Contraction Mapping Principle We remind the reader that the function z(t), t~to is called limiting T-periodic if there exists T-periodic function zoo(t) such that lim I z ( t ) - z~(t)l--, 0. t--+oo We consider the equations of the form (2.23). Suppose that the function f is Lipschitz-continuous in x and in z with the corresponding constants 7x and 7z. We begin with a general statement about the equations
dz/dt x(t)
= -
Az + bf (t, x(t), Vx(t)), (c, z(t))
(2.48)
where V is an operator, which maps the scalar continuous function x(t), t ~ to to a continuous function Vx(t), t~to, x(to) - (c, zo). Introduce the number
rT.(A, b, c) =
/0
]I(t; A, b, c)I dt -
)
I eAtb, c ] dt,
see (2.27). PROPOSITION2.3.12. Let the operator V satisfy the Lipschitz condition (2.18), and
let Vx(t) be a limiting periodic function for any limiting periodic x(t). Finally, let us suppose that the inequality ~x + 7z ~c < rr. (A, b, c) -] holds. Then any solution of Eqn. (2.48) is a limiting T-periodic function. The proof is simple but instructive. By Proposition 2.3.1 each solution of Eqn. (2.48) is bounded. Thus, the corresponding function x(t) = (c, z(t)) is a unique solution of the integral equation
x(t) - f l ( c, eA(t-S)b)f(s, x(s), Vx(s)) ds + ~(t), where ~(t) = (c, zo(t)) and zo(t) is the solution of the homogeneous equation z t - Az, z(O) = zo. It is straightforward to show that the integral
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
171
operator V0 given by
Vox(t) -- i i (c, eA(t-S)b}f(s , x(s)), Vx(s)) ds + {(t) is contracting and the result follows. [] It is well known [15] that the Preisach nonlinearity transports limiting periodic inputs into limiting periodic outputs. Thus, the proposition above immediately implies the following corollary. COROLLARY2.3.4. Let the measure #0 have a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure and let the estimates (2.21) hold. Finally suppose that the inequality 2x + 2h,y,2z < rr,(A, b, C) -1
holds. Then any solution of Eqn. (2.48) is a limiting T-periodic function. Moreover, each of these solutions is Lyapunov stable. We note that r~,(A, b, c)~>r~(A, b, c), and the equality cr,(A, b, c) = r~(A, b, c) holds if and only if the impulse response I(t; A, b, c) is nonnegative. Thus it is natural to find out whether the analog of this result is true with rr(A, b, c) instead of r~, (A, b, c). Firstly, we consider an analog of Proposition 2.3.12. PROPOSITION2.3.13. Let the operator V satisfy the Lipschitz condition (2.18), and let Vx(t) be a limiting periodic function for any limiting periodic x(t). Let us also suppose that the inequality 7x < r~(A, b, c) -1 holds. Then for any sufficiently small e > 0, any solution of the equation
dz/dt x(t)
= =
Az + bf (t, x(t), eVx(t)) , (c, z(t))
is a limiting T-periodic function. The proof is similar to that of Proposition 2.3.12, and additionally uses the estimates of the limit norm from [150,151]. Secondly, we consider equations of the form
dz/ d t u(t) r/(t) x(t)
= = = =
Az + b (fit, x(t), eu(t)) , (I)(r/(t)), (F[r/0lx)(t), (c, z(t)) .
(2.49)
These equations are similar to (2.23), except that there is a small parameter E in the first line.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
172
1
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2 .
0.5
.
.
1
.
1.5
.
2
(a) The function o, (a)
2.5
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
(b) The function t~, (a) against o(a)
FIGURE 2.33 Graphs of rT(a), ~, (a). COROLLARY2.3.5. Let the measure # 0 have a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Suppose that the inequality 7x < r~(A, b, c) -1 holds. Then for a small e > 0 any solution of Eqn. (2.49) is a limiting T-periodic function. Moreover, all of these solutions are Lyapunov stable. Examples in [2] show that from the conditions of the corollary one may observe that different initial conditions may result in different limiting periodic functions and thus do not enjoy the property of the asymptotic stability. Let us consider, as usual, the semilinear Duffing equation with hysteresis (2.30). In this case the corresponding function rr,(a) = r~,(A(a), b(a), c(a)), see (2.31), can be calculated explicitly:
rr,(a) =
1 - e x p 0 z a / ( 4 - a2)) 1 + exp0za/(4 - a2)) 1
if 0~aK2 ifa > 2,
see Fig. 2.33 below.
Applications of Monotonicity Here we proceed with the analysis of Eqn. (2.23) and restrict our discussion to the case where F is a Preisach operator with a measure #0 which has a locally bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Let us consider also the corresponding linear system d z / d t - Az + bx, (2.50) x(t) = (c, z(t)) . This linear system is called regular, if the impulse characteristic
bc --(ceZtb)
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
173
is positive for t > 0, the system (2.50) is controllable [145], the rightmost eigenvalue of the matrix A is real, negative and simple, and, finally, the corresponding eigenvector is not orthogonal to the vector c. If the system is regular, then the set ]C = co{z : z = 2eAtb; ,~, t>~0} is a solid cone [152]. In this paragraph we use the notation zl>~z2 as a synonym of Zl - z2 ~ /C. The set of states of the Preisach model is also naturally semi-ordered. LEMMA2.3.4. Let the linear system (2.50) be regular, and suppose that the function f increases in x and u. Then the shift operator along the trajectories of Eqn. (2.23) is monotone: the inequalities for the initial conditions z(to) ~>~(t0),
r/(t0) ~>~ (t0)
imply z(t)>~(t),
rl(t)>~fl(t) for all t>>,to.
This lemma allows us to use the methods of semi-ordered spaces, see [153]. PROPOSITION2.3.14. Let the linear system (2.50) be regular, the function f increase in x and u, and suppose that the estimate [fit, x, u)l~
(2.51)
holds for some r~ < (c, A -1 b)and a continuous b(t, u). Then the system (2.23) has a periodic solution, which is stable in the Lyapunov sense. This assertion follows from the theory of correct fixed points of monotone operators, see [154] and the bibliography therein. We discuss its corollary for the semilinear Duffing equation with hysteresis x" + ax' + x = fit, x, u(t)), u(t) - ~(r/(t)), (2.52) r/(t) = (F[r/0]x)(t). COROLLARY2.3.6. Let a > 2, the function f increase in x and u, and the estimate (2.51) hold for some F~< 1. Then the system (2.52) has a periodic solution, stable in the Lyapunov sense. We emphasize that although Proposition 2.3.14 and Corollary 2.3.6 are applicable only to the systems with a regular linear part, they do not require constraints on the Lipschitz constant of the hysteresis operator.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
174
Asymptotic Stability Introduction Amethod for the investigation of the stability of oscillations in systems with hysteresis nonlinearities, briefly described in Subsection 2.3.4, was suggested in [2] and further refined in [155]. However, this approach has the following drawbacks: (i) it requires the operators F[z0] to be (C ~ C)-Lipschitz continuous, and (ii) it aims at proving Lyapunov stability rather than asymptotic stability. With regard to (i) we note that although some hysteresis nonlinearities (in particular in the scalar case m = 1) are (C ~ C)-Lipschitz continuous, some other fundamental models, for example the Duhem model and the model considered by Bliman and Sorine (see e.g. [67]), do not enjoy this property. Another approach considered in Subsection 2.3.4, see also [155], that works for systems with discontinuous nonlinearities, requires monotonicity properties in the sense of the theory of semi-ordered spaces (see details in [155], p.135), which again do not hold for typical nonscalar models. Note also that the methods from [156] can be applied to prove the existence of a periodic solution and to solve some bifurcation problems, but not to analyze asymptotic stability. Below we consider a method for the analysis of asymptotic stability for systems with small hysteresis nonlinearities given in the paper [83]. Normal Hysteresis Nonlinearity Let W 1'1 be the Banach space of absolutely continuous functions u : [0, t] ~-~ Nm, equipped with the standard norm Ilullwt~,~ = lu(O)l +
L
lu'(s)l ds.
We define Wllo': - { u " ~+ ~ R m, Ul[0,t ] E W 1'1}. Let (M, p,) be a metric space describing the state of the nonlinearity. A nonlinearity F" Wllo'1 x M ~ C(~+; ~m)is called normal nonlinearity with threshold h > 0, if it satisfies the Volterra property u(s) = v(s),
OKs<.t,
(F[~/0]u)(t) -- (F[r/0]v)(t),
implies for all
t~>0,
(2.53)
(F[(F[rlo]u)(tl)]v)(t2 - tl) =- (F[r/0lu)(t2)
(2.54)
the semigroup property
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
175
where v(t) = u(t - tl), the Lipschitz condition (N1) and the contraction property (N2): (N1) There exists a constant 7u > 0 s u c h that for every r/0 E M, every t ~ s ~ O and every u, v ~ W 1'1 holds p,((F[~/0]u)(s), (F[rlo]V)(S))~TullU-Vllwlt.1. (N2) There exists a continuous and b o u n d e d function q : ~+ ~ q(a) < I for ~ > h such that P~((F[r/0]u)(t), (F[rll]u)(t))~q(osctu)pnOlo,
~+ with
~11)
holds for all t~0, all ~/0, ~1 E M and all u e W~ '1 . Here OSCtU is defined as sup0~
Let the right-hand side of the system
z' = f(t, z)
(2.55)
be continuous and Lipschitz-continuous in z. Then (2.55) has a unique solution z = z(t; zo) for any given initial condition z(0) = z0, which moreover d e p e n d s continuously on z0. Let z 9 ~+ --~ ~a be any solution of (2.55) and let U c R a be some neighborhood of z(0). We say that the solution z is U-uniformly stable (cf. [158], Definition 1.1, p. 103), if lim
sup
"~----~ o o
zoEU, t>r
Iz(t;z0)-z(t)l
= 0.
(2.56)
We introduce a similar concept, for the special case of Eqn. (2.16), which is a small perturbation of (2.55);
d z / d t = f i t , z) + ~g(z, r/(t)),
(2.57)
r/(t) = (F[r/0]x) (t),
(2.58)
x(t) = Cz(t) .
(2.59)
Here C 9 R a ~ [~m is linear. The appropriate block diagram is given in Fig. 2.34. By a solution of (2.57)-(2.59) we m e a n a classical solution, that is, a pair of functions z 9 ~+ ~ ~a and r/9 ~+ ~ M where z is continuously differentiable, r/is continuous, and (2.57)-(2.59) hold at every point t~0.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
176
z'(t) = f(t, z(t)) + eg(z(t), rl(t))
x(t)-Cz(t)
rl(t ) = r [Tl(0)]x(t)
FIGURE 2.34 A block diagram of (2.57)-(2.59).
Recall that (2.57)-(2.59) are said to be well posed if the corresponding initial value problem with initial conditions z(0) = z0,
r/(0) - r/0,
(2.60)
has a unique solution (z(t), r/(t)) = (z ~ (t; z0, r/0), r/~(t; z0, r/0)),
t>~0
(2.61)
for every z0 ~ R d and every r/0 ~ M, which moreover depends continuously on (z0, r/0). Let (z, r/) 9 0~+ --~ ~d x M be a solution of the well-posed system (2.57), (2.58) and U be some neighborhood of z(0). We say that (z, r/) is Uuniformly stable if lim
sup
[z~(t; zo, r/o) - z(t)l = 0,
(2.62)
z-->oo zoEU, rlo~M,t> z
lim
-c--->oo
sup
p,(r/~ (t; z0, r/0), r/(t)) - 0 .
(2.63)
zo~U, rio~M,t> z
Note that this stability is global with respect to r/0 ~ M. This is a natural requirement, because r/0 is connected to the initial state of the perturbation which usually can neither be controlled nor observed. Moreover, we say that (z, r/) is globally asymptotically stable, if it is U-uniformly stable for each b o u n d e d neighborhood U of z(0). Let ZT " ~+ --* E d be a T-periodic solution of the unperturbed system (2.55) for some period T > 0. For the purpose of this subsection, we want to define a specific notion of stability of ZT related to the perturbed system z'-fit,
z) + ~(t),
z(0) - z0,
(2.64)
whose unique solution we denote by z(t; z0, ~(-)), and where ~ 9 R~+ - , ~a represents some general continuous perturbation. Specifically, we say that the functionf is T-convergent near zw('), if there exist positive numbers ec,
177
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
6c, 7c, an auxiliary norm ]]. IIc on ~a, a n d a constant qc E (0, 1) such that the relations ]z0 - ZT(0)], ]Y0 -- ZT(0)] < bc
and
]~l(t)],
]~2(t)]~ec, 0~t~T,
(2.65)
imply ]]z(T; z0, ~ 1 ( ' ) ) -- z(T; Yo,
~2('))]]c~qci]Zo
--
y0]]c + 7c max ]~l(t) - ~2(t)]. OKt~T
(2.66) Moreover, we say that f is globally T-convergent, if for all Ec, be > 0 we can find 7c, qc and I]. ]l,c as above, such that (2.65) and (2.66) hold. The notion of T-convergence combines essential features of the exponential stability in the sense of Lyapunov and the BIBO (bounded input, bounded output) stability in control theory, see for instance [159; p.583]. If f is smooth in a neighborhood of ZT, T-convergence near ZT is equivalent to exponential stability of ZT. In more general situations this property can be extracted from various other stability properties, see [83]. We also need to impose some growth condition on the perturbation. If f is globally Lipschitz-continuous, by virtue of Gronwall's inequality the estimate ]z(t; z0)]~C(1 + Iz0I), u E ~a, u E [0, T], (2.67) holds for the solution of the unperturbed problem with some constant C. In order to obtain a corresponding estimate for the perturbed problem uniformly with respect to r/0, we require the growth condition (G)
Ig(z(t), (FD/0]Lz) (t))]
~agiz(t)I+bg,
u
1,1
T , Vr/0~M, u
T],
(2.68)
to be satisfied for some constants ag, bg > 0. A sufficient condition for (2.68) to hold is IX(Z, rl)]~aglz] + bg, u E ~a, r/E M . (2.69) If F has precompact values in the sense that the sets
Gt - {(F[t/0]u)(s) " ~/0 E M, u
E
W 1'1, s E [0, t]}
(2.70)
are precompact subsets of M for all t~>0, then it is sufficient to require that
]g(z, r/)I~(aizl + b)~(r/),
u
E ~ d r/ E M,
holds for some continuous function ~ and some constants a, b > 0. We now formulate the main theorem.
(2.71)
178
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
THEOREM2.3.1. Suppose that ZT is a U-uniformly stable T-periodic solution of the system (2.55) where f is continuous, satisfies a global Lipschitz condition in z and is T-convergent near ZT. Let g satisfy a global Lipschitz condition in z and rl. Let F be a normal nonlinearity with the threshold h > 0, and let
ostt(CZT) > h.
(2.72)
Finally, let the growth condition (G) from (2.68) be satisfied. Then there exists ~o > 0 such that, for every 0 < e < e0, the perturbed system (2.57)-(2.59) has a unique T-periodic solution (z ~, ~1~) satisfying x ~(0) ~ U; this solution is U-uniformly stable and enjoys the property lim sup IZT(t) - z~(t)I = O. ~O0~t~T
(2.73)
Theorem 2.3.1 can be generalized and modified in various ways as usual. We will give only one useful assertion in this direction. Let z 9 ~+ --, R e be a solution of Eqn. (2.55) which is U-uniformly stable with respect to a certain neighborhood U of z(0). The union of all open neighborhoods U such that z is U-uniformly stable is called the basin of attraction of z. COROLLARY2.3.7. Suppose that ZT is a uniformly stable T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.55) with respect to some neighborhood of zT(O) where f is continuous, satisfies a local Lipschitz condition in z and is T-convergent in a neighborhood of ZT(.). Let g satisfy a local Lipschitz condition in z and rl. Let F be a normal nonlinearity with threshold h, let inequality (2.72) hold and the growth condition (G) from (2.68) be satisfied. Then for any compact subset U of the basin of attraction of zT, which contains zT(O) as an interior point, there exists eo > 0 such that the system (2.57)- (2.59) has for e < eo a unique T-periodic solution (z ~, rl~) satisfying z ~(0) ~ U; this solution is U-uniformly stable and enjoys the property (2.73). We consider the following simple example: x" + ax' + x - A sin(~/2t) + eP[rlo]x(t),
(2.74)
where a > 0 and P has a measure support on the triangle {(e, fl) : -0.5KeK ]/K0.5}. The unperturbed equation, one with e = 0, has the following family of solutions 2a 2 4- 1A sin(~/2t 4- ~b) 4- Cle ;h t 4- C2e22t, x(t) -- 2a2_ 1
(2.75)
2.3 EXAMPLESOF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
179
where ~(21), ~(22) < 0; C1, C2 depend on initial conditions and 4) = arctanG/2a). In particular, the solution 2a 2 + 1 ~ A 2a 2 - 1
sin(~/2t + ~b)
(2.76)
is U-uniformly stable. Since the support of the P is bounded, the property (N1) of the normal hysteresis nonlinearity holds automatically. N o w if the amplitude 2a2+1A 2a2-1 of the solution (2.76) is greater than 0.5, property (N2) of the normal hysteresis nonlinearity holds as well. The Volterra and semigroup properties hold due to the fact that nonlinearity P is the Preisach model. Thus we can satisfy the conditions of Theorem 2.3.1 and there exists e0 such that (2.74) has U-uniformly stable solutions for all 0 < e~<e0.
Hyperbolic-Type Behavior Introduction The ideas given in the previous subsection can be used in the analysis of hyperbolic-type structures in equations of the type (2.57)(2.59). Unfortunately the concept of hyperbolicity cannot be immediately applied to the systems with hysteresis since hysteresis nonlinearities are not smooth. A convenient modification of hyperbolicity, so-called splithyperbolicity, was given in [160]. Here we present a result from [161] that applies the ideas of split-hyperbolicity to systems with normal hysteresis nonlinearities. Split-Hyperbolicity Let J ~ 77be a set, which may be infinite, of consecutive integers. Let M s, M u where n ~ Z be complete metric spaces with metrics psn, pu. Suppose that the non-empty balls in M s and in M u are connected, i.e. cannot be represented as a disjoint union of two n o n e m p t y sets each of which is both relatively open and relatively closed. Elements from the Cartesian product M n = M s x M n are treated as pairs z = (z s, zU). The spaces M n are endowed with the usual metric pn(Z '
= max {ps (z s, yS), pUn(zU' yU)}.
y) a
Let f denote the bi-infinite sequence ~ }ieZ of the continuous maps, which may be partial, from M n to Mn+l: f n ( z s, z u) - (fiS(zS, zU), fU(zS, zU)) where u 1. f s . M s x M u ~-+ M ns+ 1 andfU " M sn x M nu ~ Mn+ Let the sequence Z = {Zn}nej of the elements Zn ~ M n be fixed, such that the i m a g e s f n ( Z n ) are defined for all n ~ J. Denote by BS[r] the closed u r > 0 are r-ball in M s centered at z sn E M s. n, the balls B nU[r] for z nu E M n,
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
180
defined analogously. Let fis, flu be some positive constants. Denote Un A__ BSn[~s] x BU[~U]. Let T)n be the set ofthosey ~ Un which satisfyfn(y) ~ Un+l. A four-tuple s = (2s, 2 u, #s,/zu) of nonnegative real numbers is called split if 2s < 1 < 2 u and A(s) __a (1 - 2s)(2 u - 1) - #s#u > O. The sequence f of the maps fn is said to be split (s-) hyperbolic in the (c~s, c~U)-neighborhood of the sequence X if it satisfies the following three conditions. (CO) /gn is closed for all n ~ J, and for each boundary point y of E)n either y belongs to the boundary of Un or fly) belongs to the boundary of Un+l (whenever n + 1 ~ l). (C1) For all n, n + 1 ~ J and all y, z ~/~n the following inequalities hold: tOSn+l
(fs (y) , f s (Z)) ~ '~s fins (Y,s zS) + # S PnU (yU, zU),
U
U
Pn+l (fU(Y)' fn (Z)) ~
-- ~
U
S
fin
(YS , Zs) +
~bl
PnU (yU, z u).
u 1[C~u] for (C2) The map w ~ fnU(v, w) is open as a map from BU[~u] to Bn+ each v ~ BSn[fis],in the sense that the imagefnU (v, U) of an open subset U U of BU[~u] is relatively open in Bn+ 1[~u] (whenever n, n + 1 ~ J). Conditions CO and C2 are technical and intended for use in some complicated situations. We offer the following simple lemma without the proof. LEMMA 2.3.5. Let fn be defined on Un and let M u = ~du. Then conditions CO and
C2 from the definition of split-hyperbolicity hold. For a given sequence Z - {Zn}n~J and given f the discrepancy D(Z; f) is defined by the following formula: D(Z; f) --a maXn,n+lEJ Pn+l (fn(Zn), Zn+l). We also introduce the numbers
as =a 2 u - l + # s A(s)
aUa= 1 - 2s + #u '
A(s)
One of the main tools in the investigation of split-hyperbolic systems is the Shadowing Theorem given below, see [160]. THEOREM2.3.2 (Shadowing Theorem)_ Let the sequence f be split-hyperbolic in the (3 s, (~U)-neighborhood of sequence Z - {Zn}n~J and let the discrepancy D(Z; f)
~u 6u } . Then there exists the trajectory satisfy the inequality D(Z; f) < min { ~~s, ~-, Z - {Zn }n~l of f satisfying
pS (zs, ~s)<~as D(Z; f) and pn(Zn, u u Zn)<~a -u u D(Z, f).
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
181
COROLLARY2.3.8. A s s u m e that Z is a sequence satisfying Theorem 2.3.2 and Z a corresponding trajectory. I f n is an initial time point then z- Sn - z 8n. I f n is a last time point then z- Rn - z Rn.
Certain properties of split-hyperbolicity were investigated in [131]. Result Suppose that Eqn. (2.55) has a T-periodic solution with z(0) = ZT. Let ~(t) 9 ~ --. ~c/be continuous and let F(z, ~(.)) be a time T shift operator along the trajectories of the perturbed Eqn. (2.64). Let R e - ~as x ~au and let the coordinate decomposition of F = (F s, FU); F s . ~a ~ ~ds, F u . Ra ~ ~ & satisfy the inequalities IFU(zl, ~1(')) -FU(z2, ~2('))1 ~,~Ulz~ - z~I - 7c m a x
OKtKT
I~l(t) - ~2(t)l,
(2.77)
IFS(zl, ~1(')) - FS(z2, ~2('))i K2SlzSl - zS2I + ?c max i~l(t) - ~2(t)l
O~tKT
(2.78)
for 0 < 2s < 1 < 2 u, for Zl,Z2 such that I Z l - ZTI, I z 2 - ZTI < ~c and for small perturbations of the original system: I~l(t)l, 1~2(t)l~ec. Note that F(z) = F(z, 0) is split-hyperbolic as a map from some neighborhood of ZT to ~ds x ~a,, with the split (2s, 2 u, 0, 0), see Lemma 2.3.5. In particular, inequalities (2.77) and (2.78) hold for a hyperbolic flow after an appropriate change of variables. N o w we consider an extended system that involves the output of hysteresis nonlinearity: z' = f i t , z),
r/(t) = (F[r/o]Cz)(t).
(2.79)
Here C 9 ~d ~ [~m is a linear map with the Euclidean norm estimation IICIIKI; F[r/0] is an operator which transforms functions u : ~+ ~ ~m, ~+ = [0, +cx~), to functions r/ : ~+ ~ M, where M is a complete metric space equipped with a metric p,; the argument r/0 represents initial memory. As usual, the notation (F[r/0]u)(t) refers to the value of the function r/ = F[r/0]u at the time t. We require F to be a normal nonlinearity (as it was introduced in [83]). It is possible to show that system (2.79) with normal nonlinearity F satisfies the conditions of split hyperbolicity. Let M s - ~as x M and M u = ~du. Let us choose the neighborhood of ((z~, r/f), z~) such that the T-shift is defined for ((z s, r/), z u) E U - BS[(zsT , r/f); 6s] x BU[z~; ~u] and such that OSCT(Cz) > h for all z ( t ) 9 z(O) c BS[zST; ~s] x BU[z~ 9 3u], O K t K T .
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
182
PROPOSITION2.3.15. A T-shift along the trajectories of (2.79) is split-hyperbolic
in some (~s ~u) neighborhood of ((z~, r/f ), z~). We return to the perturbed system (2.57)-(2.59). The following theorem holds: THEOREM2.3.3. Suppose that ZT is a T-periodic solution of the system (2.55) sat-
isfying (2.77),(2.78). Let f be continuous and satisfy a global Lipschitz condition in z and be T-convergent near ZT. Let g satisfy a global Lipschitz condition in z and r/. Let F be a normal nonlinearity with the threshold h > 0, and ostt(CzT) > h. Finally, let the growth condition (G) from (2.68) be satisfied. Then there exist so, 6 u, 6 s > 0 such that for every 0 < s < s0, the shift operator along the trajectories of the perturbed system (2.57)-(2.59)for a time T is split-hyperbolic in U = BS[(z~, r/f); 6s] x BU[z~; 6u]. COROLLARY2.3.9. In the context of Theorem 2.3.3 there exists G1 such that for all 0 < s < Sl, the time T shift operator along (2.57)-(2.59) has a uniquefixed point
in U. PROOF. Straightforward application of the Shadowing Theorem.
[]
From the theorem above one can formulate a statement on the existence of structures analogous to stable and unstable local manifolds, see details in [131]. Consider again an example based on the semilinear Duffing equation x" 4- ax' - x = A sin(~/2t) 4- sP[r/o]x(t),
(2.80)
where a < 0 and P has a measure support on the triangle {(a, ]/) : - 0 . 5 ~ a K ilK0.5}. The unperturbed equation, one with s = 0, has the following family of solutions A
x(t) = - ~ sin(~/2t + r + C1e'~lt 4- C2e22t,
(2.81)
where ,~1 > 0, 22 < 0; C1, C2 depend on the initial conditions and ~b = arctan(3a/~/2). In particular, the shift operator for the time ~/2~ along the solution A sin(v/2t + q)) (2.82) satisfies (2.77),(2.78).
2.3 EXAMPLESOF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
183
Since the support of the P is bounded, the property (N1) of the normal hysteresis nonlinearity holds automatically. Now if the amplitude A/3 of the solution (2.82) is greater than 0.5, property (N2) of the normal hysteresis nonlinearity also holds. Volterra and semigroup properties hold due to the fact that the nonlinearity P is a Preisach model. Thus we can satisfy the conditions of Theorem 2.3.9 and there exists E0 such that (2.80) has a splithyperbolic solution for all 0 < E~<e0. 2.3.5 STRUCTURE OF SETS OF PERIODIC SOLUTIONS
In this subsection we continue our consideration of periodic solutions of systems with the Preisach nonlinearity, focusing on the fact that in natural situations such solutions form continuum sets. These situations are defined by the simple condition Ilzllc~
Example Consider the system
L (~)x y(t) rl(t)
-
fit, x,y(t)),
=
(I)(r/(t)),
=
(F[rl(to)]x)(t),
(2.83)
with
L(p) = p~ + alp ~-1 + . . . q- a~, where x(t) and y(t) are inputs and outputs of the Preisach nonlinearity and the functionf(t, x, y) is supposed to be continuous and satisfiesflt, x, y) _-fit + T, x, y) for some T > 0. We split the set of all T-periodic solutions (x(t), r/(t)) = (x(t + T), tl(t + T)) (t>~to) of system (2.83) into disjoint equivalence classes, assigning two periodic solutions to the same class if they have the same first component and their second components ~lj(t) satisfy (I)(t/1 (t)) = q)0/2(t)), i.e. the variable states tlj(t) define the same periodic output of the Preisach nonlinearity. We denote the equivalence class of periodic solutions (x(t), rl(t)) by Ix(t), y(t)] where y(t) = (I)(r/(t)) for all its representatives. Classes [x(t), y(t)] are natural for several reasons. Firstly, the differential equation in system (2.83) contains inputs and outputs rather than
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
184
variable states r/(t) of the hysteresis nonlinearity. This situation is typical since states of the hysteresis nonlinearity are basically considered as values that one can neither observe nor control. Secondly, the second components of all periodic solutions (x(t), q(t)) that belong to the same class Ix(t), y(t)] are related by very simple explicit formulas, which we discuss below. Let for all t, x e R
[fit, x, y)l<<.qlxl + b,
y e [0, 1],
(2.84)
(here [0, 1] is the range of output values of the Preisach nonlinearity). Suppose that all the zeros of the polynomial L(p) are different from the numbers nwoi (n 9 7/)where w0 = 21t/T. Set
(
k - max IL(nwoi)1-1,
kl - T -1/2 IL(O)1-2 + 2
neZ
~ )1/2 IL(nwoi)1-2 . n--1 (2.85)
In fact, these formulas define the norms k = IIH IIC2----~C2 and kl = IIH IIL2-,C of the solution operator H = H(T) sending a function u = u(t) to the solution
x
Hu of the T-periodic problem for the linear Eqn. L ( d ) x = u(t) in the
spaces L2 = L2[0, T] and C - C[0, T]. To keep things simple, we shall always assume in this subsection that the measure It of the Preisach nonlinearity has a bounded density h = h(~, t) with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Define the scalar function ~(r) = It({(~,//)'~ < - r , r /}),
r>~0,
(2.86)
and denote by Ru the least nonnegative solution of the Eqn. ~(r) = 0 if any exists. If ~(r) > 0 for all r>~0 then we set Ru = c~. The value Ru plays an important role in all the statements below. PROPOSITION2.3.16. Let estimate (2.84) hold and
k l b V/-T 1 - qk < Ra.
qk < 1,
(2.87)
Then there exists a one-parameter continuum of classes [x,~(t), y2(t)] (0~<2~1) of T-periodic solutions to system (2.83), whose classes are different for different 2. Assume additionally that the density of the measure It satisfies h(~, fl)<.v(fl- ~),
~ < fl,
(2.88)
v(s) ds < cxz.
(2.89)
where v is integrable on the positive semiaxis, i.e. v~-
f
OO
0
185
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
Moreover, assume that the function fit, x, y) satisfies the Lipschitz condition Lf(t, Xl, yl) - f i t , x2, y2)l~qlxl - x21 if- qllyl - y2l
(2.90)
for all t, xj ~ JR, O<~yj<~l and 1 - qk ql < 2v~kl ~/T"
(2.91)
Then the set of all T-periodic solutions of system (2.83) is the join of the classes [x,~(t), y,~(t)] (0~<2~<1) above and there are numbers cj such that - 221,
IIx2~ (.) - x~ 2 ( . ) I I c ~ c l l , ~ l
IIY21(') - Y22(') IIc~c2121 - 221,
2j e [0, 1]. (2.92)
For example, consider Eqn. (2.9) of Section 2.1, i.e. x" + x = sin(~/2t) + p(2y(t) - 1),
(2.93)
where x and y are the input and output of the Preisach nonlinearity, p > 0. Here T - ~/2~z, estimate (2.84) holds with q = 0, b - 1+ p and the quantities (2.85) equal
k-
1 ~ v/2~z+ sin(V~n) ~. 0.829.
1,
kl - ~
1 - cos(~/2~z)
Therefore the first of the estimates (2.87) holds. Assume that the density h = h(c~, fl) of the measure/~ is defined by h(~, fl) = 1/(2r 2)
if
- r~<~ < fl<<.r;
h(~, fl) = 0
otherwise.
Then R~ = r and the second of the estimates (2.87) has the form r
> ~2~z 2 + ~/2~z sin(~/27r)
1+ p
4(1 - cos(~/~z))
1.747.
(2.94)
By Proposition 2.3.16 this estimate implies that Eqn. (2.93) has a oneparameter continuum of classes [x,~(t), y2 (t)] of periodic solutions with the period ~/2~z. Furthermore, the Lipschitz estimate (2.90) holds with ql = 2p and from
h(c~, fi)<~l/(2r 2)
if
0 < f l - c~<~2r,
h(c~, fi) = 0
otherwise
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
186
it follows that Voo = 1/r, and therefore estimate (2.91) takes the form 4/t/2~ 2 q- ~/-2~sin (w/2~) P > V 4(1 -- c--0-os(---~~)) ~ 6.9876.
r
(2.95)
The second part of Proposition 2.3.16 implies that if estimates (2.94) and (2.95) are valid, then the set of all v/2~-periodic solutions of Eqn. (2.93) is the join of the classes [x2(t), y,l(t)] (0~<2~<1). In fact, these classes are related here by the simple formulas
x,~(t) = xo(t) + 2p6(2),
y~(t) = yo(t) + 6(2),
2 e [0, 1],
where the continuous function 6 = 6(2) strictly increases and 6(0) = 0. Note that estimate (2.94) implies r>1.747. One can use operator norms different from (2.85) to conclude that all Tperiodic solutions of system (2.83) constitute a one-parameter set of classes [x~(t), y,l(t)]. For example, that conclusion and estimates (2.92) are valid if the relation k2(q + 2vooql) < 1 holds with k2 - IIHIIc--.c. This relation and relation (2.91) of Proposition 2.3.16 do not imply each other and give different estimates for the coefficients q and ql of the Lipschitz condition (2.90). We remark that the norm k IIHIIL2__+L2 equals the spectral radius of the operator H = H(T) and that if qk < 1 (i.e., the first relation of (2.87) holds) then estimate (2.84) alone implies that system (2.83) has at least one T-periodic solution, which may be eventually unique. =
Structure of the Set of Periodic Variable States and Outputs The following proposition, describing the set of all possible periodic variable states and outputs of the Preisach nonlinearity for a given periodic input, explains why the one-parameter continua of equivalence classes of periodic solutions appear and play the main role in the proofs of Proposition 2.3.16 above and further statements of this subsection on such continua. Consider a continuous input, which is periodic on the semiaxis t>~to, i.e. x(t) - x(t + T) (t>~to). For some admissible initial states r/0 = r/0(~, fl), the variable state r/(t) = (F[r/0]x)(t) and the output y(t) = O(r/(t)) of the Preisach nonlinearity are also periodic on the semiaxis t>,to. To describe the class of all such variable states and outputs for a given input x(t), let us define the numbers Xm = min x(t), XM = max x(t) and the sets
G(xm, XM) = {(0r fl) : 0r < Xm~XM < fl}, Gc(xm, XM) = 1-I\G(xm, XM) on the half-plane FI = {(a, fl) : a < fl}. From the relay definition it follows that if (a, ]/) e Gc(xm, XM) then the relay output (R~,/~[t0, .]x)(t) is periodic
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
187
on the semiaxis t~to for exactly one of the two initial relay states 0 a n d 1, for the other initial state the o u t p u t is either not periodic or not defined. A u n i q u e (for a given x(t)) periodic relay o u t p u t is d e n o t e d by r/per(t, (x, fl) a n d we set
s s (J,~x)(t) - I ] r/per(t, (X, fl)d#(a:,//) + ,~#(G(Xm, XM)), d JGc(Xm,XM)
t~to,
(2.96) w h e r e 0 ~ 2 ~ 1. For each ,l, this operator is defined on the class of all continuous periodic functions x : [to, co) ~ R, acts in this class and sends a function x = x(t) with a period T to the function J , tx with the same period. Denote by (9 the class of all functions g : ~+ --> ~ such that Ig(yl) g(y2)l~lYl - y2[ (yl, y2~0) and define the function @(e) =
sup # {(~, fl) ~ 1-I : I~ + fl - g(fl - ~)lKe}, g=g(y)~q)
e~0,
(2.97)
w h i c h is nondecreasing, nonnegative a n d satisfies ~(e) ---> 0 as e ---> 0, since we a s s u m e that the m e a s u r e # has a b o u n d e d density. PROPOSITION2.3.17. The following statements hold:
(i) For any periodic input x(t) =_ x(t + T) (t~to) the formula y(t) = (J2x)(t) with 2 ranging over the segment 0 ~ 2 ~ 1 defines the class of all outputs of the Preisach nonlinearity that are periodic on t ~ to. (ii) For any periodic input x(t) =_ x(t + T) (t~to) the formula r/(t, a, fl) = {
r/,r/per(t fl)(X''(fl) (x, ififeithero~< Xm~XM fl > O~Xm<
[~,~ XM~fl
> O~or both,
(2.98) where r/~(~, fl) is an arbitrary measurable (with respect to the measure #) function with the values O, 1, defines the class of all periodic variable states r/(t) = r/(t, ~, fl) of the Preisach nonlinearity. Their periods equal the period of the input , i.e. r/( t) = r/( t + T) ( t ~ to ) , and the periodic output y(t) = ~(r/(t)) for the variable state (2.98) is defined by y(t) = (J2x)(t) with
2#(G(xm, XM)) -- #({(~, fl) 6 G(xm, XM): r/~(~, fl) -- 1}).
(2.99)
(iii) Each variable state r/(t) = (F[.]x)(t) (t~to) equals one of the variable states (2.98) on the semiaxis t~to + T. (iv) For every pair of periodic inputs xj = xj(t) (t~to) with a period T and every ,l ~ [0, 1] II,J2Xl - J2x211C[to,to+T]~26(llXl - x211C[to,to+T]).
(2.100)
188
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
From conclusion (iv) it follows that operator (2.96) is uniformly continuous in the space C[to, to + T] for each 2 (we identify periodic inputs and outputs with their restrictions to the period). If relations (2.88) and (2.89) hold, then I~,(E)I~
IIJ x X 1
- - ,.,']'2X2
]]C[to,to+T]<~2v~ ]Ix1 -
x2
[[C[to,to+T].
(2.101)
By Proposition 2.3.17 for every class [x(t), y(t)] of T-periodic solutions of system (2.83) the relation y(t) = (J,~x)(t) with some 2 E [0, 1] is valid. Under the conditions of Proposition 2.3.16 such classes [x(t), (J,~x)(t)] exist for all 0K2~<1 and are pairwise disjoint. In fact, the dependence of the periodic problem on the parameter 2 rather than any special behavior of the function fit, x, y) is the reason for the existence of a one-parameter continuum of classes of periodic solutions. Simple assumptions like estimates of the measure # density and Lipschitz continuity of the nonlinearity fit, x, y) used in Proposition 2.3.16 may guarantee that the set of all classes [x(t), y(t)] of T-periodic solutions is the image of the segment 0~2K 1 under a one-to-one continuous mapping. The easiest way to construct examples of periodic solution sets with any number of connected components is to consider open-loop systems consisting of the differential Eqn. L(d/dt)x --- fit, x) without y, and the relations r/(t) = (F[rl(to)]x)(t), y(t) = @(x(t)) that define variable states and outputs of the hysteresis nonlinearity. Here every periodic solution xj(t) of the differential equation (if any exists) defines a one-parameter set of classes [xj(t), (J,~xj)(t)] (0K2~1) of periodic solutions for the system.
Classes of Periodic S o l u t i o n s Now we consider individual T-periodic solutions (x(t), rl(t)) of the system (2.83) from any class [x(t), y(t)]. Simple relations between their second components r/(t) follow from Proposition 2.3.17. Recall that, by definition, (x(t), rl(t)) belongs to the class [x(t), y(t)] if and only if r/(t) = (F[tl(to)]x)(t), y(t) = (I)0/(t)) and r/(t) = r/(t + T) for all t>~to. Statements (i) and (ii) of Proposition 2.3.17 imply that for every periodic solution (x(t), rl(t)) E Ix(t), y(t)] the component r/(t) = r/(t, a, t) coincides on the domain (~, t) E Gc(xm, XM) for all t~to with the function ~/per(t, ~x, t) uniquely defined by the input x(t). Thus, the components ~/(t) = r/(t, a, t) of the representatives (x(t), rl(t)) of the class Ix(t), y(t)] differ from each other on the domain G(xm, XM) only, where these components do not change with time. That means that r/(t, :r fi) - ~/. (a, t) on G(xm, XM) for each individual solution (x(t), r/(t)). If #(G(xm, XM)) > 0, then one obtains all representatives of the class [x(t), y(t)] inserting here characteristic functions r/. (~, t) of all measurable subsets of G(xm, XM) that
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
189
satisfy a unique restriction, namely (2.99) should hold with the 2 ~ [0, 1] defined by the equality
y(t) - f f r/per(t, a, fl)d#(a, fl)+ 2#(G(xm, XM)), d JGc(Xm,XM) which is nothing other than as y - J, tx. Since there is a continuum of such functions r/. = r/~(a, ]/), each class Ix(t), y(t)] consists of a continuum of periodic solutions (x(t), r/(t)) if l~(G(xm, XM)) > 0. For example, under the conditions of Proposition 2.3.16, system (2.83) has a one-parameter continuum of classes [x,t(t), Y,t(t)] of T-periodic solutions and each of those classes is a continuum parameterized by the functional parameter r/~ Formula (2.96) implies that J2x - J0x for all 2 and the Preisach nonlinearity assigns a unique periodic output to a given periodic input x - x(t) if and only if #(G(xm, XM)) -- 0. In contrast to the situation considered above, it means that the a class [x(t), y(t)] of periodic solutions is not included in the one-parameter set of such classes [x,~(t), y2(t)] if #(G(xm, XM)) = O. Moreover, formula (2.99) implies that the class [x(t), y(t)] contains a unique element (x(t), r/per(t)) in this case, since we consider functions r / = r/(~, fl) that are, with respect to the measure #, equal almost everywhere as the same state of the Preisach nonlinearity. Thus, periodic solutions (x(t), r/(t)) such that #(G(xm, XM)) -- 0 are basically isolated (if the nonlinearity f itself is not so complicated that it 'produces' nonisolated solutions). For example, the relation #(G(xm, X M ) ) - - 0 holds if Xm < - R ~ and XM > Ra.
Guiding Functions It is instructive to modify the statements of Subsection 2.3.3 that guarantee the existence of at least one T-periodic solution for systems with the Preisach nonlinearity in order to formulate sufficient conditions for the existence of the continuum of such solutions. Under the hypotheses of each of the Propositions 2.3.5, 2.3.6, 2.3.7 the periodic solutions admit an a priori estimate llz(t)licKp of the z-component. Such an estimate implies the estimate llx(t)llc~P0 for the corresponding periodic inputs x = (c, z) of the Preisach nonlinearity, for example with P0 - plcl. If we assume that P0 < R~, in addition to the conditions of any of above propositions, then the set of periodic solutions will include the one-parameter continu u m of disjoint classes [z2(t), y,t(t)], 0K2K1. Here and henceforth we denote by [z(t), y(t)] the class of all periodic solutions (z(t), r/(t)) satisfying y(t) = (I)(r/(t)) for systems (2.104) below, similar to the notation Ix(t), y(t)] used for system (2.83). We consider in more detail how this approach works in another application based on the method of guiding functions.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
190
A scalar-valued, continuously differentiable function V(z) is called a guiding function for the system of ODEs z' = F(t, z) with z ~ Ra if the gradient VV(z) of this function satisfies for some p > 0 (VV(z), F(t, z)) < 0
if
Izl > p, t ~ E.
(2.102)
Let the continuous function F(t, z) be T-periodic with respect to t. The simplest fact illustrating the role of guiding functions in the study periodic problems is that estimate (2.102) and the relation IV(z)I --> oe as IzI --* c~ imply the existence of at least one T-periodic solution of system z' = F(t, z). An important idea that leads to less restrictive existence conditions is to use several guiding functions. From (2.102) it follows that outside some ball in Ra the vector fields VV(z) and -F(to, z) are linearly homotopic and do not have zeros for every to. Therefore if Vj(z) (j = 1 . . . . . k) are guiding functions for the system z' = F(t, z), then the index at infinity is defined for each gradient vector field VVj(z) and all these indices coincide. The common value of these indices is called the topological index of the finite set of guiding functions 111(z) . . . . . Vk (z). Such a set is called complete if IWl(Z)i-}-..--}-IWk(z)l--+
oo
as
[zl--*
oo.
(2.103)
There is a classical theorem which states that if there exists a complete finite set of guiding functions with a nonzero topological index, then the system has at least one T-periodic solution. If one uses a straightforward modification of the definition of a guiding function, then the same statement holds for systems with hysteresis nonlinearities. So, we consider the system
dz/dt y(t) ~l(t) x(t)
= = = =
F(t, z(t), y(t)), (I)0/(t)), (F[rl(to)]x)(t), (c, z(t))
Z E [~d,
(2.104)
with the Preisach nonlinearity, where F(t, z, y) =- F(t + T, z, y) is a continuous function. Assume that for j = 1 . . . . . k
(VVj(z), F(t, z, y)) < 0
if
Izl > pj, 0KyK1, t ~ ~,
(2.105)
the relation (2.103) holds and the common value of the index at infinity of the gradient vector fields VVj(z) is nonzero. Then the system (2.104) has at least one T-periodic solution (see, e.g. [61]). Combining this statement with Proposition 2.3.17 in accordance with the basic approach of this subsection, we arrive at the following conditions
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
191
for the existence of a continuum of periodic solutions. We use the notations mj and Mj for the smallest and the largest values of the guiding function Vj(z) on the ball Izl~Pj and the notation c j - {z ~ ~d " m j < . V j ( z ) < . M j } .
PROPOSITION2.3.18. Let scalar-valued continuously differentiable functions V] (z), . . . . Vk(z) satisfy (2.103) and (2.105) and the index at infinity of the gradient vector fields VVj(z) in ~cl be nonzero. Let a ball {z E ~ 9 Izl~p.} contain the set G1 D ... D Gk and let R~ > p.Ici. Then the set of T-periodic solutions of system (2.104) includes a one-parameter continuum of disjoint classes [z2 (t), y2 (t)] (0~2~1). We remark that relation (2.103) implies that the set G1D... NGk is bounded. The conditions of Proposition 2.3.18 imply the inclusion z(t) E G1Vi... DGk, t>~to for the z-component of each periodic solution of system (2.104) and therefore the a priori estimate Ilz(t)Ilc~p. for all such solutions. If IV(z)] --~ cx~ as ]z] --> cx~ (i.e., k = 1) then the index at infinity of the vector field VV(z) is either I or -1. There are many other simple conditions which guarantee that the topological index of the complete set of guiding functions Vl(Z) . . . . . Vk(z) is different from zero. For example, if one of these guiding functions is even, then the topological index is odd. The proofs of Propositions 2.3.16 and 2.3.18 are based on the same idea. Using the operator (2.96), one constructs an operator equation depending on 2, whose solutions define the classes Ix(t), y(t)] of T-periodic solutions of the system (2.83) (the classes [z(t), y(t)] for system (2.104), respectively), then proves the existence of a solution for each 2 E [0, 1] and shows that the solutions are different for different 2. For example, one can use the operator equation
~(t) =fit, (H~)(t), (,.72H~)(t))
(2.106)
in the space L2[0, T] to prove Proposition 2.3.16. From the definition of the linear operator H = H(T) and Proposition 2.3.17 it follows that each solution ~ = ~(t) of (2.106) defines the class Ix(t), y(t)] of T-periodic solutions of the system (2.83) with x(t) -- (H~)(t), y(t) = (J,~x)(t). The existence of a solution ~,~ of (2.106) for each 2 E [0, 1] follows from (2.84) and the first of the estimates (2.87) by the Schauder principle. The second of estimates (2.87) and the a priori estimate ]lxllcKklb~/T/(1 - qk) of all T-periodic solutions of (2.83) imply that all the classes [x,l(t), y,~(t)] of such solutions defined by the solutions ~,~ of (2.106) are disjoint. If the additional assumptions of the second part of Proposition 2.3.16 hold, then Eqn. (2.106) satisfies the conditions of the contraction mapping principle and therefore has a unique
192
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
solution r for each ;~ ~ [0, 1]; moreover, the map 2 --, r is Lipschitz continuous. For the proof of Proposition 2.3.18, one can use the operator equation
z(t) = z(O) +
~0t F(s, z(s), (J2x)(s))
ds
with
x(t) = (c, z(t))
in the space C T ( [ 0 , T]; •a) of continuous functions z - z(t) satisfying z(0) = z(T) with the uniform norm. The proof of the existence of a solution z2 of this operator equation for each ;~ ~ [0, 1] follows standard lines of the guiding functions method. For details of the proofs of Propositions 2.3.16 and 2.3.18 and for the proof of Proposition 2.3.17 we refer to [162].
A u t o n o m o u s Systems Our approach also works in periodic problems for autonomous systems, and here it leads to statements on the existence of continua of cycles. For the same reasons as in problems on forced periodic oscillations, the continua of cycles have a similar type of one-parameter structure as described above if the a priori estimate lixllc < R~ holds for the cycles. We give one particular statement. Consider the system
L (-~)x y(t) ~l(t)
= = =
f(x, y(t)), (I)(r/(t)), (F[~l(to)]x)(t)
(2.107)
with the Preisach nonlinearity. Its solutions of the form (x(t), ~l(t)) =(x0, r/0) are called stationary, since for such solutions y(t) = Yo with Y0 = 9 (r/0). We are interested in conditions that guarantee the existence of nonstationary periodic solutions (x(t), rl(t)) -- (x(t + T), ~l(t + T)) of any period T > 0. Since system (2.107) is autonomous, those periods are u n k n o w n a priori. Furthermore, one should take into account that the set of nonstationary periodic solutions contains, together with any solution (x(t), r/(t)), all its time shifts (x~(t), rl~(t)) = (x(t + ~), r/(t + ~)) with 0 < ~ < T. Passing to the equivalence classes [x(t), y(t)] = {(x(t), ~/(t)) : y(t) = (I)(r/(t))} of periodic solutions of the system (2.107), we see that the time shifts of solutions from a class Ix(t), y(t) ] by the time r form the class [x(t + z), y(t + ~)]. In order to simplify the description of shift invariant structures of periodic solution sets, we introduce closed curves 7 = {(x(t), y(t)) ~ [~2 . 0Kt K T} on the i n p u t output plane of the Preisach nonlinearity and say that the curve 7 represents the class of all periodic solutions from the join Uo<.~
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
193
The curve 7 is called degenerate if (x(t), y(t)) =_ (xo, Yo) and nondegenerate otherwise. We consider stationary solutions in more detail. For 0<~A~
-
#({(a,/~)
9 ~ < fl < ,o}) + ,~ ~ ( { ( ~ , / ~ )
9 a < ,o < fl}).
(2.108)
This function is continuous with respect to the set of arguments A, p. As we know, the Preisach nonlinearity assigns stationary outputs to stationary inputs for any admissible initial states. Moreover, from conclusion (i) of Proposition 2.3.17 it follows that the values of all the outputs y(t) -- Yo corresponding to the input x(t) - xo form the segment {Y0 = ~b,t(x0) : 0<~A~
(2.109)
If L(0) ~- 0 and the continuous functionf(x, y) is bounded, then Eqn. (2.109) has at least one solution p - p*(2) for each 2 e [0, 1] with Ip*(2)l~pl = sup ~(x, y)llL(0)1-1, and therefore the system (2.107) has stationary solutions. In particular, if there is a unique solution p = p* (A) of (2.109) for each 2 and #({(a,//) 9 ~ < p < fl}) > 0 whenever p e [ - P l , Pl], then the points representing all the classes of stationary solutions of system (2.107) in the plane (x, y) form the continuous curve F -- {(x0, Y0) - (p*(2), q~,t(p*(A))) 9 0~<~.~<1} without self-intersections. N o w we are ready to formulate a statement on the existence of nonstationary solutions. Let fix, y) be a bounded continuously differentiable function satisfying the global Lipschitz condition
~(Xl, Yl) --f(x2, y2)l<~qlxl -- x21-+- qllyl -- Y21,
xj, yj 6 ~.
(2.110)
We assume that the relations (2.88), (2.89) are satisfied for the Preisach nonlinearity. It is easy to see that if there are no zeros of the polynomial L(p) on the imaginary axis and the coefficients q, ql in (2.110) are small enough, then the system (2.107) does not have nonstationary periodic solutions. Let us assume that the polynomial L(p) has a pair of the conjugate imaginary zeros 4-woi, and the so-called nonresonance condition L(nwoi) g= 0
for
n - 0, 4-2, 4-3 . . . .
(2.111)
holds. Define on the positive semiaxis r > 0, the function d(r) -
/0
sin t fir sin t, 1) dt -
/0
sin t f ( - r sin t, O) dt.
(2.112)
194
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
PROPOSITION2.3.19. Let the polynomials L(wi) and ~mL(wi) of the variable w have a pair of common zeros • (wo > O) of the same odd multiplicity. Let the nonresonance condition (2.111) hold. Suppose that estimates (2.88) and (2.89) are valid, that the bounded continuously differentiable function fix, y) satisfies the Lipschitz condition (2.110) and function (2.112) satisfies Id(r)l~c > Ofor r~r,. Then there are numbers q0 > 0, Wl e (w0/2, w0) and w2 > w0, such that if q + vooql < q0, the following statements are valid:
(i) The set of all stationary solutions of the system (2.107) is represented on the plane (x, y) by a continuous curve F, which may degenerate to a unique point. (ii) If there is a point (x*, y*) o f f such that
ef
d(r.) ~xx(X*, y*) < 0,
(2.113)
then the system (2.107) has at least one class of nonstationary periodic solutions represented by a nondegenerate closed curve ~; = {(x, y) e R 2 9 x = x(t), y = y(t), t e [0, T)} with a period satisfying 2~/w2~T~2rc/w]. (iii) If estimate (2.113) is valid for all points of the curve F, then there exist numbers r], ro > 0 such that the x-components of all periodic solutions of the system (2.107) with periods 2~/w2<~TK2rc/wl satisfy IIx(t) - YClIL2[O,T]~rl,
]Ix(t)IIc[o,T]~ro,
(2.114)
where Ycdenotes the average value of the function x(t) over its period. If in addition Ra > ro, then the set of all nonstationary periodic solutions of the system (2.107) includes a one-parameter continuum of disjoint classes represented at the plane (x, y) by nondegenerate closed curves ?,~ where 2 ranges over the segment 0K2~l. These curves are different for different 2 and the periods of all periodic solutions represented by them satisfy 2rc/w2 ~ T K2rC/Wl. By conclusion (iii), the x-components of all periodic solutions represented by the curves 7,l satisfy the estimates (2.114) and consequently are separated from the one-dimensional subspace of constant functions and from infinity in L2, C and other functional spaces, which implies, in particular, that such periodic solutions are separated from stationary ones. Additional assumptions about the functionf and the measure # of the Preisach hysteresis nonlinearity guarantee that the one-parameter set of curves ?,t represents all periodic solutions of the system (2.107) and these curves depend continuously on 2. Formulas for the numbers q0, w], w2 (they are defined by the polynomial L(p)) and estimates (2.114) can be given explicitly. We do not present
195
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
these cumbersome explicit expressions here, 3 but consider, as an example, the equation x'" + x" + x' -t- x =fix, y(t)). (2.115) The polynomial L(p) = p3 + p2 + p + I has the pair of simple roots +i,
L(wi) = (wi + 1)(1
3mL(wi) = w(1
- w2),
- w2),
w0-1
and 1/2 < Wl < 1 < w2. For example, if the Lipschitz estimate (2.110) holds with q = 0.305 and v~q1~<0.295, the Eqn. p = tip, qbx(p)) has a unique solution p = p~ for some 2 ~ [0, 1] and for all sufficiently large r
d(r) -~x
<
o,
[d(r) l~c > O,
then Eqn. (2.115) with the Preisach nonlinearity has nonstationary T-periodic solutions with 5.575~
L ( d ) x - g(x) + qly(t). Then
d(r) = 2ql + 4
f rcl2 J0
sin t godd (r sin t) dt,
where godd (x) -- (g(x) -- g(--x))/2 is the odd part of g. If godd (x) ~ go as x --, +oe, then d(r) ~ do = 2ql + 4g0 as r --~ +cx~. If do ~ 0, then the condition Id(r)l>~c > 0 of Proposition 2.3.19 is satisfied for all sufficiently large r.
2.3.6 AVERAGING PRINCIPLE General Description The averaging principle, see [146] and bibliography therein, is a powerful tool in nonlinear dynamics. Here we apply averaging theory to differential equations with hysteresis operators on the right-hand side. We remind the reader, that the standard averaging principle is applicable to the ordinary differential equation of the form z ' = ef(t, z) 3Further details, statements and proofs can be found in [163].
(2.116)
196
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
where the function f is periodic or almost periodic in t. The idea is to introduce the function
F(z)-
lim Z1 IJoT f(t, z) dt
T~oo
(2.117)
and then to consider the equation
z' = eF(z)
(2.118)
as an approximation to (2.116). It has been proved by N. Bogoljubov, that the averaged Eqn. (2.118) is a good approximation to (2.116) over intervals of the size O(1/e), which is the characteristic time for Eqn. (2.116). Now we consider the system with hysteresis given by
~(t) = el(t, z, y(t)), y(t) = (W[rlo]x)(t),
z ~ ~N,
(2.119)
x(t) = g(t, z(t)).
(2.120)
Here y(t) is the output of the hysteresis operator W with the initial state t/0, and e > 0 is a small parameter. The functions f and g are almost periodic in t. We note that the system (2.119), (2.120) is not a particular case of (2.13). We explain how these Eqns. (2.119), (2.120) 'come to life' in the analysis of Eqn. (2.13) below.
Averaged Hysteresis Operators First we need some analysis of hysteresis nonlinearities for inputs that are almost periodic functions depending on a slowly changing parameter s ~ ~+. Formally, the function u(t, s) is given in such a way that for each fixed s ~ R+ it is almost periodic as a function of t ~ ~ and the map s --+ u(.; s) is uniformly continuous on any bounded interval [0, T]. For each s ~ ~+ we define the sequence of inputs
VSk(t) = u(t, min{t/k, s}),
t~>0,
to the operator W[~/0] and denote z~ (t) = W[r/0]v~(t). Since v~(.) converges to an almost periodic function, the same is true for the output z~ (t); by y~ (t) we denote the almost periodic limit of z~ (t). Note that y~ (t) is defined for all t ~ R. If, for each s ~ ~+, the sequence y~ (t) converges to a function ys(t) as k --+ oo uniformly in t ~ 0~, then ys(t) is almost periodic and we say that the map y(s) = ys(') from ~+ to the space of almost periodic functions is the output of the averaged hysteresis operator W'[r/0]. We return to the system (2.119), (2.120) The solutions are traced on a finite interval of the 'slow' time ~ = et. The functions fit, x, z) and g(t, x)
197
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
are assumed to be almost periodic in t and uniformly continuous in all the variables. We denote 1 T + ~ -T /0 fit, z(s), W*[~lo]X s (t)) dt, (I)z(s) = T ~lim
x s(t) = g(t, z(s)).
The averaging m e t h o d replaces (2.119) by the equation
~(t) = ~(bz(t),
(2.121)
whose solutions converge to the corresponding solutions of (2.119) as e --+ +0, if the averaged operator W* exists. Existence of the averaged operator W* has been proven for m a n y classical models, including the Preisach nonlinearity and hysterons. We note especially Vladimirov's results concerning the multidimensional hysteresis operator [111] and their applications to IT problems.
Averaging of Preisach Nonlinearity Let us give a simple example of an explicit description of the limit nonlinearity. Let P be a Preisach nonlinearity and let function u(t, s) be T(s)periodic. We suppose also that the set f~ coincides with the half plane It is sufficient to consider the case w h e n the initial state ~/0 is the characteristic function of a set S, which looks like the shaded set in Fig. 2.35(a). That is, S is located to the left of the line a - ] / a n d below a continuous linear curve L = Ls, with a non-positive slope. We denote the set of states ~/describing the sets S as above by (~.. Additionally, we assume that the coordinates of the intersection of L with the diagonal coincide with the current value of the input x. We will discuss this type of initial condition in more detail in Section 2.4.1. N o w we will give a correspondence between a given function u(t, s) and a varying set S(s). For each s>~0 introduce u_ (s) = min u(t; s) t
and
u+(s) = max u(t; s).
(2.122)
t
For simplicity we consider only the case w h e n both these functions are piecewise monotone. We define S(0) as the part of S which is located to the left from the vertical line :~ = u_ (0), that is,
s(0)see Fig. 2.35(b).
< u_(0)}.
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
198
FIGURE 2.35 The sets S, S(0). Suppose that S(cr) is defined for 0~cr~s0 and that the functions (2.122) are monotone at the interval so Ks. Let us consider four cases: Case Case Case Case
1. 2. 3. 4.
u_(s)~u_(so), u_(s)~u_(so), u_(s)Ku_(so), u_(s)Ku_(so),
and and and and
u+(s)Ku_(so). u+(s)~u_(so). (u_(s), u+(s)) r S(so). (u_(s), u+(s)) ~ S(so).
Figure 2.36 provides the 'picture definitions' for the corresponding set S(s), which is the union of the hatched and shaded regions. The bold line is given by the parametric Eqn. ~ = u_ (rT),//-- u+ (rr). For instance in Case 1, S(s) is the union of the set S(so) and the set {(a, ]/) "u_(so)~o~ < u_(s), and a < / / < u+(a)}. The limit Preisach nonlinearity P*[~/0] can be described by
(P*[~lo]xS)(t) = (P[rl(s)]xS)(t), where x s (t) = u(s, t) and r/(s) is the characteristic function of the set S(s).
Numerical Example Here we demonstrate how the techniques described above work in a particular example. Consider our standard scalar differential-operator equation of the form x"+x = ey(t), y(t) -- (I)0/(t)) 2, (2.123) r/(t) = (F[r/0])x(t).
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
FIGURE 2.36
199
Set S(s).
w h e r e O(r/(t)) is a Preisach n o n l i n e a r i t y w i t h a m e a s u r e #. We s u p p o s e that p is a L e b e s g u e m e a s u r e on the triangle A ( - 1 , 1) = {-1K0cKflK + 1} a n d zero a n y w h e r e else. U s i n g the s u b s t i t u t i o n x = r cos(0 + t),
x' = - r sin(0 + t)
the Eqn. (2.123) can be r e w r i t t e n in the f o r m of the s y s t e m
dr/dt dO/dt y(t)
= =
r/(t)
=
-
- e s i n ( t 4- O)y(t), ecos(t 4- O)y(t)/r, O(r/(t)) 2, (F[~/0])(r(t) cos(0(t) + t)).
C o n s i d e r the initial c o n d i t i o n s r(O) = ro e (0, 1],
0(0) = O,
rt(O) = ~o.
(2.124)
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
200
FIGURE 2.37 Set S(s) for (2.124) is hatched; all possible sets described by characteristic function r/belong to the union of the filled areas.
For these initial conditions, the system (2.124) has a unique solution. The initial state of the Preisach nonlinearity ~/0 is chosen to be u n i o n of the s h a d e d and hatched areas on Fig. 2.37. Using the averaging m e t h o d from the previous subsection and the properties of the Lebesgue measure, we can write a differential equation for the average ~ of r
f2~+o
1 d~/dt= _ m2~ Jo
e Sin(S -}- 0)(I)((1P[r/0])(~ cos(0 if- S))) 2 ds
1 fo ~ e sin(s)(c q- -~~.2 (cos(s) - 1)2) 2 ds = - 2---~ ~2 1 f2~ 2re e sin(s)(c + 2~z - ~ ( 1 - cos(s))2) 2 ds
4~2(C if_ ~2) 3~ Here c > 0 and ~ is decreasing with time, that is the case of the evolution of a Preisach nonlinearity s h o w n in Fig. 2.35(a). The solution x - r sin(t + 0) has symmetric m i n i m a and m a x i m a which means that c is the area in the hatched p o l y g o n in Fig. 2.37. Thus, c - 1 - ~2 and the equation above can
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
201
be written as d~ dt
4~ 2 =
3rt
~(0) - r0
and has the solution 3~zr0 ?(t) = 3rr + 4erot"
Similarly, one can write d o w n and solve the equation for the average of 0. From the averaging principle d0 1 f020 ~ cos(s + 0)(I)((F[r/0])(r cos(0 + s))) 2 ds d--~ = 2~z~ = 2 1~ fo ~ e cos(s)(c q- -~~2 (cos(s) -- 1)2) 2 ds
1 ~2~r 2~z~
~2 e cos(s)(c + 2r 2 - ~-(1
- cos(s))2) 2 ds
= e?(c + 72). N o w the equation for dO dt
= ~
3~ro 3~z + 4roet '
o(o) - o
has the solution 0(t) - -3/4(zt log(3r0 - zr log(3rc + 4er0t)). In Fig. 2.38 we c o m p a r e the results of the averaging m e t h o d with straightforward numerical integration. We consider two values of p a r a m e t e r e: E = 0.01 a n d e = 0.001. Initial conditions are the same in both cases, r0 = 1 a n d we c o m p a r e the solutions on the time interval [0, 1000].
A p p l i c a t i o n to Q u a l i t a t i v e A n a l y s i s of S y s t e m s with Hysteresis We will d e m o n s t r a t e h o w it could w o r k by a particular example. We consider the scalar differential-operator equation of the form x" + x -
qb(t) + ey(t),
y(t) - (I)0/(t)),
(2.125)
r/(t) - (F[r/0])x(t),
(2.126)
CHAPTER 2
202
Differential E q u a t i o n s w i t h H y s t e r e s i s
in ! ! ....
0.2
0.5 0.1
o
!
C 0.1
-0.5
0.2
-10
|
--
4'0
i
6'0
i
i
900
(a) c = 0.01, t r [0, 100] 1
i
0.5
f
nir,f
|
1
10(
920 940 960 980 (C) c=O.O01, t E [900, 1000]
1000
-
0.5 :
i
0
2
-0.5 -1
920 940 960 980 (b) ~ -- 0.01, t E [900, 1000]
i 0
i
20
I
40
60
-0.5
I i
i~
.
,
80
-1 90O
100
(C) c=O.O01, t E [0, 100]
FIGURE 2.38 Dashed oscillating-numerical solution; solid oscillating-solution of averaging equations. w i t h the Preisach nonlinearity. We will s u p p o s e that the c o r r e s p o n d i n g m e a s u r e # is finite, positive, absolutely continuous w i t h b o u n d e d density, a n d defined in the half plane a < ft. Suppose that the external force ~b(t) is a s u m of periodic functions qbi(t), i = 1 . . . . . n, w i t h periods Ti, for w h i c h n
2~
Z ki-~ii + kn+l ~ 0
(2.127)
i=1
for a n y integers kin, m = 1 . . . . . n + 1. As w e know, this equation for a n y initial conditions x(0) = x0, x'(0) = x 0' has a u n i q u e solution x(t , x(O) , x'(O) , e). We denote b y ui(t), i = 1 . . . . . n, the periodic solution (it is unique) of the equation u" + u = qbi(t ), and we set n
u(t) = Z i=1
ui(t).
(2.128)
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
203
By m e a n s of the usual substitution x = u(t) + r cos(0 + t),
x' = u' (t) - r sin(0 + t)
the Eqn. (2.125) can be rewritten in the form of the system dr d--t = - ~ sin(t + O)y(t), dO d---t-= e cos(t + O)y(t)/r, y(t) = ~(r/(t)),
~/(t) = (F[~/0])x(t), x(t) = u(t) + r(t)cos(0(t) + t).
For any initial conditions r(0)=r0>0,
0(0)=00,
~/(0)=~/0
this system has a u n i q u e solution (r(t; ro, 0o, tl o, e), O(t; ro, 0o, ~1o, e), r/(t; r0, 00, ~/0, e)). We denote by f~(r), r > 0 the following d o m a i n in the half plane ct < fl: f~(r) =
~ <
m a x ui(t) + r or e > i=1
m i n ui(t) - r
.
i=1
For r > O, (e, fl) ~ f~(r) and 0 < Oi < 2re, i = 1 . . . . . n + 1, we set F(r; ~, fl, 01 . . . . On+l) =
lim
to---+ - - ~
(R[z(e, fl); ~, fl)x) (0)
n ( x(t) = ~
ui
t -- to -t- - ~ T i
-t- r cos(t - to -t- On+l).
i=1
The limit of the right-hand side always exists. For fixed values of r > 0 a n d (e, fl) e f~(r) it is convenient to consider this function to be defined on the (n + 1)-dimensional torus H n+l. For r > 0 we set P(r) = ~
(r)
d/.t(0c,fl)fH
n+l
F(r; ct, [3, 6)) sin On+l d |
Since in any d o m a i n 0 < r < R, P(r) satisfies a Lipschitz condition, each Cauchy problem d? m
= -ePff),
dt has a unique solution ?(t; ?0, e).
r(-0) = r0
204
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
THEOREM2.3.4. The function P(r) is strictly positive for r > O. COROLLARY2.3.10. Let R > O. Then to each ~ > 0 there correspond numbers l eo > 0 and L > 0 such that for 0 < e < e0, and Ix0[ + Ix0] < R Ix(t; x0, x~) - u(t)] + Ix'(t; x0, x~) - u'(t)] < 6,
t > L/e.
2.3.7 BIFURCATIONANALYSIS In Section 2.2 we observed a rich bifurcation behavior of Eqn. (2.9) depending on the parameter b. Here we survey some statements about bifurcation points. We restrict ourselves to one type of bifurcations, namely Hopf bifurcations in autonomous systems, discussing mainly sufficient conditions for some parameter value to be a bifurcation point and the structures of solution sets, to some extent, and omitting the proofs.
H o p f Bifurcation Let some autonomous system depending on a scalar parameter b have an equilibrium z.(b) for each parameter value from some interval (b_, b+) and let those equilibria form a smooth curve in the phase space Z of the system. We say that Hopf bifurcation occurs and a parameter value b0 is a Hopf bifurcation point if for any sufficiently small r > 0 one can find a parameter value br E (bo - r, bo + r) such that the system with b -- br has a cycle which lies in the ball of radius r centered at the equilibrium z.(br) (this type of weak definition of Hopf bifurcation was introduced in [164], where nonsmooth problems were studied for the first time). Freely speaking, we consider bifurcation of a small cycle from an equilibrium point of the autonomous system. The simplest example is the equation x" + bx' + x = fix, x', b)
(2.129)
with f satisfying flZl, Z2, b) = o(]Zll q-IZ21) as Zl, Z2 --+ 0 uniformly with respect to b. Here the origin is an equilibrium of the equivalent planar firstorder system for every b; the value b = 0 is a unique Hopf bifurcation point. Figure 2.39 presents a typical structure of the set of cycles in the product of the phase space ~2 of the equivalent system and the axis of parameter values b in the case of a sufficiently smooth f. The cycles form a smooth two-dimensional surface ~ (a 'cup') passing through the origin (note that the picture is local both in b and z = (Zl, z2), i.e. we consider cycles lying in a small vicinity of the zero equilibrium and b small in absolute value only). Appropriate nondegeneracy conditions guarantee that ~ is tangent
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
205
I Z2 s ss
E1 %
FIGURE 2.39 Hopf bifurcation.
to the plane b = 0 and lies on one side of it. In Fig. 2.39, s lies to the right of this plane, which means that the system has no small cycles for b < 0 and has such cycles for small b > 0; for b = b' the cycle is a cross section of with the plane b = b'. Under the conditions of the classical Hopf Theorem (see e.g. [165]) a similar picture is observed for a u t o n o m o u s systems
d z / d t = F(z, b),
z c ~a,
(2.130)
of ODE of any dimension in some vicinity of the equilibrium z,(b). Let us recall more precisely the algorithm to determine bifurcation points by linearization of (2.130). Since the change of variables z ~ z + z, (b) places the equilibrium at the origin, let us assume without loss of generality that z, (b) ~ 0, i.e. system (2.130) has zero equilibrium for all b. In this situation, we call b0 a Hopf bifurcation point for system (2.130) with a limit period To > 0 if for any sufficiently small r > 0 the system has a periodic solution zr(t) of a minimal period Tr > 0 for some b = br and max Izr(t)l ~ O,
br ~ bo,
Tr ~ TO
as
r ~ 0.
t~
We remark that periods Tr are not k n o w n a priori and that we use an auxiliary parameter r. The reason w h y the parameter b is not good for the parameterization of the set of small cycles becomes clear if one considers linear equations, for example x" + bx' + x = 0, i.e. Eqn. (2.129) w i t h f ~ 0.
206
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
Here all the cycles exist for one parameter value b0 = 0, which is a unique Hopf bifurcation point (the surface ~ in Fig. 2.39 becomes a piece of the plane b = 0). Suppose F is differentiable with respect to z at the point z = 0 uniformly with respect to the parameter b, i.e. F(z, b) = A(b)z + g(z, b) where suPb ]g(z, b)l/JzJ ~ 0 as izi --* 0, and let the matrix-valued function A(b) and the vector-valued function g(z, b) be continuous. Assume that the matrix A(bo) has a pair of simple imaginary eigenvalues 4 +iwo (w0 > 0) for some b0, which implies that A(b) has a unique pair of simple eigenvalues rr(b) 4- iw(b) close to 4-iwo for b close to b0. Let the derivative rr'(b0) of the real part of these eigenvalues at the point b = b0 exist and the so-called transversality condition cr'(b0) ~= 0 (2.131) and nonresonance condition
iwok ~ Sp(A(b0))
for all
k ~ 77, k ~= 4-1
(2.132)
hold, where Sp(A) is the spectrum of A. Then b0 is a Hopf bifurcation point for system (2.130) with the limit period 2rc/wo (for example, this follows from the results of [164]). If in addition F is sufficiently smooth, then according to the Hopf Theorem the small cycles form a two-dimensional smooth surface in the product of the phase space ~c/of (2.130) and the axis b. Moreover, information about the Taylor expansion of F at the origin allows us to study further important problems including stability of the cycles, but we do not consider those problems here.
Bifurcation in Systems with Preisach Hysteresis Consider the autonomous system
dz/dt y(t) rl(t) x(t)
= = = =
F(z(t),y(t),b), (I)(r/(t)), (F[rl(to)]x)(t), (c, z(t))
z ~ ~a (2.133)
with the Preisach nonlinearity, where the first equation depends on the scalar parameter b; the function F is supposed to be continuous. We use notation similar to that of Subsection 2.3.5. Solutions of the form (z(t), r/(t)) = (z0, r/0) are called stationary, the point (z0, ~/0) in the product ~a x (~. is called an equilibrium of the system. By a cycle we mean the trajectory of any nonstationary periodic solution (z(t), rl(t)) =_ (z(t + T), rl(t + T)) 4The existence of imaginary eigenvalues of A(bO) is a necessary condition for b0 to be a Hopf bifurcation point.
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
207
in ~a x (~., with any T > 0; actually, the cycle is a c o m m o n trajectory for all the time shifted periodic solutions (z~(t), ~/~(t)) = (z(t + ~), rl(t + ~)), 0~ (c, z0). Since the Eqn. y0 = ~0/0) with a given Y0 has a solution r/0 in this class of admissible states if and only if #({(~, f l ) : ~ < fl < (c, z o ) } ) ~ y o ~ # ( { ( ~ , fl): ~
(2.134)
we conclude that system (2.133) has an equilibrium if and only if the Eqn. F(zo, Y0, b) = 0 has a solution (z0, Y0) satisfying (2.134). Similarly to the definition for ODEs above, we call b0 a H o p f bifurcation point for system (2.133) with a limit period To if for any sufficiently small r > 0 the system has a nonstationary periodic solution (zr(t), rlr(t)) with a period Tr > 0 for some b = br and max I z r ( t ) - z o l ~ 0, max/9 l(r/r(t ), r/0) ~ 0, br -+ bo, Tr ~ TO t t
as
r --, 0,
where (z0, ~/0) is an equilibrium for b = b0 and/91 (., .) is the metric (2.20) in the state space @. of the Preisach nonlinearity. To formulate the simplest statement on H o p f bifurcation for the system (2.133), suppose that there are z0, Y0 satisfying (2.134) such that F(z0, y0, b) - 0
for all b.
Therefore system (2.133) has an equilibrium at the same point (z0, r/0) ~a x @. for all b. A s s u m e that the function F can be linearized at the point (z0, Y0), more precisely F(z, y, b) - A ( b ) ( z - zo) + a(b)(y - Yo) 4- g(z, y, b),
(2.135)
with the matrix A = A ( b ) and the vector a - a(b) d e p e n d i n g continuously on b and lim maxlb-b01~R Ig(z, y, b)l - 0 (2.136) z--,zo, y-*yo Iz - z01 + lY - Y01 for some R > 0. In this situation, H o p f bifurcation points for system (2.133) are d e t e r m i n e d by the matrix A (b) in the same w a y as for ODE. PROPOSITION 2.3.20. Let relations (2.135), (2.136) be valid and strict estimates #({(a, fl) 9 a < fl < (c, z0)}) < Y0 ~({(~, fl) " ~ < fl and a < (c, z0)}) (2.137)
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
208
hold in place of (2.134). Let the measure # have a bounded density with respect to the Lebesgue measure. Suppose that the matrix A(bo) has a pair of simple eigenvalues • that the transversality condition (2.131)and the nonresonance condition (2.132) hold. Then bo is a Hopf bifurcation point for the system (2.133) with a limit period 2~/wo. As an example, consider the equation x" + bx' + x = 2y(t) - 1 where x(t) and y(t) are the input and output of the Preisach nonlinearity. If #({(a, f l ) : a < f l < 0 } ) < l / 2 < # ( { ( a , fl):a 0 for some b = br and max [zr(t)- Zr(Z)[--+ cx~, br ~ bo, Tr ~ TO as t,'~
r ~ cx~.
(2.138)
In other words, the system has cycles with arbitrarily large amplitudes of the z-component and periods close to To for some parameter values arbitrarily close to b0. Suppose that the function F can be represented as
F(z, y, b) = A(b)z + g(z, y, b),
(2.139)
lim max Ig(z, y, b)] = 0 Izl-~c~ Ib-bol<~R,lYI~R~ ]Z[
(2.140)
where
for some R > 0 and every R1 > 0. Then the derivative A(b) of F with respect to z at infinity plays the same role in problems on Hopf bifurcation of large cycles as the derivative at the equilibrium point in local problems above.
209
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
PROPOSITION2.3.21. Suppose that relations (2.139), (2.140) hold, the matrix A (bo) has a pair of simple eigenvalues +iwo, the transversality condition (2.131) and the nonresonance condition (2.132) are valid. Then bo is an asymptotic Hop]: bifurcation point for system (2.133) with a limit period 2n/wo. This proposition is a consequence of a more general statement of [166]. Proposition 2.3.20 and some further statements on Hopf bifurcation from an equilibrium can be found in [167].
Bifurcation with Respect to Internal Parameter As in Subsection 2.3.5, let [z(t), y(t)] denote the class of periodic solutions (z(t), rl(t)) = (z(t + T), rl(t + T)) (t~to) such that y(t) = (I)(r/(t)) and let us say that the closed curve 7 - {(z(t), y(t)) 9 0~t < T} in the space Ea+l of pairs (z, y) represents the periodic solutions of the join Uo<~
dz/dt y(t) rl(t) x(t)
= = = =
F(z(t), y(t)), (I)(r/(t)), (F[ri(to)]x)(t), (c, z(t))
ZE[~ d, (2.141)
that does not depend explicitly on parameters. Nevertheless, as we already know from considerations in Subsection 2.3.5, problems on cycles of this system contain the parameter 2, which we call 'internal'. This results in the fact that each closed curve 7 c ~a+l representing a class of cycles (if any exists) such that the amplitude of their z-component is smaller than the characteristic size of the Preisach nonlinearity is generically included in the one-parameter continual set of such curves 7,~; a typical example is presented by the conclusion (iii) of Proposition 2.3.19. It turns out that the curves 7 representing small cycles of the system (2.141) can accumulate at its equilibrium and form the structure similar to that observed for Hopf bifurcation problems for ODEs with a scalar parameter. Moreover, sufficient conditions for the existence of those structures for system (2.141) with hysteresis are close to the classical assumptions of the Hopf Theorem. Let us consider one example. Let the Eqn. F(z, 2) = 0 define a continuous branch z = ~p(2) of the implicit function on some open interval A*. Denote by F the curve (z, y) = (~p(2), 2), 2 E A* in [~d+l and assume that for each point (z0, Y0) ~ F relations (2.137) hold, which implies that this point represents the class [z0, Y0] of equilibria of system (2.141). We shall suggest sufficient conditions that
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
210
guarantee the existence of a one-parameter set of closed curves ~ with vanishing diameters that accumulate at one of the points Ado = (z0, Y0) 6 F. The density of the m e a s u r e / t of the Preisach nonlinearity will be everywhere assumed to be bounded. Let us suppose that the function F(z, y) is continuously differentiable with respect to z and Lipschitz continuous with respect to y in some neighborhood of the curve F. As usual, set A(2) = 8F/8z(q)(2), 2),
2 e A*.
Suppose that at some point .Ado = {q~(20), 2o} e F the spectrum Sp(A(20)) of the d x d matrix A(20) = 0F/8z(q~(20), 2o) contains a pair of simple eigenvalues +iwo (w0 > 0) and the nonresonance condition iwok r Sp(A(20)) holds for all integer k 4= +1. Consider the pair of the simple eigenvalues cr(2) + iw(2) of A(2) satisfying cr(20) 4- iw(20) = +iwo, where the real continuous functions a(2), w(2) are defined in some neighborhood of 2o. PROPOSITION2.3.22. Let the function r~(2) take values of both sign in each neighborhood of 2 = 20. Then for every small r > 0 system (2.141) has a class [Zr(t), yr(t) ] of nonstationary periodic solutions of a period Tr, all the closed curves ~ r = { ( Z , y) 6 [ ~ d + l . z - - Zr(t), y -- yr(t), t ~ [0, Tr)} are different for different r and max ]zr(t)- q~(,~0)] ~ 0, t
max lyr(t)- ,~0] ~ 0, t
Tr --* TO = 2~/wo
(2.142) as r --+ 0, i.e. the curves ~r shrink to the point .Ado and periods approach To. Particularly, the conditions of this proposition are satisfied if the function r~(2) is differentiable at the point 2 = 20 and the transversality condition r~'(20) ~= 0 holds, which one can consider as the main case. The simplest example of system (2.141) satisfying the conditions of Proposition 2.3.22 is x" + (y(t) - K)x' + x = g(x, y), where x and y are the input and output of the Preisach nonlinearity and g(x, y) = o(]xl + lYl) as x,y --+ 0. If u ( { ( ~ , / ~ ) : a < / ~ < 0}) < ~: < u ( { ( a , / ~ ) : a < / ~ , a < 0})
then this second-order equation has the continuum of disjoint classes [Xr(t), yr(t)] (0 < r < r0) of nonstationary periodic solutions with periods Tr such that maxt Ixr(t)l --+ 0, maxt lYr(t) - tel ~ 0 and Tr --+ 2~z as r --+ 0. If the function F(z, y) is sufficiently smooth in a neighborhood of the point M0, then the functions r~(2), w(2) are continuously differentiable and F(q~(2) + ~, 2 + v) = A(2)~ + a(2)v + g(2, ~, v)
(2.143)
2.3 EXAMPLESOF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
211
for 2 close to 20 and ( ~ ~a, v ~ R small in absolute value. Let the matrixvalued function A(2) and the vector-valued function a(2) be Lipschitz continuous and let the residual term g satisfy uniformly in 2 ]g(2, ~1, Vl)]~ o(p),
(2.144)
]g(21, ~1,121) - g(22, ~2,122)]~ o(P)]~,l-22]nus(P) (]~1-~2] if- ]121-122])
(2.145)
whenever ]~jl, ]vj]~fi with e(p) = o(1), p ~ 0. In this situation, Proposition 2.3.22 is supplemented by the following statement. PROPOSITION2.3.23. Let relations (2.143)-(2.145) hold and r~'(20) ~= 0. Let the density of the measure t2 of the Preisach nonlinearity be Lipschitz continuous with respect to both the arguments ~, ft. Then there is an rl > 0 such that the curves ~/r -- {(Z, y) E ~ d + l zr(t), y -- yr(t), t ~ [0, TF)} representing cycles of (2.141) in Ra+l and satisfying (2.142) as well as their periods Tr depend Lipschitz continuously on r for 0 < r < rl. Moreover, there is a neighborhood U c Ra+l of the point ;~do ~ F such that each closed curve ~ lying in U and representing a class of cycles of (2.141) with a period sufficiently close to To belongs to the set of curves ?r, 0 < r < rl, i.e. there are no other such curves in U. .
Z
--
We stress the difference between the conclusion of this proposition and that of the statements in the begining of this section on Hopf bifurcations in systems without hysteresis. System (2.141) with the Preisach nonlinearity has a continuum of small cycles in the phase space (this continuum is the join of the classes of cycles represented by the curves 7r with 0 < r < rl), while system (2.130) has typically at most one small cycle in the phase space for each value of the parameter, the surface like that shown in Fig. 2.39 in the product ~a+l of the phase space and the parameter axis consists of cycles existing for different parameter values. Another remarkable difference is seen if we consider the asymptotics of the cycles. Small cycles of system (2.130) form a smooth surface 5 in the space [~d+l of pairs (z, b). The curves ~/r representing cycles of system (2.141) in the space R~a+l of pairs (z, y) form a structure close to a cone, as is shown in Fig. 2.40. More precisely, the curves ?r are asymptotically close to the ellipses gr = Ado + r(z,, y,) + r(C, 0) for small r > 0, where Ado + r(z,, y,) is a ray tangent to the curve F at the point ,Ad0 and C is an appropriate cycle of the linear system z' = A(20)z (the cycles rC form a plane in the phase space ~d of z' = A(20)z). The Hausdorf distance between 7r and gr is o(r) as r ~ 0; Fig. 2.40 shows the curves ~r and the 5We consider sufficiently smooth nonlinearities F(., .).
212
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
~Z2
/ z1
FIGURE2.40 Curves 7r. two-dimensional cone surface formed by the ellipses gr with the vertex at the point .Ado. Some further details can be found in [117].
D i m e n s i o n of the Set of Cycles of System with a Parameter Let us consider again small cycles of the system (2.133) in the case of Hopf bifurcation from an equilibrium (z0, ~/0) at the Hopf bifurcation point b = b0. Here the Problem includes the 'external' parameter b and the 'internal' parameter 2. So, one might expect that the set of closed curves 7 = {(z(t), y(t), b) ~ [ ~ d + 2 . t E •} representing small cycles of (2.133) in the space R a+2 of triples (z, y, b) in a vicinity of the point.M0 - (z0, Y0, b0) with Y0 = (I)0/0) is generically two-parametric and that these curves accumulate at the points of some curve $ passing through the point.M0 and representing equilibria of (2.133). Namely, if F(zo, Y0, b0) = 0 with Y0 = cI)(r/0) satisfying (2.137), the matrix A(.,., .) = cgF/cgz(., .~ .) has a pair of simple eigenvalues • iwo (w0 > 0) at the point AF0 and proper smoothness and nondegeneracy conditions are satisfied, then the equality F(z, y, b) = 0 defines a two-dimensional surface | in some vicinity of the point d~0 in ~a+2, each point (z~, y~ b~) ~ | defines the stationary solution (z(t), y(t)) = (z~, y~) of (2.133) for b = b~ and the curve 8 c | is defined by the relations Sp(A(z, y, b)) ~ iw, Iw - w0J < ~, w > 0 with a sufficiently small ~. Yet, we do not know exact statements of this type. In problems on Hopf bifurcation from infinity for system (2.133) one should distinguish between the cases R~ = cx~ and Ra < cx~. For example, suppose that the conditions of Proposition 2.3.21 are satisfied. If R~ -- cx~
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
213
then the set of closed curves 7 - {(z(t), y(t), b) e ~d+2. t e R~}representing large cycles of (2.133) for b close to the asymptotic Hopf bifurcation point b0 is generically two-parametric; if R~ < cx~ then this set is generically (for 'nonexotic' nonlinearities F) one-parametric. One can see it more precisely from operator equations equivalent to the problem. We outline the approach roughly, not presenting any particular operator equation, which can be constructed in different ways in the form W r (z, y, b, T) = 0. Here r is an auxiliary parameter; the u n k n o w n s are the functions z = z(t), y = y(t), the parameter value b for which the class Uo<.~ r0 and every 0~<2~<1, the relations m a x I Z r , 2 ( t ) - Zr,2('c)l---> cx~, br, 2 ---> bo, Tr,2 ~ t,'c
TO = 27r/wo
as
r ~ cx~
similar to (2.138) hold uniformly with respect to 2 e [0, 1], and Zr, 2 -Zr,,2', Yr,2 -- Yr',2' if and only if r = r', 2 = 2 I. This implies that there is the two-parameter set of c u r v e s 7r,2 - {(Zr,2(t), Yr,2(t), br,2) 6 [~d+2 . t e [0, Tr,,~)} (r > r0, 0K2~<1) which are different for different (r, ;~) and that the diameter of 7r,,~ goes to infinity as r increases. Moreover, it turns out that the m a x i m u m max{d(b, 2, b,,V) " 0~2, 2' <~1} of the Hausdorf distance d(., .) between the c u r v e s 7r,2 and 7r,2' with the same r vanishes as r increases, i.e. the set U0~<,~<~l7r,;~ shrinks to the individual curve 7r,0 as r ~ cx~. If the vector c does not belong to the invariant plane of the matrix A(bo) corresponding to the pair of its simple eigenvalues +iwo, then the relations mint (c, z(t) ) ~ - c x t maxt (c, z(t) ) ~ ooasb ~ bo hold a priori for the cycles bifurcating from infinity. In case R~ < cx~ this implies (J,~x)(t) = (Jox)(t) with x(t) = (c, z(t)) for all 0~2~<1 and all the large cycles. Therefore in place of (2.146) one arrives at the system Wr(z, y, b, T) = 0, y = J0x, x = (c, z) with only the parameter r. One proves that for all r > r0 this system has solutions (Zr, yr, br, TF) satisfying (2.138). In this case, large cycles of system (2.133) form the one-parameter set of classes represented by the curves 7r (r > r0) with the diameters going to infinity as r increases. The auxiliary parameter r can be chosen in different ways. For example, a ' g o o d ' choice (which allows one to construct topologically nondegenerate systems (2.146)) is r -- Ilzllc. With this choice, the above statements
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
214
guarantee the existence of cycles for all sufficiently large amplitudes of the z-component. Statements of this type on Hopf bifurcations from infinity for systems with the Prandtl-Ishlinskii hysteresis nonlinearities (a class of nonlinearities close to a particular class of the Preisach models) in case Ra - ~ are presented in [116]. Case Ra < cx~ for systems with the stop hysteresis nonlinearity was studied in [168], including stability analysis of large cycles; a similar approach can be applied here.
2.3.8 CHAOTIC BEHAVIOR Definition of Chaos Letf : S ~ S be a continuous mapping in a subset S of an Euclidean space Re. Important attributes of chaotic behavior include sensitive dependence on initial conditions, an abundance of periodic trajectories and an irregular mixing effect describable informally by the existence of a finite number of separated subsets U0. . . . . Urn-1 of Re which can be visited by trajectories of some fixed iteratef k off in any prescribed order. Let/d = {U0 . . . . . Urn-l}, m > I be a family of disjoint subsets of S and let us denote the set of onesided sequences co = o90, o91. . . . " ogi 9 {0, 1 . . . . . m - 1} by f~R m. Sequences in f~R m will be used to prescribe the order in which sets Ui are to be visited. m-1 For x 9 Ui=0 Ui we denote by I(x) the number i satisfying x 9 Ui. A mapping f is called (/d, k)-chaotic (k is a positive integer) if there exists a compact f-invariant set Z C ~Ji Ui with the following properties: (p l) for any o9 9 f2R there exists x 9 Z with fik (x) = (fk')i 9 Uo~i for i~1; (p2) for any p-periodic sequence o9 9 f~R m, there exists a pk-periodic point x 9 Z with fik(x) 9 U~i; (p3) for each ~/> 0 there exists an uncountable subset Z(r/) of S, such that the simultaneous relationships lim supi__,~
I(fik(xl)) -- l(fik(x2))] ~1,
lim infi~ c~
~ik(xl) -- fik(x2)l < rI
h o l d for all Xl, x2 6 I ( r ] ) , Xl # x2.
The above-defined properties of chaotic behavior are similar to those in the Smale transverse homoclinic trajectory theorem with an important difference being that we do not require the existence of an invariant Cantor
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS TABLE 2.2 i
V~1) (i)
V~2) (i)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2.595 2.597 2.606 2.641 2.808 3.045 2.677 2.622 2.602
1.286 1.278 1.258 1.189 0.9016 1.150 1.599 1.366 1.304
Va(1) (i) 0.001328 0.001194 0.001099 0.001086 0.001535 -0.002766 0.001789 0.001615 0.001465
215
Parallelograms Va(2) (i) -0.002690 -0.002419 -0.002190 -0.002059 -0.002426 0.004905 -0.002620 -0.003255 -0.002989
v~1) (i) 0.003545 0.004168 0.004869 0.005637 0.007217 0.0003166 0.001140 0.002219 0.002922
v~2) (i) 0.009351 0.01097 0.01284 0.01472 0.01352 -0.009191 0.006788 0.007069 0.008053
set. Instead, the definition includes property (p2), which is usually a corollary of uniqueness, and (p3), which is a form of sensitivity and irregular mixing as in the Li-Yorke definition of chaos [169], with the subset/701) corresponding to the Li-Yorke scrambled subset So. A similar definition was used previously in [170]. Note also that the one-sided left shift cr+ is a factor of the restrictionfkls (See [171], p. 68).
Chaos in an ODE with Preisach Nonlinearity Consider Eqn. (2.9) with b = I and an appropriate Poincare map F1 : FI 1-I generated by it. Let v = (v (1), v (2)) denote the element of FI. A part of the co-limit set of F that was constructed with help of the computer is given in Fig. 2.21, (p). Introduce the parallelogram sets R(i) ~ l-I, i = 0 . . . . . 8 given by the center points vc(i), and the halves of the side vectors va(i) and vb(i):
R(i) -- {vc(i) 4- ~va(i) 4- flvb(i) : --1 < ~, fl < 1}.
(2.147)
Values of vc(i), va(i) and vb(i) are given in Table 2.2. Let/d denote the family of connected components of the set ~8=0 R(i). 2.3.6. The family bl has nine components, i.e. R(i) N R(j) = O, i ~ j, i , j = O . . . . . 8.
LEMMA
PROOF. This is clear from the definition of set R(i). See also Fig. 2.41.
THEOREM2.3.5. Mapping F1 is (ld, 16)-chaotic. Proof of this theorem is given in Section 2.4.4.
[]
CHAPTER 2
216
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
I
I
'
I
'
I
'
1.35 1.8 1.3 1.6 1.25 1.4
-
,
I
,
2.59
I
,
2.6
I
,
2.61
I
,
2.62
I
2.63
1.2 -
1-
0.8 2.5
2.6
F I G U R E 2.41
2.7
2.8
2.9
3
Sets R(i), i = 0 . . . . . 8 in c o o r d i n a t e s t m o d V ~ r , z (2).
2.5 -
~,,~
-
1.4
r :Y~'G
1.5
v-,,,, #?.. , : , . ~ , - 4 d ~ ".
:V,
..
~" \'~
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
0.5
1 F I G U R E 2.42
2
3
4
Sets R(i), i = 0 . . . . . 8 a n d a c h a o t i c a t t r a c t o r .
5
,
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
217
Note also the following. PROPOSITION2.3.24. The map F1 has a fixed point v, ~ R(0) and for any positive
integer p greater than eight there is a periodic point v ~ R(O) which has the minimal period p, and which is not asymptotically stable. Moreover, Eqn. (2.9) has periodic solutions of minimal periods v/2rc 9 (3kl + 29k2), where kl, k2~>0, kl + k2 > 0. In particular there exist solutions of all periods x/-2rcn, with n > 55. Proof of the proposition closely follows ideas in [172,173].
Interpretation In this subsection we discuss another interpretation of our main result from the previous section. It is convenient to begin with some definitions in terms of Eqn. (2.13). We will always suppose that the functionf(t, z, u) is periodic in t with minimal period T > 0. Thus any periodic solution of that equation must have a period which is a multiple of T. Let no be a positive integer and zo(t), - ~ < t < ~ , (2.148) be a function with the minimal period noT. This function will play the role of an approximate n0T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.13). We will always deal with the situation when the function zo(t) is piecewise continuous, and the limits z(t - 0) = lim z(t)
rSt
are well defined at the points of discontinuity. In our setting the wording 'the function zo(t) can be considered as an approximate n0T-periodic solution of Eqn. (2.13)' means that, firstly, the jump Iz0(t) - zo(t - 0)l at any discontinuity point t is rather small, and, secondly, the function almost satisfies the equation between successive points of discontinuity (the quantitative bounds for the corresponding discrepancies will be specified below). Suppose that for a positive integer nl < no, the number Iz0(0) - z0(nlT - 0)1 is small. Then we can treat the niT-periodic function Zl(t), - o e < t < oe, which is defined by zl(t) = zo(t), 0 <~t < niT, as an approximate niTperiodic solution of Eqn. (2.13). Since no is the least period of zo(t) and
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
218
z
Zl.
$_;
,..G/ Zo
x
t
!
FIGURE 2.43 Functions z0 (solid) and Zl (dotted). Here z0 has period 2T, z I has period T; thus z0, Zl coincide on 2nT<.t < (2n + 1)T, n = 0, 4-1, 4-2. . . . in this case. nl < no, w e define the distance r b e t w e e n the c o r r e s p o n d i n g functions
zo(t), zl (t) b y r = sup Izo(t) - zl(t)l > 0.
(2.149)
t
Figure 2.43 illustrates the situation for the case no = 2, nl - 1: the functions z0 a n d Zl are s h o w n by a solid a n d a dotted line, respectively. We can use as a p p r o x i m a t e patterns for possible b o u n d e d o u t p u t profiles, not only the functions zo(t) a n d zl(t) themselves, b u t also all possible 'shuffiings of these functions'. To explain w h a t this m e a n s w e need additional notation a n d definitions. Let f~ be the totality of all bi-infinite oo b i n a r y sequences o9 = {o9i}i=-oo w i t h ogi E {0, 1} for i = 0, 4-1, 4-2 . . . . . To each sequence co e f2 there corresponds the sequence of n u m b e r s ti to be defined b y to = 0, i-1
ti = T E no~] j=0 for i = 1, 2, 3 . . . . . a n d b y i
ti--T
E
no~j
j=-I
for i = - 1 , - 2 , - 3 . . . . . . That is, the real line R 1 is partitioned into the intervals Ii = [ti, ti+l) w h e r e the length of the interval Ii equals no~iT. Figure 2.44 illustrates this idea: here 09= . . . . 0 , 1 , 0 , 1 , 1 , 0 . . . . . a n d the element coo is in bold.
(2.150)
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
-T
0
T
219
2T
3T
4T
FIGURE 2.44 Partition of R 1 corresponding to o~ . . . . . 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0 . . . . ; w e show the intervals corresponding to coi = 0 by the solid lines and intervals I i, corresponding to coi = 1, by the dotted line, with co0 = 0 in bold.
Z l ZI.
9
M
-.~.. .~"
Z1"
Z1.
ir
".~
If ~
l
,
'0
i
r
CT
l
~3T
i
/
/
if
,
,
I
~4T
t
I
!
z0 FIGURE 2.45
Function zo~ for o~ . . . . .
0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0 . . . .
C o r r e s p o n d i n g to a n y o9 ~ f~ t h e f u n c t i o n zoo(t) is d e f i n e d b y
zoo(t) - zo~i(t - ti),
for
t i ~ t < ti+l.
F i g u r e 2.45 s h o w s a f r a g m e n t of t h e f u n c t i o n zo~ for t h e case w h e n co satisfies (2.150). We will u s e t h e n o t a t i o n Z ~ = {zm(t) 9 o9 ~ f~}. PROPOSITION 2.3.25. A n y two functions Zm~l), zo)(2) 09(2) . Moreover, sup
IZco(1)--Z(o(2) I -- r(09 (1), to(2))~rmin > 0,
~_
Z ~ are different if 09(1)
09(1) 09(2) E ~'-~, ~(1) ~: 09(2).
-c~
inf r(09 (1), 09(2))/~rmin > O, co(l) ~_co(2)
09(1), 09(2) E ~
is strictly positive. We call r ( Z n ) t h e s e p a r a t i o n t h r e s h o l d for t h e set Z n .
(2.152)
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
220
Z
zo)(t) + e / I ~" ~ " ~ ,
II l ~
,/
"
~ '",
,'
'" .... ',,
"
,' ,'
"',
'" ....
"~, 9 ,
'
"'"
r
, i
,
2~T.... "'/
',,
!
I
.
I
~
9 ~ aL
~" ~
'
,' I 9
~
IL
""
9 ',.: v
:'T--'" " "
t ,"
",
'
zto(t)- e
FIGURE 2.46 A function z(t) (solid dark curve) satisfying (2.155), with o~ . . . . . O, 1, O, 1, 1, 0 .... If the sequence o9 is p-periodic in the sense that ogi = 0, 4-1, +2 . . . . . then the function z~(t) is T~-periodic where
ogi+p
for i =
p-1
To~ - T Z
n~i"
(2.153)
i=0
The number (2.153) is the minimal period of the function zoo, provided that p is the minimal period of the sequence co. Thus, among the elements of the set Zfl there are periodic functions with arbitrary large minimal periods. However, the main bulk of the set Zfl consists of functions which do not follow any particular pattern. Let e be a positive number satisfying e < r(Zn)/2.
(2.154)
We will say that Eqn. (2.13) is (zo, Zl, e)-compatible if the following two conditions hold: (C1) For any function zoo(t), o9 ~ f2 there exists a solution z(t) of Eqn. (2.13) satisfying the uniform estimate max
-cx~
Iz(t) - z~(t)l < e.
(2.155)
(C2) Additionally, if the sequence o9 is p-periodic, then there exists a T~periodic solution z(t) of Eqn. (2.13) satisfying the uniform estimate (2.155), where To~ is given by (2.153). Figure 2.46 graphs a function z(t) that satisfies (2.155), where o9 satisfies (2.150).
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
'
i
i
!
'
i '
2
"
221
i
'
i
'
'
1'0
'
i
'
_
0-1 -2
,...
,
0
|
20
,
i
40
,
!
60
,
i~ , 80 100 120 140
-20
;
1;
'
20
FIGURE 2.47 A function zo(t) on the left and a function z l(t) on the right. In the scalar function z for small e, functions z(t) satisfying (2.155) follow closely the 'guidance' of a c o r r e s p o n d i n g function zoo(t). In the term i n o l o g y of hyperbolicity theory, a function z(.) is an e-shadow of zoo(-). Since e is strictly less than half of the separation threshold r(Zr any solution z(t) can be considered as an e-shadow of not more than for one guide zoo. Thus, the m e a n i n g of (z0, Zl, e)-compatibility is that for any pattern given b y a function zo~ ~ Zr we can find a b o u n d e d solution profile which is an e-shadow of zoo. Consider Eqn. (2.9) with b = 1. As zo(t) = (xo, x'o) we choose the numerical solution of (2.9) c o r r e s p o n d i n g to the pseudo-trajectory of F1 of the length nine, which is given as the u n i o n of nine numerical trajectories with initial conditions x(ti) = 0.5, x'(ti) v~2) (i) on the intervals [ti, ti+l), i - 0 . . . . . 8; V~1) , V~2) are given in Table 2.2 and ti is given b y -
ti =
-
v~1) (i) + 3 i - v ~ n , v~1) (i) + (3i + i - 4 ) . ~/2n, v~1) (i) + (3i + 2). ~/2n,
i - 0 . . . . . 4, i - 5 . . . . . 6, i = 7 . . . . . 8,
vf 1) (0) + 29. v ~ n ,
i - 9.
Thus no = 29. Let us choose z] (t) as zo(t) on the interval [to, to + 3- ~/2n), in which case n l -- 3. The pictures of the w a v e g u i d e s are given in Fig. 2.47. LEMMA2.3.7. The following relation holds: r(Zn) > 0.1. By this l e m m a the (z0, Zl, e)-compatibility is well defined w h e n e v e r e<0.05. The principal result of the previous section, T h e o r e m 2.3.5, m a y be rewritten n o w as follows.
222
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
THEOREM2.3.6. The equation is (zo, Z l , O.O1)-compatible.
Why It is Interesting and Important The (z0, zl, s)-compatibility implies, in particular, that the totality of bounded solutions is spatially chaotic in a topological sense. We recall, as an aside, that the three main aspects of chaotic behavior are equally important: the measure theory aspect such as the existence of the Sinai-Ruelle-Bowen invariant measures [174]; the 'sensitivity' aspect, such as positivity of Lyapunov exponents [171]; and the topological aspect describing irregular mixing properties in terms of symbolic dynamics [171]. At an informal level the topological aspect of the spatially chaotic behavior can be described as follows. Suppose that we register the forms of the solutions within a certain precision ~, where ~ is greater than s, but significantly less than the separation threshold (see the relevant numerical information in the next section). Then a 'shadow solution' z(t), satisfying (2.155), is indistinguishable from its guide zo~(t), although different guides are quite distinguishable. Thus any chaotic shuffling zo~ of two basic patterns z0, Zl provides a possible steady profile (within the accuracy ~). The next level of formalization requires ideas of symbolic dynamics. Denote by n the least common multiple of the numbers no, nl. Also let e [0, noT) be a fixed number such that Iz0(z) - Zl(Z)l > 2s (such a ~ exists by (2.154)). Firstly, we characterize a function z(t), -cx~ < t < cx~,by the bi-infinite sequence of its values Zi - -
z(inT + z),
i = O, 4-1, 4-2 . . . . .
(2.156)
That is, we measure the values of z(t) 'stroboscopically' with the uniform interval nT between the measurements. Further, encode the function z(t) by a binary sequence o9 e f~, which is constructed as follows. Let
Io = {z:lz- z00:)l~e},
I1 -- {z:lz- Zl('01- ~s}.
The sets I0 and 11 do not intersect since Iz0(z) - Zl('01 > 2S. If for any i the value zi belongs either to I0 or to I1, then we define the code sequence o9 - co(z(.)) by setting o g i = 0 in the first instance, and ogi = 1 in the second. In other words, we indicate the measurement positions inT, i = 0, 4-1, 4-2 . . . . where the function z(t) goes through a window I0 or I1 (see Fig. 2.48 for one-dimensional interpretation). If the value zi does not belong to one of these two windows for some i, then our coding procedure fails, and we are not interested in such 'unencodable' functions z(t). Since I0 N I1 -- 0, not more than one code can correspond to a particular function z(t). N o w the compatibility condition (C1) implies that any random
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
223
Z
I I f
t
FIGURE 2.48 A function z(t) with the code .... 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0 . . . . . sequence o9 a p p e a r s as a code for some b o u n d e d profile. (Indeed, let us introduce a sequence o9* b y substituting n/no ones (n/nl zeros) instead of a n y one (any zero) entry of the sequence o9. Then, the function z~. (t) ~ Z~ has the required properties.) For a given function z(t) w e denote b y ;:(-) = anTZ(.) its (left) nT-shift to be defined b y ;:(t) = z(t + nT). Let us denote also b y a the s t a n d a r d (left) shift on f2 given b y a(og) = o91 -- ( . . . . . o9I 1' 090' r 091t . . . . ) !
w h e r e ogi = o9i+1. For instance, if o9 - . . . , 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0 . . . . , then ogl
...,0,1,0,1,1,0
.....
PROPOSITION 2.3.26. Suppose that Eqn. (2.13) is (zo, Zl, e)-compatible. Then to
each o9 ~ ~ there is a solution z~(x) of Eqn. (2.13), such that z~(.) has the code co, and this correspondence og~-+zo~is shift invariant: O'nTZo~(') = Zao~(') for og~f~. Proposition 2.3.26 can be p r o v e d in a s t a n d a r d w a y using the Z o r n L e m m a . In technical terms, the above proposition m e a n s that the restriction O'nT of the shift an0T to the set {z~ : o9 ~ f2} is semi-conjugate to the shift a in f2. Such semi-conjugacy is w i d e l y recognized as the m o s t i m p o r t a n t attribute of topologically chaotic behavior, see, for example, [171]. It is also i m p o r t a n t to note that (z0, Zl, e)-compatibility implies the existence of solutions w i t h a w i d e range of nontrivial regular patterns. For instance, one more basic characteristic of chaotic b e h a v i o r is an a b u n d a n c e of periodic solutions and, in particular, an exponential rate of increase of the m a x i m a l n u m b e r of pairwise e-separated 6 kT-periodic solutions w h e n k increases, see [ 171]. 6Two functions z(x), y(x) are E-separated if sup Iz(x) - y(x)l > e.
224
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
PROPOSITION2.3.27. Suppose that Eqn. (2.13) is (z0, Zl, e)-compatible and denote by n the least common multiple of the numbers no, nl. Then it has at least 2 k periodic solutions of period kn which are pairwise e-separated. This assertion follows immediately from the definitions. Another example of functions with a regular pattern is given by the socalled recurrent functions [97], which exhibit fractal-type features. The recurrence property of a function z(t) with - c ~ < t < o0 means that for each pair of positive numbers (e, a) there exists A > 0 such that for each real r, any interval which is longer than A contains r such that the function t --, z(t + r) is e-close to the function t ~ z(t + a), t ~ [-T, T]. Recurrent nonperiodic functions are important today in the analysis of desynchronized systems, various new models in biology, etc. The notion of a recurrent sequence co is defined analogously. Recall, in particular, the classical Morse example of a recurrent sequence. We begin from the one-element sequence Sl = 0 and then substitute at each step the two-element sequence 0, 1 instead of 0 and two-element sequence 1, 0 instead of 1. Thus, Sl = 0 , 1 ; s2 = 0 , 1 , 1 , 0 ; $3 = 0 , 1 , 1 , 0 , 1 , 0 , 0 , 1 ; S4 = 0, 1, 1,0, 1,0,0, 1, 1,0,0, 1,0, 1, 1,0; etc.
After infinitely many iterations we obtain the famous forward Morse sequence M. Considering backward shifts of this sequence and their weak limits we arrive at the set A//of bi-infinite Morse sequences. PROPOSITION2.3.28. Suppose that Eqn. (2.13) is (zo, zl, e)-compatible and the sequence co is recurrent in the Morse sense (for instance, one of the set .M). Then there exists a recurrent, nonperiodic, solution satisfying (2.155). The proof follows the standard constructions [175]. 2.3.9 RECURRENT OSCILLATIONS
We will be interested in recurrent solutions of the general equations
x' =fit, x, y(t)), y(t) = (Fit0, y(to)]x) (t).
(2.157) (2.158)
Here x ~ ~a, and y belongs to a complete metric space 3; with the metric py. Also, for a fixed Y0, the operator F[t0, Y0] transforms functions
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
225
x 9 [to, oo) ~ ~a into functions y 9 [to, oo) ~ 3;. For a particular function x(.), the notation (Fit0, y0]x) (t) refers as usual to the value of the corresponding function y(.) at the m o m e n t t. The operators describing the hysteresis nonlinearities can be treated with a typically infinite dimensional set 3; of internal states y. We will use the definition of recurrent property introduced on the previous page. Periodic, quasiperiodic and almost-periodic functions are recurrent, however the class of recurrent functions is m u c h wider. The typical examples of recurrent, but not almost-periodic behavior are given by various modifications of the classical Morse construction [176]. Such functions are getting rather important today due to analysis of desynchronized systems [177], various new models in biology, etc. We will establish, u n d e r some natural technical restriction, that the system (2.157)-(2.158) has a recurrent solution, providing that the function f in the right-hand side of Eqn. (2.157) is recurrent in t, and that there exists at least one solution (x(t), y(t)) which is uniformly b o u n d e d at t --+ oo. Surprisingly, some of our results seem to be new even for Eqns. (2.157)(2.158) without hysteresis.
(W, C)- and s
Functions
Let us introduce some notation. 9 Let a function a of scalar a r g u m e n t be measurable at the interval [r, r~] and take values in a finite-dimensional Euclidean space. We denote II~ll&.~ =
I~(t)l dt.
(2.159)
9 If a function ~ is additionally absolutely continuous at [~, rr], denote
Ilallw~,~ = la(~)l + Ila'lls
(2.160)
9 For any continuous functions yl, Y2 : [z, rT] --+ 3;, we define
P:,cr(Yl, y2)
-- max P3;(yl(t), y2(t)). te[~,cr]
(2.161)
We denote by Wr,r aa the Banach space of absolutely continuous functions x 9 [r, cr] --+ R a with the n o r m (2.160). Analogously, denote by C~,~;3; the complete metric space of continuous functions y : [~, or] ~ 3; with the uniform metric (2.161).
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
226
Denote the z-shift of a function y by 0(r)y:
(O(r)y) (t) = y(t + r). We say that a set ,5' c ~ is A-dense if any interval [t, t + A] contains at least one element from $; that is ,_q~[t, t + A] ~a 0, for all t ~ ( - ~ , ~ ) . Let a function x 9 R ~ R~a be absolutely continuous on any finite interval, whereas a function y : ~ ~ 3; is continuous. The pair (x, y) is said to be (W, C)-recurrent if for any positive T, ~ there exists A = A(T, e) such that the set of rT ~ ( - ~ , o0) satisfying
II0(~)x- O(~)xlIw_T,T + P-T,T(O(r)Y, O(cr)y) < e is A-dense for each z ~ (-cx~, cx~). Let a functionf be measurable in t and continuous in x, y (that is, it satisfies the Caratheodory condition). Let also f satisfy the following growing condition: TT Ixl,
T< ~
(2.162)
for any T, R > 0. The function f is s in t if for any positive numbers T, R, e there existsA = A(T, R, e) such that the set of cr ~ (-oo, o0) satisfying T
max Ll:(t + ,, x, y) - f i t + or, x, y)l dt < e T ]xI<<.R,Y~3;
(2.163)
is A-dense for each 9 ~ (-oo, oo).
(W, C)-Correct Hysteresis Nonlinearities We will use a standard approach to describe hysteresis nonlinearities, s e e [15] and the references therein. We suppose that the operator F[t0, Y0] can be understood as a description of an autonomous control dynamical system F. That is, the family of operators F[t0, Y0] must satisfy the following properties: 9 the Volterra property: X(S) =-- Xl(S), S E
[to, t],
implies
(F[t0, y0]x) (t) = (F[t0, y0]xl) (t);
9 the semigroup property: (F[tl, (F[t0, y0]x)(tl)]X)(t) - (F[t0, y0]x)(t), for to < tl < t;
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
227
9 the autonomy property: (Fit0, y0]x) (t) = (F[t0, y0]Xl) (t -- t o q- tl), where Xl(t) = x(t - to + tl) and to < tl < t. N o w we introduce some additional properties of the hysteresis operators F. We will suppose that the operators F[t0, Y0] are defined for all absolutely continuous functions x 9 [0, oe) --~ ~ct and that their outputs are continuous. Using the Volterra property, the operators Fit0, Y0] are also well defined at any finite interval [to, tl]. Recall, that a set $1 of measurable functions x 9 [0, t] ~ ~a is uniformly integrable if the relationship f lim / [x(t)[ dt = 0 2--,oo dlx(t)l>2 holds uniformly in x 6 51. A set $2 of Y-valued continuous functions is said to be equicontinuous if for any e > 0 there exists 6 > 0 such that p y ( y ( t l ) , y(t2)) < e,
It1 - t 2 ] < 6, y 6 $2,
holds. We say that a nonlinearity F is (W, C)-correct if for any uniformly bounded set $1 of absolutely continuous functions, such that the set of derivatives {x', x 6 $1} is uniformly integrable, the set $2 -- {l-'[0, yo]x : Yo ~ 3;, x
~
$1}
is equicontinuous, and if the relationships [IXn - X]lWto,t 4- P 3; (,YO(n) ' Yo) ---> 0
imply p y ((F[t0, y~n)]xn)(t), (F[t0, yo]x)(t)) ~ O.
for any - ~ < to < t < c~. As examples of (W, C)-correctness we mention the Prandtl, Besseling, Ishlinskii, Mizes, Tresca, etc. models of plasticity, Madelung, Preisach, Giltay, Mayergoys, etc. models in ferromagnetism and many, many others, see [7,14,15,157] and the bibliographies therein. Actually all hysteresis nonlinearities with continuous output signals known to us belong to the class of (W, C)-continuous nonlinearities.
228
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
Main Result Let us come back to the system (2.157)-(2.158). The function f in the right-hand side of (2.157) will always satisfy the Caratheodory condition. We will understand the solutions of Eqns. (2.157)-(2.158) in the classical sense: solution is a pair (x, y) where x 9 [to, cx~) "---> RJ is a locally absolutely continuous function and y : [to, cx~) :--+ 32 is continuous; the relationships (2.157) should hold almost everywhere and the relationship (2.158) everywhere. (Recall [178] that the function x 9 [~, a] ~ ~d is absolutely continuous if x' exists almost everywhere, is integrable on [r, a], and x'(t)dt = x(tl) - x(t2) for r < tl < t2 < a.) The pair (x, y) where the functions x and y are defined over the whole interval (-cxz, oo) is said to be a solution of the system (2.157)-(2.158) if the restrictions of the functions x, y to the interval [to, ~ ) provide a solution of this system for each to 6 (-cx~, oo). The last definition is correct by the Volterra property.
ft~
THEOREM2.3.7. Let f be s
in t and let F be (W, C)-correct. Let (x,(t), y,(t)),
t>~O,
be a solution of the system (2.157)-(2.158) with the function x,(t) uniformly bounded. Then there exists a (W, C)-recurrent solution (x(t), y(t)) of the system (2.157)-(2.158). N o w we will give some general comments concerning the use of the preceding theorem. Under simple additional assumptions, that hold for all practically important hysteresis nonlinearities, any initial problem
x(to) = xo ~ Rd,
y(to) -- Yo ~ Y,
(2.164)
has at least one solution (x, y) defined at the maximal interval [to, T) where either T = ~ or Ix(t)l --* ~ as t -+ T. It is sufficient, for instance, to suppose that the hysteresis nonlinearity F is continuous from C to C (as in the case of Prandtl, Besseling, Tresca, Mises, Giltay, etc. nonlinearities) or is continuous from W to W (as is the case for the Madelung nonlinearity). The proof proceeds in the usual way using the Showder fixed-point theorem. We will say in this situation that the initial problems for Eqns. (2.157)-(2.158) have local solution. If the initial problems have local solutions, we say that the system (2.157)-(2.158) is dissipative if for any R > 0 there exists R1 > 0 such that lim sup Ix(t)l~R, t--, oo ix01~
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
229
where x(t) is a solution of Eqn. (2.164); the sufficient conditions of dissipativity are easy to suggest in terms of Lyapunov functions, etc. COROLLARY2.3.12. Let f be s in t and let F be (W, C)-continuous. Let the system (2.157)-(2.158) be dissipative. Then there exists a (W, C)-recurrent solution (x(t), y(t)) of the system (2.157)-(2.158). Note that for analysis of stability of recurrent solutions, the method suggested in [83] is applicable without trouble.
2.3.10 HYSTERESIS VERSUS TIME RELAXATION Generalities Time relaxation and hysteresis are common strongly nonlinear phenomena which occur in many industrial, physical and economic systems. Often these two types of phenomena manifest different stages of the same or similar processes. A number of fundamental hysteresis models can be considered as limit cases of time relaxation processes, or admit an approximation by a differential equation which is singular with respect to a particular parameter. However, the level of interaction between theories of systems with time relaxation and systems with hysteresis (and between the 'relaxation' and 'hysteresis' research communities) is quite low. The aim of this section is to discuss, at the very basic level, relationships between those two topics. An instructive singularly perturbed system is the following
x' =fit, x, y), ey' = g(x, y),
(2.165) (2.166)
where e > 0 is a small parameter. We concentrate first on the auxiliary equation
~y' = g(x(t), y), where x(t) is an arbitrary function. We denote the solution of this equation, with a given initial condition y(0) = Y0, by
y(t) = VE[t0, yo]x(t). Under suitable technical conditions it can be proved that for a generic function x(t) there exists a limit
y~(t) = V[to, yo]x(t) = lim V~[t0, yo]x(t). 6--+0
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
230
g(x,y)
/s x,~ X
g(x,y)>O
FIGURE 2.49 Relay as a singularly perturbed ODE. The solutions of the original system are then approximated as e ~ 0 by the solutions of the differential-operator equation
x' =fit, x, y(t)),
y(t) = V[to, yo]x(t).
(2.167)
The following observation is straightforward: LEMMA2.3.8. The limit operator V is rate-independent. Thus, the global analysis of singularly perturbed equations becomes, in the first approximation, an investigation of equations with hysteresis nonlinearities. This is the first point of contact between equations with hysteresis and singularly perturbed equations. We will demonstrate how this observation works below. Let the function g be described by the picture in Fig. 2.49. Suppose x(t) does not have local minima equal to a or local maxima equal to ft. Then the operator V is well defined on x(t) and
V[to, yo]x(t) = R~,fl[to, yo]x(t) for all t > to such that
x(t) # a
and
x(t) # fl.
(See Section 2.1.2 for the definition of Ra,fl.) This example shows that singularly perturbed equations can approximate equations with hysteresis. This is the second point of contact between equations with hysteresis and singularly perturbed equations. This approach is especially important if there are some physical reasons to believe that the relay (or any other discontinuous hysteresis nonlinearity) is an idealization of a limit operator similar to V. Sometimes, however,
2.3 EXAMPLESOF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS
231
discontinuous hysteresis operators are idealizations of quite different continuous operators. The application of methods used in systems with singular perturbations to these new types of singular approximations is the third point of contact between equations with hysteresis and singularly perturbed equations. We note in conclusion that numerous mathematical models of physical, mechanical and other systems can be described by the equations of the form
x' =fit, x, y, z)~ y = Fx(t),
ez' = g(x, y, z) where F is a continuous hysteresis nonlinearity acting on function x(t) (for, instance, Preisach nonlinearity P a with an absolutely continuous measure #). The analysis of such systems will require the combination of ideas both in the area of systems with hysteresis and in the area of singularly perturbed systems. The main technical problem lies in the fact that hysteresis operators are not smooth in a standard sense: they only satisfy a Lipschitz condition as operators in function spaces. Thus, even the notions of stable and unstable manifolds must be adjusted accordingly.
Generalized Play Ferromagnetic monocrystals can be considered as an idealization of an interesting hysteresis nonlinearity: the generalized play [15]. This will be denoted by L~, and is illustrated in Fig. 2.50. Formally, this nonlinearity can be described as follows. We denote by f2 the set of pairs (x, y) satisfying
?_(x)~y~7+(x). For a continuous input x(t) and for initial state r/0 satisfying (x(to), rio) ~ f2, the output y(t) = L~[to, r/0]x(t) is the unique continuous function such that, firstly, y(to) = r/0, secondly,
(x(t), y(t)) ~ f2,
t~to,
and, thirdly, the inclusion
(x(t), y(~)) ~ f2,
~t~r~
implies y(t) =_ y(r), z~tKr~. Thus, the output behaves 'lazily': it prefers to be unchanged when the phase pair (x(t), y(t)) belongs to f2. Fig. 2.51 shows a typical phase trajectory.
232
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
V_(x)
,
1
='? / 13+~
x
(x) FIGURE 2.50 Generalized play Le.
Generalized play L~ can be also represented by the Preisach m o d e l with an appropriate measure. LEMMA2.3.9. Suppose x(t) has no local minima equal to ~ or local maxima equal
to fl, and let Yo equal either 0 or 1. Then the limit y,(t) = lim L~[to, yo]x(t) e-+ O
is well defined, and y,(t) - 2R_Kl~[t0, yo]x(t) - 1 for all t > to such that x(t) # ~
and
x(t) # fl.
In other words, for generic input functions x(t) the discontinuous nonlinearity 2R_K~x(t) - I is a limit of continuous nonlinearities LE[to, Y0] as E ----~ 0.
233
2.3 EXAMPLES OF RIGOROUS CONCLUSIONS y
ar
ill
v
X
x~
FIGURE 2.51 Phase portrait of a typical trajectory for the generalized play Le.
Hysteretic Canards We consider the equation x" + x - b sin(t) + y(t),
y(t) - 2 R _ K ~ x ( t ) - 1.
(2.168)
By L e m m a 2.3.9 this is to be considered as an idealization of the equation x" 4- x = b sin(t) 4- y(t)~
y(t) = L~x(t)
(2.169)
where Le is a generalized play from the previous subsection, and e > 0 is a small parameter. We will say that a pair (x,(t)~ y~(t)) is a limit periodic solution of Eqn. (2.169), if it can be approximated by some 2~-periodic solutions (x~ (t), ye (t))
234
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
of the system (2.169) with arbitrary small e. That is, if for any a > 0 there exists e0 > 0 such that for e < e0 Eqn. (2.169) has a periodic solution xe(t), ye (t) satisfying max [xe(t)- x,(t)[ < a. THEOREM 2.3.8. Let 0 < b < 4/n, then Eqn. (2.169) has exactly three limit periodic solutions:
(xo(t), yo(t)),
(xl(t), yl(t)),
(x2(t), y2(t)).
(2.170)
We n o w give explicit formulas for the solutions (2.170). Introduce the functions b x0(t, b) = - f l cos t + ~ (sin t - t cos t)
nb +-v-(cos t - 1) sin t, 4
(
Xl t + n-~:.b 2 '
)
=-(l+fl)
+I+
cost+~
- n K t < n,
sin~sint-tcos
t+
2
nb (cos t - 1)(sin t + 1), ~ - 2nKt < ~, 4 sin(z/2)
x2(t) = - x l ( t - n). Here ~ = v(b), 0 < b < 4 / n is defined by the relationships 1-fl arccosl_Ffl
b=2
f l - 1 + (fl+ 1)cosz sin(r/2) (sin ~ + "c- 2n)
Introduce also 2n-periodic functions y0 (t), yl(t), y2(t) by the equalities nb ~ sint,
y0(t;b)=
Yl t +
n-r.b)= 2 '
1
-nKt
nb r --~-sin~(l+sint),
y2(t) = - y l ( t - n).
r-2n~
235
2.4 EXAMPLES OF TECHNICAL TOOLBOXES PROPOSITION2.3.29. The functions given above satisfy Theorem 2.3.8.
Theorem 2.3.8 and Proposition 2.3.29 are similar to those proved in [179]. Figures 2.52, 2.53 show x0(t), yo(t) w h e n / / = 1. Similarly, Figs. 2.54, 2.55 show the functions xl(t), Yl (t). We claim that these limit solutions are analogs of canard solutions, see [180-182]. In particular, (xo(t), yo(t)) is an analog of the symmetric canard and (xl (t), Yl (t)) is an analog of the asymmetric canard. 9 The first reason is that classical canards and these solutions are mathematical explanations of the same physical phenomena: the limit behavior of periodic solutions of a family of differential equations approximating a given equation with a discontinuous, relaytype nonlinearity. 9 Secondly, in both cases the limit solutions demonstrate strange behavior: in the classical canard situation for a time they follow unstable manifolds; in the 'hysteretic canard' situation, the solutions can stop in the course of a jump, and then hover for a while at an intermediate level. 9 Thirdly, similar methods could probably be applied to analyze both situations. For example, the topological degree approach used to prove the last theorem can be useful for the rough location of classical canards. On the other hand, the typical 'canard community' methods of investigation will be useful in a more subtle asymptotic analysis of hysteresis canards.
2.4 E X A M P L E S
OF TECHNICAL
TOOLBOXES
2.4.1 DESCRIPTIONS OF PREISACH NONLINEARITY Standard Representation States and Outputs Consider the set f2 on which the internal states ~/ : f2 ~ {0, 1} of the Preisach nonlinearity P are defined. Under natural technical restrictions this set can be chosen to be the two-dimensional half-plane FI = {(~, fl) : fl > ~} (see [15]). Moreover, the formula (2.3) is replaced by:
y(t) - y[to, r/0](t) - f~<~ Ra,~[to, r/0(co)]x(t) d#,
t~to.
(2.171)
Here # is a probability Borel measure in FI. Below, unless the opposite is stated explicitly, we suppose that this measure is absolutely continuous
236
CHAPTER 2
Differential Equations with Hysteresis
1
0.5
.
.
-3
FIGURE 2.52
.
.
.
-2
.
.
2
-1
3
Functions xo(t) (sine-like function) and yo(t) (step-like function).
l-
v
-1-
FIGURE 2.53
Parametric plot of (x0(t), yo(t)).
X
2.4 EXAMPLES OF TECHNICAL TOOLBOXES
237
2
1.5 1
0.5
9
/-5
FIGURE 2.54
,
-4
-3
,
.
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
-2
.
.
.
1
Functions x l(t) (sine-like function) and yo(t) (step-like function).
1 I I I I I
-1
J
1
-1-
FIGURE 2.55
Parametric plot of (x l(t), yl(t)).
X
238
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
with respect to the standard Lebesgue measure. That is, for S c II #(S) = L h(~x, fl)d~dfl, where h is nonnegative, and satisfies
/ii
h(~, fl) dadfl = 1.
It is sufficient to consider the case when the initial and varying states r/0, 1/(t) are characteristic functions of sets S, which look like the shaded set in Fig. 2.56. That is, S is located to the left of the line a - fl and below a continuous curve L = Ls, with a nonpositive slope. Additionally, in this standard case the coordinates of the intersection of L with the diagonal coincide with the current value of the input x. In other words such sets S admit the representation S = {(a,/~) :/~ + a ~ < ~ s ( / ~ - a)}
where 6s(U), 0~
- vl.
The curve Ls is connected with the function ~'s by
LS = {(a, t) : fl + ~ = ~/s(fl- a)}.
(2.172)
We denote by (~, the set of states r/of the Preisach nonlinearity the characteristic functions of which are described above (see Fig. 2.42).
Dynamics
The set ~, is convenient because the evolution of the every state r/e ~, admits a simple geometrical interpretation in terms of the area described by i/, see Figs. 2.57, 2.58. Here the input x(t), moves along the horizontal scroll-bar, and controls the point on the diagonal a = fl above itself. When moving toward the upper right corner, this point on the diagonal drags the horizontal line, and hatches the domain below this line and above the diagonal. (For instance, if, in Fig. 2.57, x increases from the value u to the value v, the filled area is increased by the hatched triangle.) When moving towards the bottom-left comer, the diagonal point drags the vertical line, and hatches everything to the right of this line and above the diagonal as in Fig. 2.58. The output y(t) is the area of both shaded and hatched domains with respect to the measure #.
2.4 EXAMPLES OF TECHNICAL TOOLBOXES
239
FIGURE 2.56 The set S given by typical characteristic function r/E (~,. In particular the set @, is invariant with respect to piecewise continuous inputs. Clearly, after some time the 'tail' of the curve Ls(t) becomes a continuous piecewise linear curve L, whose links are parallel to one of the coordinate axes.
The Krej~i Theorem The 'picture definition' of the dynamics given above works formally only for piecewise monotone functions. There exists also a simple and very convenient general analytic definition, first discovered, probably, by Pavel Krej~i, which we will also use below. We recall that the play nonlinearity describes a mechanical device illustrated by Fig. 2.59. Here a bean B can be moved along the string S. We control a frame F which can be moved along a string S forward and backwards. The position x(t) of the handle is a varying input. The bean moves only if the left end of the frame pushes it forward, or if the right end of the frame pushes it backward. The position y(t) of the center of the bean is the output. This 'device' is the play operator with the width w = s - r/2 where s is the width of the frame, and r is the radius of the bean. We will illustrate the relationship between the play operator and the Preisach model first by Fig. 2.60 below.
240
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
FIGURE 2.57 Evolution of the set S corresponding to the state r/of the Preisach nonlinearity; increasing input.
Here we have many (ideally infinitely many) strings all parallel to the diagonal fl = a. There are also (infinitely) small beans, one on each string. There is no gravity, so beans do not move without external influence. We control the position of the angle-shape frame F, whose origin O is always at the diagonal a - ft. The position of the origin with respect to the scale x is the input. Initially, let the beans be located along a certain line L = L0, which bounds the set described by the initial state 1/= r/(0) of the Preisach system. We suppose that the initial position of O coincides with the intersection of L with the diagonal. Since r/~ ~, the whole line L is within the initial position of the frame. Then, when time passes, the beans will be moved (to the north-east when the input increases, and to the south-west, when the input decreases). It is easy to see that at any timemoment the beans will be positioned along the line L~l(t). This sketches the picture proof of the following Krej~i theorem. THEOREM2.4.1. Let P[to, x(t0); u] denote a one parameter family of the play nonlinearities with the initial state x(to) E ~ at to and the parameter u~O. Let rl(t) ~ if,,, t~to be the varying state of a Preisach nonlinearity for an input x(t), t~to and let the set S(t), corresponding to r/(t), be defined by a continuous
241
2.4 EXAMPLES OF TECHNICAL TOOLBOXES
FIGURE 2.58 Evolution of the set S corresponding to the state r/of the Preisach nonlinearity; decreasing input.
FIGURE 2.59 The play nonlinearity.
function
~S(t), see
~l(t)(U)
(2.172). Then
-- ~S(t)(U)
-- P[t0, ~S(to)~ u]y(t),
where x(t) is the input of the Preisach nonlinearity.
y(t) - 2x(t),
t~to.
242
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
FIGURE 2.60 The Preisach nonlinearity as a family of play nonlinearities. Interestingly, with some minor restrictions a play nonlinearity m a y be considered also as a Preisach nonlinearity.
Algorithmic Description Restricted Set of States In this text we are mainly interested in an even more restricted set of states of the Preisach model. These are the states ~/ corresponding to the sets S ~ FI b o u n d e d by the lines L with an infinite horizontal link, and with a finite n u m b e r of vertical and horizontal links, see Fig. 2.61. We denote the height of the infinite horizontal link by w (1). Let w (2k), 1 < 2kKK, be the ascending sequence of the horizontal coordinates of the vertical links. That is, the vertical links belong to the straight lines L2k = (W(2k), fl), 1 < 2 k ~ K . Let also w(2k+l), 1 < 2k + I ~ K , be the descending
2.4 EXAMPLES OF TECHNICAL TOOLBOXES
243
0
f
I
I
161
14
I21
i
w2
w4
w6
w5
i
w3
w1
FIGURE 2.61 State r/ ~ ~, that defines a set S bounded by the piecewise-linear curve L. sequence of the vertical coordinates of the finite horizontal links. By the definition numbers w (k), l <.k <<.K, satisfy the inequalities W (1) > . . .
> w(2k0 - 1 ) > w(2k0) > . . .
> W (2),
W (1) >
> w(2k0 +1) > w(2k0) > . . .
> W (2),
...
if K - 2k0; if K = 2k0 + 1.
(2.173)
The totality W of all states ~/, described by the finite n u m b e r of links as above, m a y be naturally identified with the family of all finite sequences w = {w k }lK
satisfying the inequalities (2.173). We emphasize that the lengths K - #w of different elements from W m a y be different. We introduce also the semiclosed intervals I0 = (cx~, w(1)], Ii=(-cx~, W(2)] and !k--[W (k-l), w(k+l)), 2Kk
CHAPTER 2 Differential Equations with Hysteresis
244
(TR) Let s be defined by x(a) ~ Ir Then assign K = K(a) = #w(a) := s + 1; afterwards assign w (K(~)) (a) := x(a). Note that the function K(t) = #w(t), zKtKa, is piecewise constant with the jump-points ti given by ti -- x - 1 ( w (ki) ('~)),
where
w (ki) ('~) E [x('~), x(o)].
Moreover, all components of w(t) except the last one are unchanged between the successive jumps. This rule (TR), together with the semigroup property, can be conveniently used as a base for an algorithmic description of the evolution of the state of the Preisach model, and in numerical algorithms for solving ODEs with the Preisach model.
Transformation Rule for Outputs
Let us also discuss a similar transformation rule to compute the varying outputs of the P